1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SPECIFICATIONS FOR GENERAL CONSTRUCTION 11 12

13 FreemansburgFreemansburg

14 MunicipalMunicipal BuildingBuilding 15 Proposed Addition & Renovations 16 At 600 Monroe Street, Freemansburg, PA 18017 17 for 18 19 20 The Borough of Freemansburg 21 22 600 Monroe Street 23 Freemansburg, Pennsylvania 18017 24 25 26 27 28 Date: April 23, 2019 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 1 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work 01011 Description of the Work 01015 Contractors Use of the Premises 01030 Allowances & Alternatives 01045 Cutting & Patching 01049 Supervision & Coordination 01050 Permits, Inspections & Fees 01200 Project Meetings 01300 Submittals & Substitutions 01400 Quality Control 01500 Temporary Facilities, Utilities & Controls 01501 Safety 01710 Cleaning 01720 Project Records & Documents 01730 Operation and Maintenance Records & Warranties DIVISION 2: SITE WORK 02060 Demolition & Disposal 02100 Survey & Stakeout 02200 Excavation, Grading and Backfilling 02512 Asphalt Paving, Traffic Marking & Signage 02710 Site Drainage 02800 Landscaping 02861 Chain Link Fencing 02934 Segmental Retaining Wall DIVISION 3: CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03250 Construction Expansion & Contraction Joints 03275 Cast In Place Concrete 03300 Concrete Hardener DIVISION 4: MASONRY 04100 CMU Masonry DIVISION 5: METALS 05210 Structural Steel & Miscellaneous Metal 05712 Railings DIVISION 6: WOOD AND PLASTICS 06067 High Pressure Plastic Laminates 06100 Rough Carpentry 06200 Finish Carpentry 06400 Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07140 Masonry Water Repellant System 07190 Moisture & Air Barriers 07212 Board Insulation 07213 Fiberglass Building Insulation 07270 Fluid Applied Waterproof Air Barrier Membrane 07411 Preformed Metal Wall Panels 07530 Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing & Insulation System 07620 Flashing & Sheet Metal 07631 Gutters & Downspouts 07900 Sealants & Caulking DIVISION 8: DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 Steel Doors & Frames

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 2 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

08200 Wood Doors 08305 Access Panels 08400 Aluminum Entrances, Doors, & Storefronts 08610 Replacement Windows 08560 Bullet Resistant Transaction Window 08710 Finish Hardware 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09310 Ceramic Tile 09500 Acoustical Tile & Ceiling Suspension System 09650 Resilient Flooring 09680 Modular Carpet & Accessories 09900 Painting & Finishing 09950 Lead Paint Removal & Abatement DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES 10160 Toilet Compartments 10440 Identifying Devices 10442 Exterior Signage 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 10550 Postal Specialties 10800 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS 12310 Cabinets, Casework & Countertops

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 3 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2 3 SECTION - 01010 : SUMMARY OF WORK 4 5 I. GENERAL 6 7 A. STIPULATIONS: 8 1. The section "AIA General Conditions, Document A201, 1997 edition" forms a 9 part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same force and 10 effect as if printed herewith in full. 11 2. The terms "General Contractor", "Contractor", and “Owner” shall have the 12 same meaning in this document. 13 14 B. RELATED DOCUMENTS: 15 1. The Contract Drawings and the Standard Form of Agreement apply to this 16 Section. 17 18 C. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE SCOPE OF WORK: 19 1. Work included under this project consists of the construction of the 1-Story 20 Addition & Renovations to the existing Freemansburg Municipal Building, 600 21 Monroe Street, Freemansburg, PA (Northampton County) and as listed on the title 22 page of this specification. 23 2. All work shall be performed by multiple prime contractors, each under direct and 24 separate agreement with the Borough. 25 a. The General Contractor shall have responsibility for overall 26 coordination of the work of all contractors at all sites. 27 b. Work of the Contractor shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, 28 the furnishing of all labor, superintendence, materials, tools and 29 equipment and performing all work necessary to complete all 30 Construction at the satisfaction of, and subject to approval of the 31 Architect and the Owner. 32 3. All construction work shown on the contract drawings and not expressly 33 mentioned in the specifications, and all work specified and not shown on the 34 drawing, but obviously necessary to the proper execution of same, shall be 35 performed by the Contractor, as it is not the intent to delineate or describe every 36 detail and feature of work. 37 a. No additions to the Contract Sum will be approved for any materials, 38 equipment and/or labor to perform work hereunder unless it can be clearly shown 39 to be beyond the scope and intent of the drawings and specifications and 40 absolutely essential to the proper execution of the work. 41 4. All Contractors shall obtain and pay for all permits and inspections as necessary to 42 their work. Drawings and other documents have been reviewed by the Borough and 43 permits are ready for issue pending Contractor applications. 44 45 D. PRIME CONTRACTS & GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF EACH 46 All work shall be performed by multiple prime contractors, each under direct and separate 47 agreement with the Township. The Contractors shall be: 48 49  General Contractor : 50 o The General Contractor shall be responsible for construction of the building 51 including excavation for footing and foundations, foundations and footings, 52 building structure, concrete slabs, building enclosure, and the building 53 interior. 54 o The work of the General Contractor’s work shall include the Site Work. 55 o The work of the General Contractor’s work shall include the re-roofing of the 56 the existing borough building (excluding the Police Station Wing) 57

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 4 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1  Plumbing Contractor : 2 o The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all plumbing piping, fixtures 3 and fittings including below grade sanitary and domestic water supply piping 4 to a point five feet from the building perimeter where he shall connect it to 5 service piping installed by the Site Contractor. The Plumbing Contractor’s 6 work shall include the floor drainage system. Plumbing Contractor shall be 7 responsible to make connections to underground domestic water and 8 sanitary service piping installed by the Site Contractor. 9 o The Plumbing Contractor shall make water supply and drainage connections 10 to the under floor heating system installed by the General Contractor. 11 o The Plumbing Contractor shall provide and install a complete natural gas 12 distribution system within the building. 13 14  Heating & Ventilation Contractor (HVAC Contractor): 15 o The Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Contractor shall be responsible 16 for complete and operational heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems 17 including controls. 18 19  Electrical Contractor: The Electrical Contractor shall provide a fully functioning 20 electrical system. Work shall include: 21 o Electrical service equipment and meter 22 o Electrical panels and circuit breakers 23 o Electrical distribution 24 o Outlets and devices 25 o Electrical connections to equipment supplied by others. 26 o All lighting attached to the building and all site lighting standard and heads 27 including foundations and underground service to site fixtures. 28 o Fire detection and alarm system 29 o Telephone and data distribution systems from telephone and data hubs 30 provided by the Borough’s data consultant to terminal outlets as shown on 31 the drawings. 32 33 34 35 II. WORK SEQUENCE: 36 37 A. SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION: 38 1. The contractor shall prepare a schedule of construction activities for the 39 review and approval of the owner prior to the commencement of any work. 40 2. The schedule shall indicate the work will occur at any one time, the progress 41 of work, and the length of time required to complete the work. 42 43 B. WORK COMMENCEMENT: 44 1. The owner will issue a general notification when the work will commence. 45 46 C. COORDINATION: 47 1. Note that the Work of the General Construction Contract shall include 48 coordination as necessary to maintain safe and peaceful occupancy of the 49 building throughout the construction period. 50 51 F. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION MEASURES: 52 1. Note that all temporary construction measures as necessary to maintain safe, 53 clean and essentially dust free working conditions in the building and each 54 apartment where work is occurring while work is in progress in the construction. 55

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 5 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 III. VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENTS: 2 3 A. VERIFICATION: 4 1. Before ordering any materials or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify 5 all measurements at the site. 6 2. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between actual 7 measurements and dimensions shown. 8 3. Refer such differences to the Architect for consideration before beginning 9 work. 10 11 12 13 SECTION - 01011: DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK 14 15 I. DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK: 16 17 A. SCOPE: 18 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for 19 the construction work as shown on the drawings, specified herein and as 20 necessary to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 21 2. Work areas shall include but not necessarily be limited to: 22 23 B. WORK shall include but not necessarily be limited too: 24 1. Building Construction: Labor and materials of all trades as required to 25 construct the New Addition, including the Architectural, Structural, & Land 26 Development components that form the building shell. 27 a. Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, & Electrical, Scope of Work is 28 included in the scope of the work. 29 2. Demolition: The complete demolition and removal of the existing buildings, 30 and structures, etc., as shown on the drawings, specified herein and as 31 necessary to complete the work. 32 33 34 35 36 SECTION – 01015: CONTRACTOR'S USE OF THE PREMISES 37 38 I. CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES: 39 40 A. PREMISES: 41 1. The Contractor shall have the right to enter upon and use the premises for 42 purposes relating to the construction activities during the course of the 43 construction work. 44 2. The Contractor shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with materials 45 and equipment. 46 3. The Contractor shall secure the premises upon completion of each day's 47 work. 48 49 50 II. PRECAUTIONS: 51 52 A. JOB SITE: 53 1. The General Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to maintain the 54 job site in a safe condition throughout the construction period. 55 2. Such precautions shall include work as necessary to protect and maintain the 56 use of public streets, walks and entries during the construction of all

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 6 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 improvements. 2 a. Confine Operations at Site to Areas Permitted by: 3 1) Law 4 2) Ordinances 5 3) Permits 6 4) Contract Documents 7 b. Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials and equipment. 8 c. Do not load structure with weight that will endanger structure. 9 d. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products 10 stored on premises. 11 e. Move any stored products which interfere with operations of owner or 12 other contractor. 13 f. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for 14 operations. 15 g. Limited use of site for storage: The Owner will provide limited site 16 areas for staging area locations. 17 18 19 20 SECTION - 01030 : ALLOWANCES & ALTERNATIVES 21 22 I. GENERAL: 23 24 A. UNIT COSTS: 25 1. The contractor shall state in his proposal the following quantities and unit 26 costs included in the bid price. 27 2. The Unit Costs shall be used to compute the extra cost should additional 28 materials be required and the credit should less material be required. 29 3. The Unit costs shall be as outlined on the form of proposal. 30 31 B. IMPORTED FILL MATERIALS: 32 1. The Contractor shall state in his contract price the unit cost in the Base Bid 33 (and the quantities included) of imported fill for the following types: 34 a. Under building foundations, and slabs, 35 b. Under steps, walks, and vehicular pavement, and 36 c. Under lawns, and unpaved areas. 37 38 II. ALLOWANCES: 39 40 A. GENERAL: 41 1. The Contractor shall include in the base price of his proposal all allowance 42 amounts as shown on the drawings or listed in the specification. 43 2. Allowances shall include material costs only or labor and material costs as 44 specified in the allowance description. 45 3. The Contractor shall present invoices for delivered allowance materials (and 46 labor when applicable) and settlement shall be the difference between invoice 47 figure plus 15% for Contractor overhead and profit and specified allowance 48 amounts as listed in this specification. 49 50 B. DOOR HARDWARE: 51 1. An allowance of $12,000 shall be included in the base contract price for the 52 purchase and delivery of door hardware. 53 2. All labor to install door hardware shall not be included in the allowance, but 54 shall be included in the base contract price. 55 56 C. WALL TILE:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 7 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 1. An allowance shall be included in the base contract price for the purchase 2 and delivery of 6”x 12” wall tile. 3 2. All labor to install wall tile shall not be included in the allowance, but shall be 4 included in the base contract price. 5 6 7 8 III. ALTERNATIVES: 9 10 A. GENERAL: 11 1. The Contractor shall state in his proposal the change in cost for each 12 alternative shown on the drawings or listed in the specification. 13 2. The Owner may accept or reject any and all alternatives. 14 15 B. BID ALTERNATE -1: The Contractor shall state in his proposal the Decrease in Price, 16 should the Owner decide Not to proceed with the (Base Bid) Reconstruction of the front 17 (North) stoop & sidewalks to provide a Handicap Accessible front entrance, designed in 18 compliance of the ADA Guidelines & ANSI 117.1. 19 20 C. BID ALTERNATE-2: The Contractor shall state in his proposal the Decrease in Price, 21 should the Owner decide Not to proceed with the (Base Bid) Renovations of the existing 22 Toilet Rooms to bring them into compliance of the ADA Guidelines & ANSI 117.1. 23 24 D. BID ALTERNATE-3: The Contractor shall state in his proposal the Decrease in Price, 25 should the Owner decide Not to proceed with the (Base Bid) Construction of a Interior 26 Ramp Assembly In Meeting Room-114, designed in compliance of the ADA Guidelines & 27 ANSI 117.1. 28 29 E. BID ALTERNATE-4: The Contractor shall state in his proposal the Decrease in Price, 30 should the Owner decide Not to proceed with the (Base Bid) Construction of the Exterior 31 Ramp Assembly off the Proposed Addition, designed in compliance of the ADA 32 Guidelines & ANSI 117.1. 33 34 F. BID ALTERNATE-5: The Contractor shall state in his proposal the Decrease in Price, 35 should the Owner decide Not to proceed with the (Base Bid) Replacement of Existing 36 Flooring with Slip Retardant Resilient Tile Flooring in the Following Rooms: Exist. Hall 37 -120, Meeting Room-114, Break Room-117, Vestibule-115, Chairs-116, Files-113, 38 Exist. Hall-109, Existing Toilet-112, Toilet-108, to be in compliance of the ADA 39 Guidelines & ANSI 117.1. 40 41 G. BID ALTERNATE-6: The Contractor shall state in his proposal the Decrease in Price, 42 should the Owner decide Not to proceed with the (Base Bid) Reconstruction of the 43 Platform Area -118. 44 45 H. BID ALTERNATE-7: The Contractor shall state in his proposal the Decrease in Price, 46 should the Owner decide Not to proceed with the (Base Bid) Wood Wainscoting of the 47 Walls in Meeting Room-114. 48 49 I. BID ALTERNATE-8: The Contractor shall state in his proposal the Decrease in Price, 50 should the Owner decide Not to proceed with the (Base Bid) Construction of the New 51 Parking Lot Area, Retaining Wall, Parking Lot Lights as shown on the Site Improvements 52 Plan. 53 54 J. BID ALTERNATE-9: The Contractor shall state in his proposal the Decrease in Price, 55 should the Owner decide Not to proceed with the (Base Bid) Renovations of the existing 56 Fire House North Entrance to bring it into compliance of the ADA Guidelines & ANSI 57 117.1. 58

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 8 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION – 01045: CUTTING & PATCHING 2 3 I. CUTTING & PATCHING: 4 5 A. GENERAL: 6 1. The Contractor shall be responsible to perform all cutting and patching as 7 necessary to complete the construction work. 8 2. It is expected that cutting and patching shall be kept to an absolute minimum 9 through proper scheduling and coordination of the work. 10 3. However, in the event that cutting and patching are required all patched 11 surfaces shall match adjacent surfaces in material, texture and quality. 12 13 14 15 SECTION – 01049: SUPERVISION & COORDINATION 16 17 I. SUPERVISION & COORDINATION: 18 19 A. COORDINATION: 20 1. The General Contractor shall coordinate all work on the project with all trades 21 so as to assure the proper prosecution of the work. 22 23 B. SUPERVISION: 24 1. The General Contractor shall provide all supervision and coordination of the 25 work of all trades. 26 2. The Contractor will provide the services of a supervisor, experienced in all 27 phases of commercial construction, full time at the construction site. 28 29 30 31 SECTION – 01050: PERMITS, INSPECTIONS & FEES 32 33 I. PERMITS, INSPECTIONS & FEES: 34 35 A. GENERAL: 36 1. The Contractor shall provide all permits, provide and pay for all inspections 37 and pay all fees associated or required by law with the performance of his work 38 at each construction site. 39 2. Permits shall include but not be limited to: 40 41 A. PERMITS: 42 1. All Permits as required by governing bodies having jurisdiction at the work 43 site including building permits, and permits as required as required to complete 44 the land development work. 45 46 B. INSPECTIONS: 47 1. Inspections shall include all inspections required by or performed by 48 governing bodies having jurisdiction at the work site. 49 2. All such inspections shall be arranged by and scheduled by the respective 50 contractor. 51 52 C. FEES: 53 1. All Fees associated with the above permits and inspections shall be paid 54 by The Contractor cited with the above permits and inspections shall be paid by 55 The Contractor. 56 2.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 9 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2 3 4 SECTION – 01200: PROJECT MEETINGS 5 6 I. PROJECT MEETINGS : 7 8 A. GENERAL: 9 1. Project Meetings/Job Conferences shall be held on a regular basis during the 10 construction period. 11 a. Meetings shall be attended by the Contractor or his designated 12 representatives, representatives of the Owner, the Architect, and 13 representatives of agencies / authorities having jurisdiction / interest in 14 the progress of the work. 15 2. Project Meetings/JOB Conferences will be generally held at the work site at a 16 mutually agreeable time. 17 18 B. MINUTES: 19 The Architect shall prepare minutes of the project meetings/job conferences and 20 distribute to the Contractor, Owner, and all in attendance. 21 22 C. REVIEW OF MINUTES: 23 Minutes shall be reviewed by all Corrections, additions or changes to the project 24 meeting minutes shall be submitted to the Architect within five working days of 25 receipt. 26 27 II. MEETING SCHEDULING: 28 29 A. SCHEDULED MEETINGS: 30 1. Job Conferences shall be held at least every (2) two weeks. 31 2. Special meetings shall be scheduled as the need arises. 32 2. Special meetings shall be called by the Architect, Owner or Contractor. 33 34 B. ARCHITECT: 35 1. The Architect, or his representatives, shall be available on an as needed basis 36 to the Contractor throughout the construction period. 37 38 B. PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING: 39 1. A pre-construction meeting shall be held at a mutually agreed time and 40 place, prior to commencement of any construction activities. 41 2. Purpose of pre-construction meeting shall be to establish the arrangement 42 of Contractor's forces and personnel, those of the Architect and Owner, to open 43 channels of communication, schedule critical work, execute and distribute 44 contract documents. 45 46 C. REGULAR JOB CONFERENCES: 47 1. The purpose of regular Job Conferences shall be at a minimum: 48 a. Review the progress of the work with regard to project schedule and 49 quality. 50 b. Initiate administration of progress payments. 51 c. Contractor shall prepare Applications for Payments and submit to 52 Architect at the monthly Project Meeting. 53 d. Review and revise as necessary previous project minutes. 54 e. Distribute shop drawings and other project document submissions. 55 f. Process Field Orders and Change Orders.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 10 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 g. Review project problems, expedite work. 2 3 4 SECTION - 01300 : SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS 5 6 I. SUBMITTALS & SHOP DRAWINGS: 7 8 A. DISTRIBUTION: 9 1. The Contractor shall prepare and distribute all submittals as required by the 10 specifications, as necessary to establish conformance with the requirements of 11 the specification, and as necessary for the selection of materials to be reviewed 12 by the Owner and Architect. 13 a. Submittals shall be distributed in a timely and orderly fashion so as to 14 properly execute the work and work schedule. 15 b. The Contractor shall prepare accurate and complete samples as 16 required by the specification of all sample materials. 17 c. Unless color and pattern is precisely described in the contract 18 documents, the Contractor shall submit accurate sample charts of all 19 colors and patterns available for the specified product. 20 21 B. REVIEW: 22 1. Review of submissions, samples and shop drawings by the Architect shall not 23 be construed as to constitute approval of all conditions and details, but shall be 24 construed to represent only that materials and details generally conform with the 25 intent of the contract. 26 a. Approval of submittals by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor 27 of responsibility to coordinate all methods of construction and details, 28 nor relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors which may exist 29 in submissions. 30 b. Architect may request revisions to submittals. 31 1) Such revisions will be reviewed by The contractor, submittals 32 revised as appropriate, and resubmitted to the Architect. 33 2) In the event that the Contractor considers a requested revision 34 to be incorrect or inaccurate it shall be brought to the immediate 35 attention of the Architect. 36 37 38 39 40 SECTION - 01400 : QUALITY CONTROL 41 42 I. QUALITY CONTROL: 43 44 A. GENERAL: 45 1. The Contractor shall provide testing and inspection service as required by the 46 specification, as required by Law, ordinance and order of any public agency/ 47 authority having jurisdiction at the time and place of work. 48 49 A. TESTING: 50 1. All testing shall be performed in complete conformance with pertinent codes 51 and standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials. 52 53 B. REPORTS: 54 1. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of five (5) copies of all test reports 55 for the review and approval of the Architect. 56 57 C. RESPONSIBILITY:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 11 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 1. The Contractor shall pay for testing as required by this specification. 2 3 D. ADDITIONAL TESTING: 4 1. The Owner shall pay for such initial testing services not specified which the 5 Owner or Architect deem necessary. 6 2. In the event that any initial tests indicate non-compliance with the contract 7 documents, all subsequent retesting occasioned by the non-compliance shall be 8 paid for by the Contractor. 9 3. Subsequent retesting shall be performed by the same testing lab which 10 performed the initial testing 11 12 13 14 SECTION – 01500: TEMPORARY FACILITIES, UTILITIES & CONTROLS 15 16 I. TEMPORARY FACILITIES, UTILITIES & CONTROLS: 17 18 A. CONTRACTOR: 19 1. The Contractor shall provide essential temporary facilities, utilities and 20 controls as outlined below during the construction period. 21 a. Heat, 22 b. Water 23 c. Electricity 24 d. Light 25 e. Sanitary facilities. 26 2. Such facilities provided by the Contractor shall include but not be limited to: 27 a. Temporary enclosures and barricades, signs, warning lights and the 28 like as may be necessary to protect persons entering and using the 29 building and as necessary to secure the building. 30 b. Storage and protection of construction materials. 31 c. Telephone/communication facilities as the contractor deems 32 necessary. 33 d. Temporary partitions and/or plastic sheeting as necessary to protect 34 the work area and protect the occupied office area from dust and debris. 35 36 B. SCOPE: 37 1. The Contractor shall maintain all temporary utilities provided by him in 38 proper condition throughout the construction period and remove all such 39 temporary work upon completion of the contract as created in the course of 40 performance of his own work. 41 42 43 44 SECTION – 01501: SAFETY REQUIREMENTS DURING CONSTRUCTION 45 46 I. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS DURING CONSTRUCTION: 47 48 A. GENERAL: 49 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for safety of all persons and property on 50 the construction site including areas of construction in the public right of way 51 and on adjacent sites where construction activities are occurring. 52 2. The Contractor shall provide safety measures and materials as necessary. 53 54 B. NORMAL BUSINESS OPERATIONS: 55 1. The Contractor is advised that normal business operations will continue 56 through-out the construction period.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 12 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2 B. SAFETY: 3 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for safety in all ways at the construction 4 site. 5 2. Prior to construction the Contractor shall present a plan outlining his 6 methods to ensure safety at the site for the review and approval of the Owner. 7 3. Safety concerns and methods shall include but not necessarily be limited to 8 the following: 9 a. Barricades, temporary walls and enclosures shall be constructed as 10 required to allow normal business operations to will continue through- 11 out the construction period 12 b. Open ditches must be fenced; where walks cross such ditches, 13 bridged walkways must be provided with rails on both sides. 14 1) Bridged walkways must be adequately lighted at night. 15 c. Temporary walks and roads should be surfaced by number 2 crushed 16 stone if they are to be in public use. 17 d. Walks & Roadways used by both Contractor and the public shall be 18 kept in repair and cleared by the Contractor at least once each day and 19 more often as conditions require. 20 e. No obstructions are to be placed on or within 15 feet of fire hydrants. 21 Hydrants must be accessible for fire fighting purposes. 22 f. Any type of temporary heating units used must be adequately 23 protected and attended. 24 g. Where walkways, roadways, or entrances used by the public are 25 adjacent to or pass under construction scaffolding or near building edge, 26 the Contractor shall provide an adequate covering for such area to 27 protect passerby from falling objects. 28 h. All temporary construction sheds, trailers, and flammable liquid 29 storage areas belonging to Contractors shall be placed on the 30 construction site to minimize any danger to the property and the public. 31 i. Map of location & route to closest hospital or emergency medical 32 treatment facility. 33 j. The Owner is available for consultation regarding the above items and 34 any other safety issues. 35 36 37 38 SECTION – 01710: CLEANING 39 40 I. CLEANING: 41 42 A. GENERAL: 43 1. The Contractor shall maintain the premises in a clean and orderly manner 44 throughout the construction period and thoroughly clean the premises upon 45 completion of the contract. 46 47 B. CLEANING DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD: 48 1. Maintain the site and buildings in a clean and orderly manner throughout the 49 construction period. 50 a. Store all materials, tools and equipment in an orderly arrangement, 51 permitting adequate access and providing adequate protection for items 52 and personnel. 53 b. Do not permit the accumulation of scrap, debris or waste material. 54 c. Store all such material in containers approved by the Architect. 55 d. Remove scrap and waste from the work site periodically. 56 e. Comply with requirements of all authorities/agencies having 57 jurisdiction at the place and time of work.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 13 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 f. Thoroughly clean the occupied work area of all work debris and dust 2 upon completion of each work period. 3 1) No materials shall be left in the occupied area. 4 5 C. FINAL CLEANING: 6 1. Provide a thorough cleaning of the site and buildings upon completion of the 7 work of the contract. 8 a. Such work shall include but not be limited to: removal of all dirt and 9 waste materials from the exterior of the buildings; removal of all waste 10 materials, trash and debris from the site; thorough cleaning of all interior 11 spaces of both buildings including removal of trash, waste materials, 12 paint splatter, dirt, stains and the like from all interior materials; and 13 clean inside and outside surfaces of all glass. 14 b. Perform such cleaning in a timely manner within the contract 15 construction period. 16 c. Use cleaning equipment and agents as recommended by all the 17 various materials suppliers. 18 19 20 21 SECTION - 01720: PROJECT RECORDS & DOCUMENTS 22 23 I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 24 25 A. RECORDS: 26 1. The Contractor shall maintain accurate records of the work of this contract, 27 changes on the contract, payments made by the Owner, and submittals. 28 a. Maintain one "job set of contract documents" at the construction site 29 at all times during the construction period. 30 b. Record changes in the work, whether arising from Field Orders, 31 Change Orders, or contractors independent judgment accurately on the 32 "job set". 33 34 B. AS-BUILTS: 35 1. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner, one reproducible set of "as built" 36 drawings of the construction as completed in place at the work site. 37 a. Upon completion of the work of this contract the Contractor shall 38 transfer one complete set of records to the Owner. 39 40 41 42 SECTION - 01730: OPERATION, MAINTENANCE RECORDS, & WARRANTIES 43 44 I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 45 46 A. GENERAL: 47 1. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner, upon completion of the work of 48 the contract, a complete set of operation and maintenance records for all 49 materials and equipment installed as part of the work of the contract. 50 51 B. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE RECORDS: 52 1. Such records shall include but not be limited to: 53 a. Complete operation and maintenance records of all appliances and 54 equipment including the manufacturers' recommendations with regard to 55 operation, lubrication, assembly, electrical schematics, maintenance

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 14 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 intervals, parts lists and sources of repair work and the like 2 b. Original guarantees and warranties on all labor and materials for 3 which guarantee or warranty is required by this specification. 4 c. Maintenance records for any materials or equipment installed during 5 the construction period and maintained by the Contractor. 6 d. Names and address of all vendors for materials or equipment installed 7 in the project. 8 9 II. WARRANTIES: 10 11 A. WARRANTY: 12 1. The Contractor shall provide the Owner, upon completion of the work of the 13 contract, an unconditional one year warranty on all labor and materials employed 14 in the completion of the project. 15 2. Additionally the Contractor shall provide the materials manufacturers' 16 warranty as required in other sections of this specification or in absence thereof, 17 the manufacturers' standard materials warranty. 18 19 20 21 III. PROJECT MANUAL: 22 23 A. GENERAL: 24 Written copies of maintenance & operation records, and warranties shall be 25 collected and bound into a notebook and delivered to the Owner. 26

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 15 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 DIVISION 2: SITEWORK 2 3 SECTION - 02060: DEMOLITION & DISPOSAL 4 5 I. GENERAL 6 7 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 8 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment to 9 complete all demolition as shown on the drawings and specified herein or as 10 may be necessary to complete the work of the contract. 11 2. Demolition shall include but not necessarily be limited to removal of existing 12 offices: finish flooring, ceilings, brick veneer, interior partitions, doors, entry 13 canopy & plumbing fixtures; as well as portions of existing concrete slabs & 14 paving, and miscellaneous materials. 15 3. Demolished materials shall be properly disposed of, off the construction site. 16 17 B. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 18 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 19 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 20 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 21 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 22 information specifically related to work of this section: 23 Section 02200: Excavation, Grading & Backfilling 24 DIVISION 15: PLUMBING (On Liberty Drawings) 25 DIVISION 15: HVAC (On Liberty Drawings) 26 DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL (On Liberty Drawings) 27 28 II. PRODUCTS: (NOT APPLICABLE) 29 30 III. EXECUTION: 31 32 A. OWNERSHIP OF MATERIALS: 33 1. All materials resulting from demolition activities shall become the property of 34 the Contractor and shall be removed from the site and properly disposed of. 35 36 B. EXISTING CONDITIONS: 37 1. Contract documents are prepared in accordance with available information as 38 to existing conditions and locations. 39 2. If, during construction, conditions are revealed or discovered which are at 40 variance with the contract documents, the Contractor shall notify the Architect at 41 once so that supplementary instructions may be prepared. 42 43 C. DAMAGE: 44 1. It is assumed by all that materials shown on the drawings to remain are in 45 acceptable condition at the beginning of the project. 46 2. If existing work to remain is damaged by any construction activities, such 47 work shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor to a condition equal to the 48 original. 49 50 D. SAFETY: 51 1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to take all necessary 52 precautions to insure the safety of the property and persons present at the site. 53 2. No materials or equipment shall be placed at the construction site until 54 adequacy of structural elements to safely support same without damage or 55 overstress is determined by the Contractor. 56

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 16 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 E. DISPOSAL: 2 1. Removal of demolition materials shall occur at regular intervals during the 3 demolition process. 4 2. No accumulation of demolition materials shall be permitted. 5 3. All debris shall be completely removed from the site. 6 4. On site burning shall not be permitted without the approval of the Owner, 7 5. Architect and all authorities/agencies having jurisdiction at the time and 8 place of work. 9 6. Upon completion of the demolition work all debris shall be completely 10 removed from the site and the entire property left in a clean and orderly 11 condition. 12 13 F. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: 14 1. In the event the Contractor detects or suspects the presence of hazardous 15 materials, exposed or discovered, during demolition activities, such conditions 16 shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Architect and the Owner. 17 2. Such hazardous materials shall not be removed or disposed until instructions 18 for proper methods for removal and disposal, have been issued by the Architect 19 and costs for such have been established to the satisfaction of the Owner. 20 21 G. RESTORATION: 22 1. All ground areas disturbed by demolition activities shall be restored to 23 approximate original grades. 24 2. All restored grades shall slope to drain surface water away from the building. 25 3. All interior areas disturbed by demolition activities shall be restored to match 26 adjacent surfaces. 27 28 H. PROCESS: 29 1. Cutting and removal as shown on the drawings is intended to represent 30 general conditions at the site and may not fully represent the extent of removal 31 necessary to complete the work of the contract. 32 2. The Contractor shall protect existing work and work to remain from damage 33 during demolition activities. 34 3. The Contractor shall provide shoring and bracing wherever necessary during 35 the demolition process. 36 4. Care shall be taken to contain dust and debris during demolition activities. 37 5. The Contractor shall prepare a plan for the organization of demolition 38 activities: 39 6. Shut off, terminate or cap existing public utilities in accordance with the 40 standards of the utility vendors; completely remove materials scheduled to be 41 removed, leaving remaining materials clean and solid and ready to receive new 42 construction; comply with all regulations of authorities and agencies having 43 jurisdiction over demolition activities at the time and place of work. 44 7. Remove the minimum materials necessary to complete the construction 45 activities. Holes left by demolition activities shall be repaired with new materials 46 to match existing adjacent material. 47 8. Removal of demolition materials shall occur at regular intervals during the 48 demolition process. 49 a. No accumulation of demolition materials shall be permitted. 50 b. All debris shall be completely removed from the site. 51 c. On site burning shall not be permitted without the approval of the 52 Owner, Architect and all authorities/agencies having jurisdiction at the 53 time and place of work. 54 d. Upon completion of the demolition work all debris shall be completely 55 removed from the site and the entire property left in a clean and orderly 56 condition.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 17 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 02100: SURVEY & STAKEOUT 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment to 7 establish all grades and lines for roads, curbs, driveways, parking lots, on-site & 8 off-site utilities, sedimentation & erosion control, exterior sidewalks, and 9 entry/exit slabs in the vicinity of the Addition as shown on the drawings, and as 10 necessary to properly complete the work. 11 12 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 13 1. The Contractor shall employ the services of a surveyor registered in the state 14 of the project site to complete the work of this section. 15 2. The slopes of all new sidewalks and entry/exit slabs shall conform to the 16 requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act . 17 a. Sidewalks shall slope a maximum of 1" in 20' of horizontal run. 18 1) Side to side slopes of sidewalks shall be 1/8" to 1/4" per foot 19 and shall slope to drain. 20 b. Slopes at entry/exit slabs shall be 1/8" to 1/4" per foot and shall 21 slope to drain. 22 23 C. DRAWINGS: 24 1. The drawings represent the best information available. 25 2. In the event the surveyor encounters field conditions at variance with the 26 drawings which will effect the work, such conditions shall be brought to the 27 immediate attention of the Architect. 28 a. Work shall not proceed until appropriate resolution of such conditions 29 is obtained to the mutual agreement of the Owner and the Contractor. 30 31 D. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 32 1. Documents affecting work of this section include are not necessarily limited 33 to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings and 34 the Standard Form of Agreement. 35 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 36 information specifically related to work of this section: 37 Section 02200: Excavation, Back-filling, & Grading 38 Section 02710: Site Drainage 39 DIVISION 3: CONCRETE 40 41 II. PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 42 43 III. EXECUTION 44 45 A. VERIFICATION: 46 1. The surveyor shall verify all horizontal distances and vertical elevations as 47 shown on the drawings. 48 2. The surveyor shall verify locations, both horizontal and vertical, of all 49 proposed sidewalks and entry/exit slabs. 50 3. The surveyor shall confirm limits of slopes as outlined in Quality Control 51 above. 52 4. Should any of proposed sidewalk and slabs as shown on the drawings fail to 53 meet the Quality Control limits for maximum and minimum slope and pitch as 54 outlined the surveyor shall notify the Architect at once. 55 56 B. CONTROLS: 57 1. The surveyor shall provide stakes or similar controls as required to locate

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 18 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 proposed sidewalks and entry/exit slabs both vertically and horizontally at the 2 work site. 3 2. Construction work shall not proceed until proper locations and elevations of 4 all proposed work has been established by the surveyor and approved by the 5 project architect. 6 3. All construction shall be executed in conformance with the approved survey 7 controls. 8 9

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 19 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION – 02200: EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING & GRADING 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment to 7 complete the excavation, backfilling, compaction, and grading as required, and 8 to restore the site to match adjacent elevations and properly drain, as specified 9 herein and as necessary to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 10 a. Work shall include all excavation, back-filling and grading as required 11 to complete construction of the Addition, and adjoining land 12 development features, such as but not limited too: parking areas, drives, 13 utilities, sedimentation & erosion control facilities. 14 15 B. CLASSIFICATION: All materials are classified. 16 1. Classified excavation assumes all excavation is earth. 17 2. Rock excavation (if encountered) shall be paid at pre-agreed unit cost. 18 The Contractor shall be additionally compensated for the removal of such 19 materials. 20 3. Excavation of such materials shall not proceed without the written approval of 21 the Owner and agreement as the value of such additional compensation and/or a 22 change order executed by the Contractor and the Owner. 23 Rock shall be defined as "ledge rock or boulders in excess of one cubic yard in 24 volume. 25 4. Other materials including but not limited to, loose or weathered rock, friable 26 shale, gravel, rock fill, broken concrete or cemented masonry fill which can 27 readily be removed with pick and shovel shall not be considered rock. 28 29 C. EXISTING UTILITIES: 30 1. EXISTING UTILITIES: IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR 31 TO LOCATE AND MARK THE LOCATIONS OF ALL EXISTING UTILITIES, PRIOR TO 32 COMMENCEMENT OF EXCAVATION ACTIVITIES. 33 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF 34 PENNSYLVANIA ACT 172 BY CALLING 1-800-242-1776 PRIOR THE 35 COMMENCEMENT OF ANY EXCAVATION ACTIVITIES. 36 37 D. SEDIMENTATION & EROSION CONTROL: 38 1. The Contractor shall comply with the Site Improvements Plan prepared by 39 Carroll Engineering Corp., 949 Easton Road, Warrington, PA 18976 and the 40 requirements of The Borough of Freemansburg, Northampton County, PA 41 through the construction period. 42 2. The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary facilities as required by 43 Northampton County to prevent sedimentation and erosion on the property and 44 to prevent sedimentation and erosion on adjacent properties or public ways. 45 46 E. GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT: 47 1. No Geotechnical Report was done. 48 49 F. QUALITY CONTROL: 50 1. The Owner will contract with an independent firm to provide on-site testing 51 and quality assurance for the placement of compacted fill, etc. 52 53 G. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 54 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 55 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 56 and the Form of Construction Agreement, the Soil Erosion & Sediment Control 57 Narrative, and the Borough of Freemansburg approved Site Improvements Plan

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 20 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 prepared Site Improvements Plan drawings prepared by Carroll Engineering 2 Corp., 949 Easton Road, Warrington, PA 18976 and the requirements of The 3 Borough of Freemansburg, Northampton County, PA through the construction 4 period. 5 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 6 information specifically related to work of this section: 7 Section 02100: Survey & Stakeout 8 Section 02512: Asphalt Paving, Traffic Marking & Signage 9 Section 02710: Site Drainage 10 DIVISION 3: CONCRETE 11 12 II. PRODUCTS 13 14 A. NON-STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIALS: 15 1. Excavated materials from the site, free of large rocks, masonry, frozen earth, 16 rubble or organic materials may be used as fill (provided the material has 17 adequate properties for use as fill). 18 2. Certified clean fill materials, as approved by the Architect, may be imported 19 to the site as necessary. 20 21 B. SUITABLE STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIALS: 22 1. The structural characteristics of any structural fill materials used below the 23 building foundations, floor slabs or paved areas of the site shall be known and 24 approved by the Architect prior to use. 25 2. Any on site materials to be used as structural fill shall be identified by the 26 Contractor so that appropriate testing and analysis to prove suitability for the 27 purpose may be performed by the Owner. 28 3. Any structural fill materials to be imported to the site by the Contractor shall 29 be tested by the Contractor and copies of the report shall be provided to the 30 Architect for his review and approval prior to delivery of any structural fill to the 31 site. 32 4. The Contractor shall provide laboratory tests and reports on all materials to 33 be imported to prove the suitability of the materials for the intended use. Tests 34 and reports shall be as required by the architect of all materials as placed to 35 prove correctness of installation. 36 5. Imported materials to be placed below building foundations and building 37 slabs shall be capable of supporting 3000 psf (min.) when compacted to 98% of 38 theoretical maximum dry density as determined by Modified Proctor (D1557). 39 2A Modified stone is acceptable for use as structural fill. 40 6. Imported materials to be placed below steps, walks and pavement shall be 41 capable of supporting 2000 psf when compacted to 95% of theoretical maximum 42 dry density as determined by Standard Proctor (D698). 2A Modified stone is 43 acceptable for use as structural fill. 44 7. Lawn and unpaved areas: Clean fill material of unspecified structural strength 45 compacted to 90% of theoretical maximum density as determined by Standard 46 Proctor (D698). 47 48 C. CRUSHED STONE: 49 1. Crushed stone shall be type 2A Modified or No.24 Course Aggregate as 50 defined by the Pennsylvania Department of Transportation. 51 52 D. TOPSOIL: 53 1. Topsoil shall be natural, fertile, friable, capable of sustained plant growth 54 and free of sub-soils, extraneous materials or stones larger than 1" diameter 55 56 III. EXECUTION 57 58 A. UTILITIES:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 21 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 1. Unless shown to be removed, protect active utility lines. 2 2. If active utility lines are encountered which are not shown on the drawing, 3 take steps to see that such lines are not damaged or service interrupted. Notify 4 the Architect at once. 5 3. If utility service is interrupted as a result of work performed under this 6 contract, take steps to restore service immediately at no additional expense to 7 the Owner. 8 9 B. PROTECTION OF PERSONS & PROPERTY: 10 1. Barricade open holes, trenches and depressions. 11 2. Post warning lights and signs and operate lights from dusk to dawn. 12 3. Protect structures, utilities and other site improvements from settlement, 13 lateral movement and other hazards as may result from construction activities. 14 15 C. DEWATERING: 16 1. Keep excavations dry to the maximum extent possible. 17 2. Remove all water, including rain water, encountered during excavation 18 activities. 19 3. Keep excavation and site in general free from ponding water. 20 21 D. EXCAVATION: 22 1. Perform all excavation to elevations as shown on the drawings, as specified 23 herein and as necessary to complete the work. 24 2. Contractor shall remove unsuitable fill materials or extra fill materials from 25 the property. 26 3. Perform all excavation in a manner to provide for proper drainage at all times 27 during the work. 28 4. Take special care to ensure that excavation bottoms are undisturbed-earth. 29 Slope sides of excavations to 1:1 or flatter, and must meet OSHA standards 30 based on soil type. 31 5. Shore and brace where such slopes are not possible. 32 6. Maintain sides of slopes in safe condition until completion of backfill 33 activities. 34 7. Protect excavation bottoms from freezing when atmospheric temperature is 35 less than 32 degrees F. 36 8. Clean excavations, hand excavate and trim excavations prior to the placement 37 of concrete. 38 39 E. BACKFILLING, FILLING & COMPACTING: 40 1. Backfill all excavations as promptly as progress of the work allows but after 41 inspection, testing, removal of forms and shoring, removal of trash and debris, 42 and removal of unsatisfactory fill materials. 43 2. Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8" loose depth. 44 Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of theoretical maximum 45 density determined by compaction test ASTM - D698or ASTM- D1557 as follows: 46 a. Structural fill below building footings and building slabs shall be 47 compacted to 98% of theoretical maximum dry density as determined by 48 Modified Proctor (D-1557). 49 b. Steps, walks and pavement: Compact to 95% of maximum dry density 50 as determined by Modified Proctor (D698). 51 C. Lawn and unpaved areas: Compact to 90% of maximum dry density as 52 determined by Modified Proctor. 53 3. Do not place backfill on or with wet or frozen materials. 54 4. Contractor shall be responsible for any abnormal settlement due to improper 55 backfill or compaction. 56 5. All backfilling shall conform with the recommendations of the soils report. 57

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 22 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 F. ROUGH GRADING: 2 1. Perform all rough grading as shown on the drawings, specified herein and as 3 required to complete the work of the contract. 4 2. Rough grades shall allow for the placement of finish grade and base materials 5 in the depths specified. 6 3. Perform rough grading in a manner to direct storm water away from the 7 buildings. 8 9 G. PLACING CRUSHED STONE: 10 1. Supply and place all crushed stone as shown on the drawings, specified 11 herein and as required to properly complete the work. 12 2. All site drainage structures and piping shall be placed on and embedded 13 within crushed stone. 14 3. Carefully place and level crushed stone in areas to receive concrete slabs or 15 bituminous paving. 16 17 H. FINISH GRADING: 18 1. Supply and place all topsoil as specified herein and as required to completely 19 restore all disturbed areas. 20 2. Prior to commencement of other grading and excavation, remove and 21 stockpile topsoil available in areas to be disturbed by construction as shown on 22 Site Improvement Plan. 23 3. Topsoil shall be stockpiled at a location on the site as approved by the 24 Owner. 25 4. Upon completion of rough grading place topsoil to a depth of 4" over all 26 areas disturbed by construction activities which will receive plant materials 27 including grass seed. 28 5. Rake all topsoil to remove stones larger than 1/2" dia., mixed sub-soils, 29 roots and debris. 30 6. Blend replaced topsoil into existing undisturbed earth. 31 32 I. MAINTENANCE OF NEWLY GRADED AREAS: 33 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. 34 2. Keep such areas free of trash and weeds. 35 3. Repair and re-establish re-graded areas, which may be disturbed by 36 construction activities or erosion at no additional expense to the Owner. 37 38 J. DISPOSAL OF EXTRANEOUS MATERIALS: 39 1. Unsuitable subsoil/fill materials shall be removed from the site and properly 40 disposed of.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 23 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 02512: ASPHALT PAVING, TRAFFIC MARKING & SIGNAGE 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. Provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for a complete 7 installation of asphalt paving (flexible pavement systems), traffic marking, & 8 signage in areas indicated on Architectural and the Site Improvements Plan 9 Drawings as specified herein and as required to complete the work of the 10 contract. 11 12 B. STANDARDS: 13 1. Work of this section shall be performed according to the definitions and 14 standards established by the Pennsylvania Department of Transportation and the 15 specifications contained herein. 16 17 C. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 18 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 19 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 20 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 21 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 22 information specifically related to work of this section: 23 Section 02100: Survey & Stakeout 24 Section 02200: Excavation, Backfilling, & Grading 25 Section 02710: Site Drainage 26 DIVISION 3: CONCRETE 27 28 II. MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES 29 30 A. CUTTING OF EXISTING BITUMINOUS PAVING: 31 1. Upon completion of survey operations and establishment of final grades the 32 existing asphalt paving shall be saw cut and paving to be replaced shall be 33 removed. 34 2. Cuts shall be clean, smooth and continuous. 35 3. Jagged and irregular edges shall not be permitted. 36 37 B. PATCHING OF EXISTING PAVING: 38 1. Patching of existing paving as required to restore areas disturbed by 39 trenching activities shall comply with requirements for new paving and Borough 40 of Freemansburg Standards. 41 42 C. GRADING & ROLLING OF EXISTING SUB-BASE: 43 1. Following the completion of demolition/disposal the Contractor shall place 44 imported (approved) fill materials over existing clean soils to elevations 45 consistent with bituminous paving sub-base. 46 47 D. BASE SOILS: 48 1. Shall be graded to meet the elevations as shown on the drawings. 49 2. Area to be paved shall be rolled and compacted in accordance with PennDOT 50 specification Form 408, section 350.3d. 51 3. The contractor will be required to eliminate soft sub-base as may be 52 discovered and replace such unacceptable materials with suitable materials 53 compacted in layers as required in Form 408. 54 4. The Contractor shall provide the services of a surveyor to install control offset 55 stakes to determine alignment and vertical elevation. 56

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 24 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2 F. BASE COURSE PAVING: 3 1. Provide and install Superpave Asphalt Mixture Design, WMA Base Course, PG 4 64-22, 0.0 to <0.3 Million ESCALS, 25.0 mm Mix, 3” depth on a compacted 5 subgrade. 6 2. The work shall be performed in complete accordance with Section 421 of 7 PennDOT Form 408. 8 9 G. FINISH PAVING: 10 1. Provide and install Superpave Asphalt Mixture Design, WMA Wearing Course, 11 PG 64-22, 0.0 to <0.3 Million ESCALS, 9.5 mm Mix, 1-1/2” depth, SRL-G. 12 2. The Base Course shall be cleaned prior to installation of wearing course. 13 3. Holes & depressions in the Base Course over 1" in depth shall be filled or 14 repaired with ID 2 material prior to installation of wearing course.” 15 16 G. JOINTS BETWEEN NEW & EXISTING PAVING: 17 1. Joints between new and existing paving shall be straight, neat and tight. 18 2. Cut edges of existing paving clean of all dust and dirt and shall be coated 19 with bituminous tars to waterproof and provide adhesion between materials. 20 3. Finish joints shall be coated with bituminous sealer oil/tar to weld and seal 21 joint. 22 23 I. TRAFFIC MARKING - LINE PAINTING: 24 1. Provide line painting to indicate parking spaces, directional symbols, and 25 handicapped parking areas as indicated on the land development drawings. 26 a. Lines and directional symbols shall be 4" wide U.O.N., as indicated on 27 the drawings. Color shall be white. 28 2. Painting Materials: Traffic marking paint shall be exterior Latex, low VOC, 29 specially formulated for application over bituminous paving surfaces, 1 coat 66 30 series Traffic & Zone Marking Finish as manufactured by CORONADO PAINT 31 COMPANY, Edgewater, FL 32132-0308 or approved equal. 32 a. Traffic Marking shall be installed by a line/symbol painting contractor. 33 b. Work shall be clean and neat. 34 c. Edges shall be straight and sharp. 35 d. Over-sprays and spills shall be completely removed. 36 e. All markings shall be accurately located as shown on the drawings. 37 3. Handicap Parking Space – Logo/Line Marking: 38 a. Provide painted wheelchair logo at the middle of each parking space to 39 indicate handicapped car and van parking areas as indicated on the 40 drawings. 41 42 J. HANDICAP PARKING SIGNAGE - POST SIGN: 43 1. Provide painted metal sign mounted to a post at the head of each parking 44 space to indicate handicapped car or handicapped van parking area as indicated 45 on the drawings. 46 47 K. PRECAST CONCRETE WHEEL STOP 48 1. Provide 6 ft. Precast Concrete Wheel Stop, Reinf. 5,000 psi concrete (72” L. x 9” 49 W. x 5” H.) with minimum of two #4 rebar pinned thru pavement. install as 50 indicated on the drawings.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 25 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 02710: SITE DRAINAGE 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work 6 1. The General Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and 7 equipment as shown on the Land Development Drawings, specified herein and as 8 necessary to properly complete the work of the contract. 9 2. Work shall include but not be limited to grading for purposes of storm water 10 management, storm water piping, and erosion & sedimentation control, specified 11 herein and as necessary to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 12 13 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 14 1. Work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Borough 15 of Freemsburg, Northampton County, PA regulations at the time & place of work. 16 2. Materials shall be in compliance with the standards & requirements of the 17 Pennsylvania Department of Transportation. 18 19 C. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 20 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and not necessarily limited 21 to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, The Contract Drawings, the 22 Standard form of Agreement, the Site Improvements Plan prepared by Carroll 23 Engineering Corp., 949 Easton Road, Warrington, PA 18976 and the 24 requirements of the Borough of Freemsburg, Northampton County, PA. 25 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 26 information specifically related to work of this section. 27 Section 02100: Survey & Stakeout 28 Section 02200: Excavation, Backfilling & Grading 29 30 II. PRODUCTS 31 32 A. GENERAL: 33 1. All materials shall be as shown on the Site Improvements Plan prepared by 34 Carroll Engineering Corp., 949 Easton Road, Warrington, PA 18976 and the 35 requirements of The Borough of Freemsburg, Northampton County, PA through 36 the construction period. 37 38 III. PROCEDURES: 39 40 A. GENERAL: 41 1. All materials shall be installed at the grades, elevations and slopes as shown on 42 the Site Improvements Plan prepared by Carroll Engineering Corp., 949 Easton 43 Road, Warrington, PA 18976 and the requirements of The Borough of Freemsburg, 44 Northampton County, PA. 45 46 B. EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL: 47 1. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Pennsylvania 48 Department of Environmental Resources (DER), and Northampton County 49 Conservation District (NCCD) through the construction period. 50 2. The Contractor shall provide temporary facilities as required by DER and 51 NCCD to prevent sedimentation and erosion on the property and to prevent 52 sedimentation and erosion on adjacent properties or public ways. 53 3. All procedures and schedules of work shall be in conformance with the Site 54 Improvements Plan prepared by Carroll Engineering Corp., 949 Easton Road, 55 Warrington, PA 18976 and the requirements of The Borough of Freemsburg,

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 26 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 Northampton County, PA through the construction period. 2 . 3

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 27 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 02800: LANDSCAPING 2 3 I. GENERAL: 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. Provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for a complete 7 installation of landscaping as shown on the Site Improvement Plans, specified 8 herein and as necessary to properly complete the work of the contract. 9 a. Work shall be limited to soil preparation, seeding, and installation of 10 shrubs and trees. 11 b. All areas disturbed by construction shall be seeded. 12 13 B. QUALITY: 14 1. Contractor shall maintain all landscape materials, including grass seeding, 15 shrubs and trees until issue of a Certificate of Substantial Completion, or for a 16 period of 90 days from date of acceptance of landscape by the Owner, if the 17 acceptance of landscaping follows issue of the Certificate of Substantial 18 Completion. 19 2. Contractor shall warranty all trees and shrubs for a period of one year. 20 21 C. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 22 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and not necessarily limited 23 to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, The Contract Drawings and 24 the Standard form of Agreement. 25 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 26 information specifically related to work of this section. 27 Section 02100: Survey & Stakeout 28 Section 02200: Excavation, Backfilling & Grading 29 30 II. MATERIALS: 31 32 A. GENERAL: 33 1. All materials shall be as shown on the Site Improvements Plan prepared by 34 Carroll Engineering Corp., 949 Easton Road, Warrington, PA 18976 and the 35 requirements of The Borough of Freemsburg, Northampton County, PA through 36 the construction period. 37 38 B. FERTILIZER: 39 1. Fertilizer shall be per requirements as called out on the Site Improvement 40 Plan. 41 42 C. GRASS SEEDING: 43 1. Grass seeding shall be per requirements as called out on the Site 44 Improvement Plan 45 46 D. TREES & SHRUBS: 47 1. Trees & Shrubs shall be of the sizes and types as shown on the Site 48 Improvement Plan. 49 50 E. MULCH: 51 1. Mulch shall be per requirements as called out on the Site Improvement Plan. 52 53 III. INSTALLATION: 54 55 A. GENERAL:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 28 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 1. All materials shall be installed as shown on the Site Improvements Plan 2 prepared by Carroll Engineering Corp., 949 Easton Road, Warrington, PA 18976 3 and the requirements of The Borough of Freemsburg, Northampton County, PA 4 through the construction period. 5 6 B. SEEDED AREAS: 7 1. Shall be per requirements as called out on the Site Improvements Plans. 8 9 C. TREES & SHRUBBERY: 10 1. Shall be per requirements as called out on the Site Improvements Plans. 11 12 D. PLANTING BEDS: 13 1. Shall be per requirements as called out on the Site Improvements Plans. 14 15 16

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 29 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 02861: CHAIN LINK FENCING 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment to remove portions of 6 existing chain link fencing for reuse and installation of new chain link fencing & gates as 7 shown on the drawings, included herein and as necessary for proper completion of the 8 work to the satisfaction of the Owner. Posts shall be set in concrete post footings. 9 10 B. SUBMITTALS & MILL CERTIFICATION 11 1. Shop Drawings: Include complete details of fence and gate construction, fence 12 height, post spacing, dimensions and unit weights of framework and concrete 13 footing details. 14 2. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalog cuts with printed specifications. 15 Manufacturer shall provide certification of compliance with material 16 specifications. Actual samples of the material may be requested. 17 18 C. DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: 19 1. Deliver material to the site in an undamaged condition. Carefully store 20 material off the ground to provide proper protection against oxidation caused by 21 ground moisture. 22 23 D. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 24 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and not necessarily limited 25 to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, The Contract Drawings and 26 the Standard form of Agreement. 27 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 28 information specifically related to work of this section: 29 Section 02100: Survey and Stake-out 30 Section 03100: Cast-In-Place Concrete 31 Section 02060: Demolition and Disposal 32 33 II. PRODUCTS: 34 35 A. MATERIALS 36 1. Acceptable Manufacturers (Basis of Design) 37 a. Allied Tube & Conduit, 16100 South Lathrop Avenue, Harvey, Illinois 38 60426, 708-339-1610, approved equal. 39 2. Framework: Steel pipe conforming to Standard Specification ASTM F1043, 40 Group IA (Schedule 40); external coatings per F1043 Type A; internal coatings 41 Type A, or high strength steel pipe triple coated per Standard Specification 42 a. ASTM F1043 Group IC (SS40 as manufactured by Allied Tube & 43 Conduit or approved equal); external coatings per F1043 Type B; internal 44 coatings per F1043 Type D. 45 b. All coatings to be applied after welding. 46 c. Pipe shall be straight, true to section and conform to the following 47 weights: 48 1) Pipe Size Group IA Group IC Outside Diameter Weight Lbs./Ft. 49 Weight Lbs./Ft. 50 1-5/8" 2.27 1.84 51 1-7/8" 2.72 2.28 52 2-3/8" 3.65 3.12 53 2-7/8" 5.79 4.64 54 3-1/2" 7.58 5.71 55 4" 9.11 6.56 56 6-5/8" 18.97 --

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 30 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 8-5/8” 24.70 -- 2 3. Fabric: Aluminized fabric shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM 3 A491 and coated before weaving with a minimum of 0.4 ounces of aluminum per 4 square foot of surface area. The steel wire and coating shall conform to ASTM 5 A817. Fabric to be 9 gauge woven in a 2" diamond mesh. Top selvage to be 6 twisted and barbed. Bottom selvage to be knuckled unless otherwise specified. 7 4. Zinc-coated fabric shall be galvanized after weaving with a minimum 1.2 8 ounces of zinc per square foot of surface area and conform to ASTM A392, Class 9 1. Fabric to be 9 gauge wire woven in a 2" diamond mesh. Top selvage to be 10 twisted and barbed, bottom selvage to be knuckled unless otherwise specified. 11 12 B. CONCRETE MIX 13 1. Concrete conforming to ASTM C 94, having a minimum compressive strength 14 of 3,000 PSI at 28 days. 15 16 C. COMPONENTS 17 1. Fence Posts: 18 1. Group IA or IC 19 2. Fabric Line Post Terminal Post 20 3. Height O.D. O.D. 21 4. Under 6' 1-7/8" 2-3/8" 22 5. 6' to 9' 2-3/8" 2-7/8" 23 6. 9' to 12' 2-7/8" 4" 24 2. Swing Gate Posts: 25  Single Gate Double Gate Post O.D. 26  Width Group IA or IC 27  Up to 6' Up to 12' 2-7/8" 28  7' to 12' 13' to 24' 4" 29  13’ to 18’ 25’ to 36’ 6-5/8” Group IA 30  Over 18’ Over 36’ 8-5/8” Group IA 31 3. Rails and Braces: 1-5/8" O.D. Group IA or IC. 32 4. Gates: 33 a. Frame assembly of 1-7/8" O.D. pipe Group IA or IC with welded joints. 34 b. Weld areas repaired with zinc-rich coating applied per manufacturer's 35 directions. 36 c. Fabric to match fence. 37 d. Gate accessories, hinges, latches, center stops, keepers and necessary 38 hardware of quality required for industrial and commercial application. 39 e. Latches shall permit padlocking. 40 5. Fittings: 41 a. Post Caps – Pressed steel, cast iron or cast aluminum alloy designed to 42 fit snugly over posts to exclude moisture. Supply dome style caps for 43 terminal posts and loop type for line posts. All fittings to conform to 44 ASTM F626. 45 b. Rail and Brace Ends – Pressed steel, cast iron or cast aluminum alloy, 46 cup-shaped to receive rail and brace ends. 47 c. Top Rail Sleeves – Tubular steel, 0.051 thickness x 7" long, expansion 48 type. 49 d. Tension Bars – Steel strip, 5/8" wide x 3/16" thick. 50 e. Tension Bands – Pressed steel, 14 gauge thickness x 3/4" wide. 51 f. Brace Bands – Pressed steel, 12 gauge thickness x 3/4" wide. 52 g. Truss Rods – Steel rod, 3/8" diameter merchant quality with 53 turnbuckle (take-up). 54 6. Tension Wire: Marcelled 7 gauge steel wire with minimum coating of 0.80 55 ounces of zinc or 0.40 ounces of aluminum per square foot of wire surface and

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 31 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 conforming to ASTM A824. 2 7. Tie Wires: Aluminum, 9 gauge, alloy 1100-H4 or equal. 3 8. Hog Rings: Steel wire, 11 gauge, with a minimum zinc coating of 0.80 ounces 4 per square foot of wire surface. 5 6 II. EXECUTION: 7 8 A. INSTALLATION 9 1. General: Installation to conform to ASTM F567. 10 2. Height: Provide height as indicated on contract drawings. 11 3. Post Spacing: Space line posts at intervals not exceeding ten feet. 12 4. Post Setting: Set terminal, gate and line posts plumb in concrete footings. 13 Top of footing to be 2" above grade and sloped to direct water away from posts. 14 5. All posts shall be installed in 1' diameter x 40" deep augured holed 15 completely filled with 3000 psi concrete. 16 6. Bracing: Brace Gate and terminal posts back to adjacent line posts with 17 horizontal brace rails and diagonal truss rods. 18 7. Top Rail: Install through line loop caps connecting sections with sleeves to 19 form a continuous rail between terminal posts. 20 8. Top Tension Wire: When top rail is omitted, stretch tension wire through loop 21 caps and fasten to terminal posts. 22 9. Bottom Tension Wire: Stretch between terminal posts 6" above grade and 23 fasten to outside of line posts with tie wires. 24 10. Fabric: Pull fabric taut with bottom selvage 2" above grade. Fasten to 25 terminal posts with tension bars threaded through mesh and secured with 26 tension bands at maximum 15" intervals. Tie to line posts and top rails with tie 27 wires spaced at maximum 12" on posts and 24" on rails. Attach to bottom 28 tension wire with top rings at maximum 24" intervals. 29 11. .Gates: Install gates plumb, level and secure for full opening without 30 interference. Anchor center stops and keepers in concrete. 31 12. Fasteners: Install nuts for fittings, bands and hardware bolts on inside of 32 fence. 33 34 B. COMPLETION 35 A. The area of installation shall be left free of debris caused by the installation of 36 the fence 37 38 39

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 32 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION 02934 - SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. Description 6 1. Work shall consist of furnishing and construction of a Segmental Retaining 7 Wall System or equal in accordance with these specifications and in reasonably 8 close conformity with the lines, grades, design, and dimensions shown on the 9 Site Improvement Plan. 10 2. Work includes preparing foundation soil, furnishing and installing leveling 11 pad, unit drainage fill and backfill to the lines and grades shown on the 12 construction drawings. 13 3. Work includes furnishing and installing geo-grid soil reinforcement of the 14 type, size, location, and lengths designated on the construction drawings. 15 16 B. Reference Documents 17 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 18 a. C94 / C94M-14b, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 19 b. C1372-04, Standard Specification for Dry-Cast Segmental Retaining 20 Wall (SRW) Units 21 c. D698, Tests of Moisture-Density Relations of Soils 22 d. D1557, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil 23 Using Modified Effort 24 e. D2922, Test for Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear 25 Methods 26 f. D4254, Test Method for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of 27 Soils and Calculation of Relative Density 28 g. D6707-06 (2011), Standard Specification for Circular-Knit Geotextile 29 for Use in Subsurface Drainage Applications 30 h. F405-13, Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Pipe 31 and Fittings 32 2. PennDOT 33 a. Standard Specifications, Publication 408/2011 34 3. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) 35 a. Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls, 3rd Edition, 2010 36 37 C. Submittals/Certification 38 1. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. Include any 39 special installation requirements not covered in this specification and the types, 40 locations and properties of all drainage materials and appurtenances. 41 2. Submit manufacturer’s certifications attesting that the materials meet the 42 requirements of this specification and the Drawings. 43 3. Submit manufacturer’s certifications attesting that the materials meet the 44 requirements of this specification and the Drawings. 45 4. Submit design and layout drawing completed by the manufacturer’s 46 Segmental Retaining Wall Engineer, indicating the layout of each block course of 47 the wall. 48 5. Submit certified compaction testing results from the soils testing laboratory. 49 50 D. Quality Assurance 51 1. Perform all work in accordance with local building codes and requirements. 52 2. Compaction Testing: 53 a. At the discretion of the ENGINEER, compaction testing may be 54 required. Required compaction testing will be conducted at the expense 55 of the CONTRACTOR. Conduct compaction tests at locations directed by

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 33 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 the ENGINEER during backfilling operations. 2 b. Determine compaction by the testing procedure contained in ASTM 3 D698. 4 1) Compact top twelve inches of subgrade and each layer of 5 backfill or embankment material to 95 percent maximum dry 6 density or 90 percent relative dry density. 7 8 E. PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS 9 1. Classification of Excavation: Perform all excavation on an unclassified basis; 10 no extra will be allowed for rock excavation, quicksand excavation, muck 11 excavation, or for any other type of excavation encountered. Rock excavation is 12 the removal and disposal of materials which requires drilling and blasting, 13 wedging, sledging, boring, or breaking up with power operated equipment for 14 removal, including ledge rock, concrete or masonry structures, boulders, and 15 other materials of related character 16 2. Protection of Existing Utilities and Structures 17 a. Take all necessary precautions and utilize all facilities required to 18 protect existing utilities and structures. In compliance with Act 287 of 19 the General Assembly of Pennsylvania, advise each Utility at least three 20 working days in advance of intent to excavate, do demolition work or use 21 explosives and give the location of the job site. Request cooperative 22 steps of the utility and suggestions for procedures to avoid damage to its 23 lines. 24 b. Advise each person in physical control of powered equipment or 25 explosives used in excavation or demolition work of the type and location 26 of utility lines at the job site, the Utility assistance to expect, and 27 procedures to follow to prevent damage. 28 c. Immediately report to the Utility and the ENGINEER any break, leak or 29 other damage to the lines or protective coatings made or discovered 30 during the work and immediately alert the occupants of premises of any 31 emergency created or discovered. 32 d. Immediately report to the Utility and the ENGINEER any break, leak or 33 other damage to the lines or protective coatings made or discovered 34 during the work and immediately alert the occupants of premises of any 35 emergency created or discovered. 36 37 F. Delivery, Storage and Handling 38 1. Contractor shall check all materials upon delivery to assure that the proper 39 type, grade, color, and certification has been received. 40 2. Contractor shall protect all materials from damage due to job site conditions 41 and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Damaged materials 42 shall not be incorporated into the work. 43 44 G. RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENTS 45 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and not necessarily limited 46 to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, The Contract Drawings and 47 the Standard form of Agreement. 48 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 49 information specifically related to work of this section. 50 Section 02100: Survey and Stakeout 51 Section 02200: Excavation, Backfilling and Grading 52 Section 02719: Site Drainage 53 54 II. PRODUCTS 55

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 34 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 A. MATERIALS: 2 1. Segmented Retaining Wall (SRW) Units 3 a. SRW units shall be Redi-Rock® as provided by Redi-Rock® 4 International of Charlevoix, MI (www.redi-rock.com), or approved equal, 5 and shall be produced by a licensed manufacturer. 6 b. SRW units shall be made with ready-mixed concrete in accordance 7 with ASTM C94, latest revision, and per the following chart: 8 28 Day Climate Air Content Slump* Compressive Strength, psi Severe 4½%-7½% 4000 5” ±1 ½” 9 *Higher slumps are allowed if achieved by use of appropriate admixtures. 10 Notwithstanding anything stated above, all material used in the wall units shall 11 comply with applicable ASTM and local requirements for exterior concrete. 12 13 c. Exterior block dimensions shall be uniform and consistent. Maximum 14 dimensional deviations shall be 1% excluding the architectural surface. 15 Maximum width (face to back) deviation including the architectural 16 surface shall be 1.0 inch. 17 d. Exposed face shall be finished as specified. Other surfaces to be 18 smooth form type. Dime-size bug holes on the block face may be 19 patched and/or shake-on color stain can be used to blend into the 20 remainder of the block face. 21 2. Leveling Pad 22 a. Crushed Stone: PennDOT No. 2A coarse aggregate confirming to 23 PennDOT Publication 408, Section 703.2. 24 3. Free Draining Backfill 25 a. Place washed stone to a minimum of 1’ width behind the back of the 26 wall and extends vertically from the Leveling Pad to the top of wall 27 elevation. 28 b. All backfill material must be approved by the CIVIL ENGINEER. Site 29 excavated soils may be used if approved, unless otherwise specified on 30 the Drawings. Do not use within a 1 to 1 influence area; unsuitable soils 31 with a PL>6, organic soils and frost susceptible soils. 32 c. Where an additional type of fill is needed, submit sample and 33 specifications to the CIVIL ENGINEER for approval. 34 3. Non-woven Geotextile Fabric 35 a. Place fabric between the Free Draining Backfill and retained soil as 36 shown on the Drawings. 37 b. Use fabric conforming to PADOT Publication 408, Section 735, Class 4. 38 4. Perforated Sock Drain 39 a. Install a perforated drain in the Free Draining Backfill as shown on the 40 Drawings. Design of drain shall be as specified by the Segmental 41 Retaining Wall Engineer. The design shall incorporate outlets at each end 42 of the wall so the pipe daylights at grade at each end of the wall, and is 43 sloped for positive drainage. 44 b. Provide pipe conforming to PADOT Publication 408, Section 735. 45 c. Provide sock fabric conforming to PADOT Publication 408, Section 735, 46 Class 1. 47 48 III. EXECUTION 49 50 A. Excavation 51 1. Provide an excavation of sufficient size to accommodate the outside

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 35 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 dimensions of the SRW, pad and backfill fill as shown on the Drawings. Take 2 precautions to minimize over-excavation. Design and provide excavation 3 support, if required. 4 2. Keep the ground surface, within a minimum of two (2) feet of both sides of 5 the excavation free of excavated material. 6 3. Provide temporary barricades to prevent excavated material from encroaching 7 on private property, walks, gutters and storm drains. 8 4. Do not obstruct natural water courses. Where necessary, provide temporary 9 channels to allow the flow of water either along or across the site of the work. 10 5. In areas where pipelines parallel or cross streams, ensure that no material 11 slides, is washed, or dumped into the stream course. Remove cofferdams 12 immediately upon completion of pipeline construction. 13 6. Keep excavations dry and free of water. Dispose of precipitation and 14 subsurface water clear of the work. 15 7. Intercept and divert surface drainage away from excavations. Do not allow 16 surface runoff from adjacent areas to enter the wall construction site. 17 8. Remove from the construction area, and legally dispose of excavated material 18 remaining after completion of backfilling. 19 20 B. WALL UNIT INSTALLATION 21 1. Inspect all SRW units at delivery to determine that the proper units have been 22 delivered and are usable. Provide sufficient labor and equipment to unload and 23 place the units in a manner that prevents damage. Protect the materials from 24 damage and prevent excessive mud, wet cement and like materials from coming 25 in contact with the units. Do not incorporate damaged units into the work. If 26 minor damage occurs, replace the units or repair such damage in the presence 27 of, and to the satisfaction of, the CIVIL ENGINEER. 28 2. Compact native foundation soil and test in accordance with Part 1.04 of this 29 Section prior to placement of the Leveling Pad material. 30 3. CIVIL ENGINEER will examine the foundation soil to ensure that the actual 31 foundation soil strength meets or exceeds assumed design strength. Remove 32 any soil not meeting the required strength and replace with acceptable 33 compacted material as directed by the CIVIL ENGINEER. 34 4. rior to setting the SRW units, prepare a stone Leveling Pad suitable for 35 receiving the structure at the location shown on the Drawings. Place Leveling 36 Pad on undisturbed native soils or suitable fill. 37 5. Perform compaction of the Leveling Pad using a lightweight compactor, such 38 as a mechanical plate compactor. Test compaction in accordance with Part 1.04 39 of this Section to ensure a level, hard surface on which to place the first course 40 blocks. Complete the pad to the elevation and thickness shown on the Drawings. 41 Extend pad dimensions beyond the blocks in all directions to a distance at least 42 equal to the depth of the pad. 43 6. Place the first course of wall units on the prepared Leveling Pad with the 44 aesthetic surface facing out and the front edges tightly together. Check units for 45 level and alignment as they are placed. 46 7. Ensure that units are in full contact with Leveling Pad. Take proper care to 47 develop straight lines and smooth curves on base course as per wall layout 48 8. Place and compact the backfill in front and back of entire base row to firmly 49 lock them in place. Check all units again for level and alignment. Sweep all 50 excess material from top of units. 51 9. Install each subsequent course in like manner. Repeat procedure to the 52 extent of wall height. 53 10. All work designated to be covered by backfill must be approved by the 54 ENGINEER before backfilling. At the end of each day’s operation, slope the last 55 level of backfill away from the wall facing to direct runoff of rainwater away from

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 36 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 the wall face. 2 11. Maintain allowable construction tolerance at the wall face of 2 degrees 3 vertically and 1 inch in 10 feet horizontally. 4 12. Remove from the construction area, and legally dispose of excavated 5 material remaining after completion of backfilling. 6 13. Rough grade areas disturbed by construction to a uniform finish. Form the 7 bases for streambeds, terraces, banks and lawns. 8 14. Grade areas to be topsoiled and seeded to six inches below indicated finish 9 contours. 10 15. Restore surfaces disturbed by construction to equal the surface condition 11 prior to construction. 12 16. At no additional cost, correct defective work identified by the CIVIL 13 ENGINEER within the Contract Times. 14 15

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 37 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 2 3 SECTION - 03100: CONCRETE FORMWORK 4 5 I. GENERAL 6 7 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 8 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for 9 job built formwork, prefabricated forms, form ties and accessories; design; 10 construction and removal of forms, including shoring, bracing, cribbing, and 11 screeds, specified herein and as required to complete the work of the contract. 12 13 B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 14 1. References: Comply with the following minimum standards, in accordance 15 with the current editions of: 16 a. ACI-347 (ANSI A 145.1) Recommended Practice for Concrete 17 Formwork 18 b. ACI-318 (ANSI A 89.1) Building Code Requirements for Reinforced 19 Concrete 20 c. ACI-301 (ANSI A 138.1) Specification for Structural Concrete for 21 Buildings 22 d. Local & State Building Codes 23 24 C. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 25 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 26 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 27 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 28 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 29 information specifically related to work of this section: 30 Section 02100: Survey & Stakeout 31 Section 02200: Excavation, Backfilling & Grading 32 Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement 33 Section 03300: Cast In Place Concrete 34 35 II. PRODUCTS 36 37 A. FORMWORK: 38 1. Forms shall be constructed to the exact size and shape of the finished work 39 as shown on the drawings. 40 2. Forms shall be constructed of suitable materials and shall be clean and free 41 of dirt and oils. 42 3. Forms shall be set in place to achieve a plumb and level installation of 43 finished concrete. 44 45 B. FORM MATERIALS: 46 1. Lumber: Western Wood Products or Southern Forest Products grading, 47 Common or Utility grades for non-exposed surfaces. Structural or Construction 48 grades for whalers, braces and supports. 49 2. Plywood: US Product Standard PA-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood" Class 1, 50 exterior grade or better, milled oiled and edge sealed, with each piece bearing 51 legible inspection trademark. 52 53 C. ACCESSORIES: 54 1. Furnish hairpin clips, bands, clamps, braces, adjustable shoring jacks, 55 fasteners, form ties, etc., necessary to execute the installation of formwork. 56 2. No aluminum devices or fasteners (including nails) will be permitted. 57

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 38 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 III. EXECUTION 2 3 A. DESIGN: 4 1. Formwork and its supports shall adequately and safely carry all liquid 5 concrete, men, and equipment, and other loads imposed during construction. 6 7 B. CONSTRUCTION: 8 1. Construct forms to slopes, lines and dimensions shown, plumb and straight 9 and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage; securely brace and shore forms to 10 prevent displacement and to safely support construction loads. 11 2. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, 12 rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, inserts 13 and other features required in the work. 14 15 C. BUILT-IN EMBEDDED ITEMS: 16 1. Provide for installation of fastening devices required for attachment of other 17 work. 18 2. Properly locate in cooperation with other trades; secure and maintain in 19 position before and while concrete is poured. 20 21 D. LINES & LEVELS: 22 1. Check the lines and levels of the completed formwork for all exposed 23 columns, grade beams, walls, etc., before concrete is placed. 24 2. Make whatever corrections or adjustments to the formwork are needed to 25 correct any deviations which exceed specified tolerances allowed. 26 27 E. CLEANING FORMWORK: 28 1. Force debris to and out of clean-out panels with a jet stream of compressed 29 air. Clean out all debris. 30 2. Hose form thoroughly with water and air-jet out any standing water when 31 weather permits. 32 33 F. FORM REMOVAL: 34 1. Remove forms in accordance with ACI 301, Paragraph 4.5, ACI Building Code 35 Requirements for Reinforced Concrete No. 318, Chapter 6, Section 6.2. 36 2. Removal strength of concrete for stripping shall be determined in accordance 37 with ACI 301, Paragraph 4.7 38 39

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 39 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 03200: CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment to 7 install steel reinforcing bars, ties, dowels and welded wire fabric, miscellaneous 8 reinforcement and accessories as indicated on the drawings, specified herein and 9 as required to complete the work of the contract. 10 11 B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 12 1. References: Comply with the following minimum standards, in accordance 13 with the current editions of: 14 a. CSRI (28th Edition, 2009) Manual of Standard Practice 15 b. ACI-318-11, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 16 c. ACI-301-10 Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings 17 d. Local & State Building Codes 18 19 C. SUBMITTALS: 20 1. Shop Drawings: Show plan layouts (including dimensioned slab openings), 21 elevation drawings, bending, splicing, sizes, spacing and details of all reinforcing 22 and accessories. 23 2. Reports & Results: From inspection & testing as soon as determination is 24 made. 25 26 D. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 27 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 28 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 29 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 30 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 31 information specifically related to work of this section: 32 Section 03100: Concrete Formwork 33 Section 03300: Cast In Place Concrete 34 Section 05210: Structural Steel & Miscellaneous Metals 35 36 II. PRODUCTS 37 38 A. REINFORCING: 39 1. Manufacture and deform in accordance with ANSI/ASTM A-615. Consist of 40 domestic manufacture billet steel of clean , new stock. 41 2. All Bars: Use Grade 60 (yield) min. 60,000 psi. 42 43 B. WELDED WIRE FABRIC: 44 1. Manufacture in accordance with ANSI/ASTM A185. 45 2. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, provide 6x6-W2.0 x W2.0 W.W.F., 46 Grade 65 (yield) min. 65,000 psi. 47 48 C. ACCESSORIES: 49 1. Provide all spacers, chairs, boisters, ties and other devices necessary to 50 properly place, space, support and maintain reinforcement in locations. 51 2. Provide in accordance with ACI-315. 52 3. No aluminum inserts or accessories will be permitted. 53 54 D. FABRICATION: 55 1. Shop fabrication shall be according to approved shop drawings. 56 2. All fabrication of bars shall be performed in a shop, with field fabrication

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 40 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 done only where unavoidable, and approved. 2 3 III. EXECUTION 4 5 A. INTENT: 6 1. All concrete shall be reinforced. 7 2. For conditions not specifically shown or detailed, framing and reinforcement 8 shall be provided in a manner consistent with other similar details or conditions 9 shown on the drawings. 10 3. Prior to work under these conditions, notify the Architect for confirmation. 11 12 B. PREPARATION: 13 1. Clean bars of loose mill scale, rust, oil, and all coatings that will destroy or 14 reduce the bond before placing, and again before the concrete is placed. 15 16 C. PLACEMENT of REINFORCEMENT: 17 1. Accurately place in positions and spacings shown. 18 2. Securely support and fasten to prevent displacement before or during 19 concrete placement. 20 3. Place reinforcing steel, bar supports, and splice devices, in accordance with 21 CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, 28th edition; ACI 315 and ACI 318. 22 4. Support: Use approved accessories to hold reinforcement at proper distances 23 from surrounding surfaces, with minimum coverage as indicated. Tieing 24 reinforcing steel with wire to nails in forms or using wood spacers is not 25 permitted. 26 5. Placement: Place main reinforcing steel so as to provide 3" minimum cover 27 for foundations poured on earth, 2" minimum cover for beams and columns, 28 3/4" minimum cover for slabs and 1 1/2" for all rebar in exposed concrete 29 (except as otherwise detailed). 30 6. Spacing: In no case shall the clear distance between bars be less than 1 inch, 31 nor less than 1.5 times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate in the 32 concrete, unless specifically indicated as bundled. 33 7. Field Adjustments: Move concrete reinforcing steel as necessary to avoid 34 interference with other reinforcing steel, and other embedded items. However 35 prior to placing concrete, bars moved more than tolerances herein shall be 36 inspected and approved. 37 8. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining 38 pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire, except at control joint 39 and construction joints. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent 40 continuous laps in either direction. 41 9. Minimum Rebar and Dowel Extent: Provide minimum temperature reinforcing 42 in all walls and slabs where no reinforcing is shown or noted. 43 10. Minimum Placement: All reinforcing steel must be in place, wired, and 44 inspected, before depositing concrete. 45 46 D. FASTENING INTERSECTIONS: 47 1. Wire tie reinforcement together at all points where bars cross. 48 2. Splice as indicated. 49 3. Welding or tack welding of reinforcement bars to other bars or to plates, 50 angles, etc. is prohibited. 51 4. Work shall be performed in accordance with CRSI Recommendations. 52 53 E. LAP SPLICES: 54 1. Lap bars as scheduled on drawings and securely tie with wire at frequent 55 intervals. 56 2. Stagger so that adjacent splices will be apart with care taken to maintain 57 proper clearance, between parallel bars and between bars and forms.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 41 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 3. Make lap splices in a manner to provide laps consistent with structural 2 drawings, and CRSI. 3 4. In no case shall any lap splice be less than 12" in length. 4 5 F. DOWELS: 6 1. Install with a template to hold bars in the proper position, placed as located 7 on the drawings. 8 2. Dowels shall be of the diameter size indicated in various sections with 9 lengths equivalent to twice that required for the indicated spliced. 10 3. One-half of the length shall be embedded with the required spliced length 11 exposed for attachment. 12 13

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 42 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 03250: CONSTRUCTION, EXPANSION & CONTRACTION JOINTS 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment to 7 install construction joints, expansion joints, and control joints as indicated on 8 the drawings, specified herein and as required to complete the work of the 9 contract. 10 11 B. SUBMITTALS: 12 1. Manufacturers' Literature: Indicate compliance with products specifications. 13 14 C. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 15 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 16 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 17 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 18 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 19 information specifically related to work of this section: 20 Section 03100: Concrete Formwork 21 Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement 22 Section 03275: Cast In Place Concrete 23 24 II. PRODUCTS 25 26 A. EXPANSION JOINT FILLERS: 27 1. Expanded Polystyrene: Fed. Spec. HH-I-524, Type I, Class A; ASTM C-578, 28 Type I, Grade 2. 29 30 B. CONTROL JOINTS: 31 1. Saw-cut control joints made with a wet saw. 32 33 III. EXECUTION 34 35 A. JOINT ARRANGEMENTS: 36 1. Location Criteria: Locate so as to least impair the strength of the structure, 37 and at locations coincident with designed structural and architectural features 38 (specifically column lines). 39 2. Maximum horizontal dimensions of a single unit of placement, 25 ft. in a 40 straight line (except footings). 41 42 B. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: 43 1. Slab On Grade Construction Joints: Establish longitudinal and transverse 44 control joints. 45 2. With elevations checked by instrument stretch line over entire length. 46 3. Drive stakes 2 ft. o.c. and attached screed to stakes. 47 4. Provide lateral support where used as a bulkhead. 48 5. Place dowels in knock-outs. 49 50 C. EXPANSION JOINTS: 51 1. Exposed slabs: Place joint filler 1/2 inch below the finished surface of the 52 slab and extend to the bottom of the slab. 53 2. The joint between the top of the filler and the finished slab shall be filled with 54 a joint sealer. 55 3. Divide exterior walkways into areas not exceeding 150 sq. ft.. 56

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 43 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 D. CONTRACTION JOINTS: 2 1. Concrete Slabs: Install contraction joints in slabs on grade and exterior 3 walkway slabs as indicated on the drawings, or if not shown, locate joints: 4 a. At 4 “ thick slabs Install contraction joints at 12'-0" o.c. maximum 5 spacing for interior slabs on grade and at 5'-0" o.c. for exterior walkway 6 slabs. 7 b. At 6 “ thick slabs Install contraction joints at 18'-0" o.c. maximum 8 spacing for interior slabs on grade. 9 2. Type & Slab: Concrete slab on grade shall have 1/4 inch wide sawcut joints. 10 Joints must be installed 1/4 of the slab depth below the top surface within 8 11 hour of pouring slab.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 44 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 03275: CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for 7 a complete installation of concrete grade beams & concrete caissons, concrete 8 piers, concrete foundation walls, concrete landing & steps, sidewalks, concrete 9 slabs on grade, and elevated slabs as shown on the drawings, specified herein 10 and as required to complete the work of the contract. 11 12 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 13 1. Work of this division shall comply with the latest editions of the American 14 Concrete Institute Specifications 15 a. ACI-347 (ANSI A 145.1) Recommended Practice for Concrete 16 Formwork 17 b. ACI-318 (ANSI A 89.1) Building Code Requirements for Reinforced 18 Concrete 19 c. ACI-301 (ANSI A 138.1) Specification for Structural Concrete for 20 Buildings 21 d. Local & State Building Codes 22 23 C. SUBMITTALS AND TESTING: 24 1. The Contractor shall provide to the Architect, detailed reports as to the 25 strength/type of concrete. 26 2. Procedures regarding tests as detailed elsewhere in this specification shall 27 apply. 28 29 D. HANDLING OF MATERIALS: 30 1. Take care to protect the work of this division during transit, placement, and 31 after installation from weather and damage from the work or materials of other 32 trades, workmen, or unauthorized persons entering the site. 33 2. Damaged work shall be replaced by the Contractor without additional cost to 34 the Owner. 35 36 E. PROTECTION of the WORK: 37 1. Concrete shall be protected in all ways, including protection for intentional or 38 unintentional damage or defacement. 39 2. Any concrete so damaged or defaced shall be removed and replaced at the 40 sole cost of the Contractor. 41 42 F. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 43 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 44 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 45 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 46 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 47 information specifically related to work of this section: 48 Section 02100: Survey & Stakeout 49 Section 02200: Excavation, Backfilling & Grading 50 Section 02512: Asphalt Paving, Traffic Marking & Signage 51 Section 03100: Concrete Formwork 52 Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement 53 Section 03250: Construction, Expansion & Control Joints 54 Section 03300: Concrete Hardener 55 Section 04100: Masonry 56 Section 05710: Railings 57

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 45 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 II. MATERIALS & PROCEDURES 2 3 A. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE: 4 1. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi or as 5 shown on the drawings. Concrete materials shall comply with the following: 6 a. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, type I or II. 7 b. Aggregate: ASTM C30, uniformly graded and cleaned. Coarse 8 aggregate shall be crushed rock or washed gravel with a minimum size 9 between 3/4" and 1.5". Fine aggregate shall be clean washed natural 10 sand at least 50% of which will pass a 50 mesh screen. 11 c. Water: Shall be clean and potable. 12 13 B. ADMIXTURES 14 1. Air Entraining: ASTM C260 15 2. Accelerator: ASTM C494 16 3. Water Reducer: ASTM C494 17 4. Retarder: ASTM C494 type B 18 19 C. INSERTS & TRIM: 20 1. Set bolts, inserts and other embedded items accurately and securely in the 21 concrete. 22 23 D. MIXING CONCRETE: 24 1. At the batch plant withhold 2.5 gallons of water per cubic yard of concrete. 25 2. Upon arrival at the job site add all or part of the withheld water before the 26 concrete is discharged from the mixer to produce the proper slump. 27 3. Do not use concrete that has stood more than thirty minutes after leaving the 28 mixer nor concrete that has stood more than sixty minutes after the first 29 addition of water. 30 4. Slump of standard mix shall not exceed 4". 31 5. Slump of pump mix shall not exceed 3". 32 33 E. PLACING CONCRETE: 34 1. Forms shall be clean, free of debris, and tight. 35 2. Forms shall be cleaned with a commercial concrete form oil before placement 36 of concrete. 37 3. Place concrete while it is still plastic. 38 4. Discard non plastic concrete. 39 5. Place concrete in a manner so as to minimize handling. 40 6. Remove rejected concrete from the job site. 41 7. Deposit concrete in maximum 24" layers. 42 8. Consolidate each layer immediately after placing by use of commercial 43 vibrators. 44 9. Bring all surfaces to design elevations as shown on the drawings. 45 10. Level all surfaces. 46 11. Smooth all surfaces. 47 48 F. SIDEWALK SLAB BASE: 49 1. Sidewalk slabs shall be placed on a minimum 3" thick base of fine aggregate 50 sub-base. 51 2. Base shall be level, sloped to drain while maintaining required slab thickness. 52 53 G. CURING: 54 1. Fresh concrete work shall be protected from the weather and rapid drying for 55 a period of 48 hours after placement. 56

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 46 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 H. COLD WEATHER PLACEMENT: 2 1. Contractor shall follow the recommendations of the American Concrete 3 Institute for cold weather placement. 4 2. No concrete shall be placed when protected ambient air temperatures are 32 5 degrees F and falling. 6 3. No antifreeze or salts may be added to the concrete without the written 7 approval of the Architect. 8 9 I. SIDEWALK & EXTERIOR STAIR SLAB FINISHES: 10 1. Sidewalk and stair slabs shall be poured to the required elevations, finished 11 smooth and level with trowels. 12 2. Final finish of exterior slabs and sidewalks shall be magnesium float as 13 directed by the Architect. 14 3. Slabs shall be sloped to drain. 15 4. Cross slope shall not exceed 1/8" per foot horizontal run. 16 17 J. INTERIOR SLAB FINISHES: 18 1. Interior slab finish shall be steel trowel. Slope tolerance shall be maximum 19 1/16" per foot horizontal run. 20 a. Pallet Rack Areas shall be required to meet a F min. 60 21 flatness/levelness requirement. 22 1) Maximum 1/8” gap under a 10 ft. straight edge. 23 24 K. PROTECTION of the WORK: 25 1. Concrete shall be protected in all ways, including protection for intentional or 26 unintentional damage or defacement. 27 2. Any concrete so damaged or defaced shall be removed and replaced at the 28 sole cost of the Contractor. 29 30

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 47 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 03300: CONCRETE HARDENER 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for 7 a complete installation of a hardener on concrete slabs on grade, and elevated 8 slabs as shown on the drawings, specified herein and as required to complete 9 the work of the contract. 10 11 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 12 1. Work of this division shall comply with the latest editions of the American 13 Concrete Institute Specifications 14 a. ACI-347 (ANSI A 145.1) Recommended Practice for Concrete 15 Formwork 16 b. ACI-318 (ANSI A 89.1) Building Code Requirements for Reinforced 17 Concrete 18 c. ACI-301 (ANSI A 138.1) Specification for Structural Concrete for 19 Buildings 20 d. Local & State Building Codes 21 22 C. SUBMITTALS: 23 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical bulletins & MSDS on each 24 product. 25 26 D. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 27 1. Qualifications: 28 a. Applicator: Minimum of 5 years experience in application of similar 29 systems and products on projects of similar size and scope. 30 1) Successful completion of a minimum of 3 projects of similar 31 size and complexity to specified Work. 32 b. Manufacturer: Minimum 15 years of experience in manufacturing of 33 surface hardeners 34 2. Field Sample: 35 a. Install at Project site or pre-selected area of building an area for field 36 sample, minimum 4 feet by 4 feet (1.2 m by 1.2 m), using specified 37 surface hardener system. 38 b. Apply material in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written 39 application instructions. 40 c. Field sample will be standard for judging workmanship on remainder 41 of Project. 42 d. Maintain field sample during construction for workmanship 43 comparison 44 e. Do not alter, move, or destroy field sample until Work is completed 45 and approved by Architect. 46 f. Obtain Architect’s written approval of field sample before start of 47 material application, including approval of aesthetics, color, texture, and 48 appearance. 49 50 E. DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING: 51 1. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged 52 containers with identification labels intact. 53 2. Store tightly sealed materials off ground and away from moisture, direct 54 sunlight, extreme heat, and freezing temperatures. 55 3. Store in unopened packaging in clean, dry environment protected from 56 sunlight at 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) to 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). 57

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 48 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 F. PROJECT CONDITIONS: 2 1. Environmental Requirements: 3 a. Ensure that substrate surface and ambient air temperature are 4 minimum of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during curing period. Ensure 5 that frost or frozen surfaces are thawed and dry. 6 b. Allow surfaces to attain temperature and conditions specified before 7 proceeding with surface hardener application. 8 c. Do not install over concrete containing calcium chloride or concrete 9 containing aggregate that has been saturated with salt water. 10 d. Do not install over concrete containing more than 3 percent air 11 content as measured by ASTM C138, ASTM C173, or ASTM C231. 12 e. Perform Work of this Section in well-ventilated areas. 13 14 G. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 15 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 16 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 17 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 18 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 19 information specifically related to work of this section: 20 Section 03275: Cast In Place Concrete 21 22 II. PRODUCTS: 23 24 A. MANUFACTURER: 25 1. Provide products from the following manufacturer: 26 a. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., 14851 Calhoun Road, Omaha, 27 Nebraska, 68152 (402) 453-6600, www.lmcc.com or approved equal. 28 29 B. MATERIALS: 30 1. 03300: Concrete densifier, sealer, & hardener. 31 2. All exposed concrete surfaces to be treated with alkaline siliconate solution to 32 harden, seal and densify exposed concrete. 33 3. Reduction of abrasion, ASTM-C-779, greater than 50%. 34 4. Applied by an Approved Applicator - 10 year warranty. 35 a. Acceptable Product: "SEALHARD" by L&M Construction Chemicals, 36 Inc.or approved equal. 37 38 III. EXECUTION: 39 40 A. PRE-INSTALLATION INSPECTION: 41 1. Assure surfaces are clean and free of all contaminants, and any film forming 42 curing compounds or sealers. 43 2. Assure concrete has been cured a minimum of 3 days before application. 44 3. Protect concrete from construction activity staining.

45 B. APPLICATION: 46 1. Apply in accord with manufacturer's instructions. 47 a. Apply directly from sealer container onto prepared surfaces, undiluted. 48 b. Application equipment: Mechanical "walk-behind" or riding scrubber. 49 c. Apply at minimum rate of 1 gallon per 150-200 sq. ft. 50 d. Allow surfaces to remain wet with sealer for 30-60 minutes. 51 e. Remove excess sealer at end of application procedure by water 52 flushing and then squeegee dry. 53 f. Apply in 1 coat. 54 g. Apply 2 coats to porous or rough concrete surfaces. 55 h. Apply 2 coats to floor areas that will be exposed to frequent oil spills.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 49 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2 C. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 3 1. Have applicator certify rate of application. 4 5 D. CLEANING: 6 1. Leave area broom clean.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 50 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 DIVISION 4 MASONRY 2 3 SECTION – 04100: CMU MASONRY: 4 5 I. GENERAL: 6 7 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 8 1. Provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for a complete 9 installation of concrete masonry unit (CMU) masonry work as shown on the 10 drawings, specified herein and as necessary to complete the work of the 11 contract. 12 2. Work shall include interior and exterior masonry walls, both structural and 13 non-load bearing walls. 14 15 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 16 1. All structural masonry materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with 17 the applicable Standards and Specifications of the Brick Institute of America, the 18 National Concrete Masonry Association and the American Concrete Institute, 19 including ACI. / ASCE 530 Steel lintels shall conform to ASIC specifications for A- 20 36 type steel. 21 22 C. HANDLING OF MATERIALS: 23 1. All materials shall be kept warm. 24 2. No frozen materials shall be used. 25 3. Care shall be taken to handle materials in such a manner as to prevent 26 damage. 27 4. No damaged masonry units shall be used. 28 5. Recommendations of the NCMA, the BIA and the BSI regarding cold weather 29 installation of masonry shall be strictly complied with. 30 31 D. SAMPLES: 32 1. The new split-face veneers shall match that existing at the work site. The 33 Contractor shall provide loose split-face samples or sample boards from which 34 the Owner may choose. 35 2. The Contractor shall prepare one 4'x 4' sample of split-face masonry for the 36 review and approval of the Owner. Sample shall illustrate typical split-face mix 37 and joint tooling, split-face and mortar color and texture. 38 39 E. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 40 1. Documents affecting work of this section include but are not necessarily 41 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract 42 Drawings, and the Standard Form of Agreement. 43 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 44 information specifically related to work of this Section: 45 Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete 46 Section 05210: Structural Steel & Miscellaneous Metals 47 Section 09900: Painting & Finishing 48 49 II. PRODUCTS: 50 51 A. MORTAR & GROUT 52 1. Mortar for Concrete Masonry Units: Mortar and grout for reinforced and non- 53 reinforced load bearing concrete masonry units. 54 a. Mortar shall conform to ASTM C270 and shall have a minimum 28 day 55 compressive strength of 2500 psi. Color shall be gray. 56 b. Grout shall conform to ASTM C476 and shall have a minimum 28 day 57 compressive strength of 2500 psi. Color shall be gray.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 51 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2. Grout for concrete masonry units shall be a pea gravel mix with a min. 28 day 2 compressive strength of 3000psi. 3 4 B. REINFORCEMENT: 5 1. Horizontal Masonry Reinforcement shall galvanized “Dur-O-Wall” as 6 manufactured by National Wire Products. Block reinforcement shall be trussed 7 type, standard weight, 2" less than the full width of the wall. 8 2. Reinforcing Bars shall be as shown on the drawings, and shall conform to 9 ASTM A615, grade 60. 10 11 C. MASONRY UNITS 12 1. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: 13 a. STANDARD CMU’s: Provide hollow load bearing, concrete masonry 14 units of sizes as shown on the drawings. Units shall comply with ASTM 15 C-90, grade N, Type I, with a minimum compressive strength of 1900 psi 16 on net section as determined by ASTM C140. Units shall be normal 17 weight (125 lb./cf. ft.) except as noted on the drawings. 18 b. DECORATIVE MASONRY UNITS: Provide hollow and solid decorative 19 concrete masonry units of sizes and types as shown on the drawings. 20 Units shall be split face in finishes and colors as selected by the Owner. 21 1) Split face and trim units shall be as manufactured by Fizzano 22 Brothers Concrete Products, Inc., 1776 Chester Pike, Crum Lynne, 23 PA 19022, telephone 610 833-1100 as will be selected by the 24 Owner. 25 2) Block faces shall be finished on all exposed sides. Corner 26 blocks shall be finished on the exposed sides and exposed ends. 27 Block shall be finished on two sides when both sides of the wall 28 are exposed. 29 3) Color of all decorative units shall as selected by the Owner. 30 4) Corner units, sill units and other special shapes shall be 31 provided at exterior corners, below windows and as otherwise 32 required for a complete and finished project. Special shapes shall 33 match the finish and color of the adjacent block. 34 35 D. MASONRY ACCESSORIES: 36 a. Metal Veneer Ties: Metal veneer ties shall be zinc coated wire, minimum 9 37 gage, 6" minimum length. 38 b. Thru-wall & Concealed Flashing: Thru-wall and concealed masonry flashing 39 shall be FLEX-FLASH®, 40 mil thickness, Elvaloy® Kee peel & stick flashing as 40 manufactured by HOHMANN & BARNARD, INC. 30 Rasons Court, Hauppaauge, NY 41 11788-4206, Inc. (800) 645-0616 or approved equal. 42 1) Thru wall flashing shall be installed at slab/foundation sill, window 43 sills and heads in door openings, and at horizontal courses as indicated 44 on the drawing. 45 c. Control & Expansion Joint Anchors: Control & expansion joint anchors shall 46 be designed for transfering loads across control & expansion joints while 47 handling compression loads and controling lateral movement. 48 1) WIRE-BOND #1700 Control Joint Anchor, as manufactured by WIRE- 49 BOND 400 Roundtree Rd., Charlotte, NC 28217, (800) 849-6722, 50 www.wirebond.com or approved equal. 51 2) Mill Galvanized, 18 gage thick flat steel, 8 gage dia. Rod, 1-7/6” wide 52 x 10-1/2” overall length. 53 54 E. PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE LINTELS: 55 1. Lintels shall be of the same thickness as the wall in which they are installed. 56 Lintel height shall be 8" or a module thereof. Reinforcing shall be as shown on 57 the drawings. 58 2. Lintels shall be fabricated and installed in strict accordance with the

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 52 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 recommendations of the National Concrete Institute and/or the National 2 Concrete Masonry Association. 3 4 F. LOOSE STEEL ANGLE LINTELS: 5 1. Lintels shall be a pair of structural steel angles (ASTM A36) as indicated on 6 the drawings, and have minimum bearing of 8" each side of masonry opening. 7 2. Lintels shall be installed on coursing with the typical masonry block, and 8 plumb and level with the wall surfaces. 9 3. Lintels shall be fabricated and installed in strict accordance with the 10 recommendations of the National Concrete Institute and/or the National 11 Concrete Masonry Association. 12 13 G. EPOXY GROUT: 14 1. Grout shall be "Five Star Epoxy Anchor Grout" as manufactured by Five Star 15 Products, Inc., 425 Stillson Road, Fairfield, Ct 06430, 800-243-2206, or 16 approved equal. 17 18 III. EXECUTION: 19 20 A. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: 21 1. Concrete block units shall be laid with horizontal truss type reinforcing (9 22 gauge galvanized wire) at 16" on center vertically. 23 2. Overlap reinforcing at corners. 24 3. Vertical cells to be filled with grout shall be aligned to provide a continuous, 25 unobstructed opening of the dimensions shown on the plans. 26 4. Cells which will contain vertical reinforcement shall have a minimum of (2) 27 inch clear opening. 28 5. All reinforcing dowels and bars shall be completely embedded in mortar or 29 grout. 30 6. All joints in new freestanding masonry work shall be tooled concave. 31 All block work shall be laid running bond. 32 7. Lay block with cells vertical and in such a manner that the main bearing webs 33 are vertically aligned. 34 8. Hollow masonry units shall be laid will full mortar coverage on horizontal and 35 vertical face shells except that webs shall also be bedded where they are 36 adjacent to cells to be reinforced and/or filled with grout and in the starting 37 course on footings or slabs. 38 9. All block shall be laid plumb and level. 39 10. Grout for filling reinforced or non-reinforced cells shall be placed in 40 maximum 4'0" lifts, and consolidated in place by vibration or other methods 41 which insure complete filling of the cells. 42 11. All cells containing reinforcing bars shall be fully grouted. 43 12. Clean each days work and clean completed job with stiff brush and water. 44 45 C. THRU-WALL FLASHING: 46 1. Coordinate flashing work with the work of other trades for proper time & 47 sequence to avoid construction delays. 48 2. Install flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 49 3. Accurately fit, align, securely fasten and install free from distortion or defects. 50 51 D. PRECAST CONCRETE REINFORCED LINTELS: 52 1. Lintels shall have minimum bearing shall be 8" each side of masonry opening. 53 2. Lintels shall be installed on coursing with the typical masonry block, and 54 plumb and level with the wall surfaces. 55 3. Lintels shall be reinforced as shown on the drawings. 56 4. Precast concrete reinforced lintels shall be installed as shown on the 57 drawings.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 53 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2 E. LOOSE STEEL ANGLE LINTELS: 3 1. Lintels shall have minimum bearing shall be 8" each side of masonry opening. 4 2. Lintels shall be installed on coursing with the typical masonry block, and 5 plumb and level with the wall surfaces. 6 3. Loose steel angle lintels shall be as shown on the drawings. 7 8 F. COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS: 9 1. No accelerators, salts or antifreeze of any kind shall be added to the mortar 10 mix. 11 2. No installation of masonry shall be performed until expected weather 12 conditions are above 32F and will remain so for at least 24 hours following 13 completion of work. 14

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 54 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 DIVISION 5: METALS 2 3 SECTION - 05210: STRUCTURAL STEEL & MISCELLANEOUS METAL 4 5 I. GENERAL 6 7 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 8 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for 9 a complete installation of steel framing structural and miscellaneous fabrications 10 as shown on the drawings and as required to complete the work to the complete 11 satisfaction of the Owner. 12 13 B. REFERENCES: 14 1. AISC - Code of Standard Practice - Steel Construction (2005-ASD & LRFD). 15 2. ASTM A36/A36M - Structural Steel, except wide flange shapes 16 3. ASTM A992, Grade 50 – Wide flange steel shapes 17 4. ASTM A53 - Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. 18 5. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 19 6. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 20 7. ASTM A490 - Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural Steel 21 Joints. 22 8. ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural 23 Tubing in Round, Square, and Rectangular Shapes. 24 9. ASTM A501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural 25 Tubing. 26 10. ASTM A568/A568M - General Requirements for Steel, Carbon and High- 27 Strength Low-Alloy Hot-Rolled Sheet and Cold-Rolled Sheet. 28 11. AWS A2.4 - Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. 29 12. AWS D 1. 1 - Structural Welding Code. 30 13. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Painting Manual. 31 32 B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 33 1. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following, except as 34 otherwise indicated: 35 a. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard 36 Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". 37 1). Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by 38 deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the 39 owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of 40 any detail configuration of connections developed by the 41 fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings. " 42 b. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings, " including 43 "Commentary. 44 c. "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" 45 approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections." 46 d. American Welding Society (AWS) D 1. 1 "Structural Welding Code - 47 Steel.” 48 e. ASTM A6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, 49 Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use." 50 2. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 51 3. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with 52 minimum five (5) years documented experience. 53 4. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with 54 minimum five (5) years documented experience. 55 5. Design connections not detailed on the Drawings under direct supervision of

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 55 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and 2 licensed in the State of Pennsylvania. 3 4 C. SUBMITTALS: 5 1. Provide manufacturers shop drawings for the review and approval of the 6 Architect. Fabricate no work until in receipt of approved shop drawings. 7 2. Measure all as built field conditions prior to fabrication of any railing parts. 8 3. Fabricator to submit certification under AISC Quality Qualification 9 programmer provide a written description, for approval, of their in-house, 10 quality assurance program. 11 4. Product data or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for 12 following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show 13 compliance with specifications (including specified standards). 14 a. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports 15 covering chemical and physical properties. 16 b. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers. 17 Include Direct Tension Indicators if used. 18 c. Structural steel paints. 19 d. Shrinkage-resistant grout. 20 5. Shop drawings including complete details and schedules for fabrication and 21 assembly of structural steel members, procedures, and diagrams. 22 a. Include information necessary for fabrication of component parts of 23 structure, indicate size, weight and ASTM designation of each member, 24 type and location of shop and field connections, type, size and extent of 25 all welds and welding sequence. 26 b. Provide field work sheets for erector to use in conjunction with 27 Erection plans and piece drawings. Duplication of structural 28 drawings/details for use in field is not permitted. 29 c. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for the installation 30 of anchor bolts, or other items to be installed by others. Field verify 31 existing conditions prior to fabrication. 32 d. No fabrication shall be authorized until approved copies of detail 33 drawings are received from the Architect. 34 e. Submit one sepia and two prints of each shop drawing for review. Do 35 not use contract drawings for shop drawings 36 6. Architect/Engineer's review of shop drawings will be for general 37 considerations only. Compliance with requirements for materials, fabrication, 38 and erection of structural steel is the Contractor's responsibility. 39 a. Errors on the shop drawings after checking and stamping for approval 40 by the Architect does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for 41 their correctness. 42 7. Certified copies of each survey conducted by a licensed Land Surveyor, 43 showing elevations and locations of base plates and anchor bolts to receive 44 structural steel and final elevations and locations for major members. 45 a. Indicate discrepancies between actual installation and contract 46 documents. 47 8. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS 48 qualification within the previous 12 months. 49 50 D. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 51 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 52 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 53 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 54 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 55 information specifically related to work of this section:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 56 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 DIVISION 3: CONCRETE 2 Section 05710: Railings 3 Section 07350: Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing & Insulation System 4 Section 09900: Painting & Finishing 5 DIVISION 15: HVAC (On Liberty Drawings) 6 7 II. PRODUCTS 8 9 A. MATERIALS: 10 1. Structural Steel Wide Flange Members: ASTM A992, Grade 50, Other 11 structural steel shapes ASTM A36 (Plates, bars, angles, tees and channels: ASTM 12 A36). 13 2. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. 14 3. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. 15 4. Sag Rods: ASTM A36. 16 5. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 bolts, ASTM A563 nuts, galvanized to 17 ASTM A123 for galvanized structural members. 18 6. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, hexagonal heads and nuts for all connectors. 19 7. Welding Materials: AWS D 1. 1; type required for materials being welded. 20 8. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic 21 aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of 22 developing a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi at 28 days. 23 9. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide (for steel in exterior, 24 unheaded applications only unless noted on the drawings). 25 26 B. FABRICATION: 27 1. Shop Fabrication & Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in 28 shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in 29 accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. 30 Provide camber in structural members where indicated. 31 a. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate 32 for delivery sequence that will expedite and minimize field handling of 33 materials. 34 b. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of 35 units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of 36 members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs and other 37 defects. 38 2. Connections: 39 a. Provide all necessary erection bolts to properly support members for 40 field welding. Remove temporary supports after welding they interfere 41 with the finished job. 42 b. Holes through columns or beams, larger than two inches diameter, are 43 to be reinforced with steel plate each side to replace the strength. 44 Submit detail on shop drawings for approval. 45 c. All bolted connections are to be made using high strength bolts of 46 min. 3/4 inch diameter, except where noted otherwise. 47 d. Provide all necessary clip angles, bolts, anchor bolts, etc. to result in a 48 complete erected structure. 49 e. All welds to be at lease 3/16 inch fillet unless noted otherwise. 50 f. All angle and braces where required but not noted shall be a minimum 51 of 3 x 3 x 3/8 inch angles. 52 h. All welding to be performed by a certified licensed welder. 53 i. Provide holes in beams for bolted field connections required to 54 properly support wood nailers, wood blocking, angles, etc. of other 55 trades.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 57 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 j. Provide a minimum of four web stiffeners in all beams supporting 2 columns. (Post-up columns). 3 k. Provide bearing plates and anchor bolts, or welded shear studs under 4 the ends of all beams bearing on concrete or masonry. Unless noted 5 otherwise on the structural drawings, bearing plates to be 8” x 3/8” x 12” 6 inches. 7 l. Typical and non-typical connections have been detailed. Similar 8 details apply to similar conditions. 9 m. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other 10 connections are indicated. 11 1). Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for bolted 12 connections. 13 m. Apply primer paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to 14 a minimum of 1.5 mils dry film thickness. 15 3. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners 16 in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or 17 A490 Bolts". 18 4. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and 19 quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 20 5. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will produce true 21 alignment of axes without warp. 22 6. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to 23 structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing 24 members, as shown on final shop drawings. 25 7. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as 26 indicated to receive other work. 27 8. Cut, drill or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut 28 holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 29 30 C. FINISH: 31 1. Prepare surfaces of all members to be shop primed; remove loose rust, loose 32 mill scale, and splatter, slag of flux deposits. 33 2. Paint all structural steel members with rust-inhibitive primer. Do not prime 34 surfaces that will be fireproofed, bolted, field welded, and in contact with 35 concrete. 36 3. Shop and touch-up primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide (for steel in exterior, 37 unheated applications only unless noted on the drawings). 38 39 D. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL & TESTS: 40 1. General: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and 41 tests in mill, shop and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such 42 inspections and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing 43 materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. 44 a. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that 45 do not comply. 46 2. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical; similar 47 details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions 48 at site without causing delay in the work. 49 a. Promptly notify Architect whenever design of members and 50 connections for any portion of structure are not clearly indicated. 51 52 III. EXECUTION: 53 54 A. ERECTION: 55 1. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 58 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and 2 installation of permanent bracing. 3 2. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings. 4 3. Field connect members with threaded fasteners; torque to required 5 resistance. 6 4. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of 7 Architect/Engineer. 8 5. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed for 9 exterior, unheated steel only, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 10 6. Grout under base plates. Trowel grouted surface smooth, splay neatly to 45 11 degrees. 12 7. Do not use cutting torches in field for correction fabrication errors in primary 13 structural framing. Cutting permitted on secondary members not under stress, 14 if acceptable to Architect 15 16 B. ERECTION TOLERANCES: 17 1. Maximum Variation From Plumb: ¼” inch per story, non-cumulative. 18 2. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: ¼” inch. 19 20 C. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 21 1. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: 22 a. The special inspection and testing agency's inspector will perform his 23 duties in such a way that neither fabrication nor erection is unnecessarily 24 delayed to impeded. In no case will the inspector recommend or 25 prescribe the method of repair of a defect. 26 b. Shop inspection by the testing agency for all columns and 20% of 27 beams and girders shall include examination of steel for straightness and 28 alignment, conformance to length tolerances, fissures, mill scale, and 29 other defects and deformities, as described in ASTM A6, and examination 30 of aforementioned fabricated pieces for conformity with approved shop 31 drawings. Testing of Welding will be performed as required herein. 32 c. Field inspection by the Testing Agency of erected steel will be such as 33 to assure that the work conforms to specified requirements and will 34 include: 35 1). Inspection of field welding as required herein. 36 2). Ascertainment of proper fit and alignment. 37 3). Ascertainment of proper installation and tensioning of bolts. 38 4). Ascertainment that Contractor's erection procedures 39 adequately correct for distortion and shrinkage in field welded 40 assemblies and connections. The testing agency shall measure 41 weld shrinkage at all groove welded column splices in the first 42 four tiers and at each third tier thereafter. Reports of such 43 measurements shall be submitted to the Architect and Structural 44 Engineer within two days of completion of welding at each tier 45 measured. 46 5). Check plates and shapes, bolts, joists, deck, tubing, pipe and 47 filler material for conformance to the Contract Documents. 48 6). Check the field bracing, concrete and masonry anchor 49 conditions, inserts, vertical and horizontal alignment, and setting 50 of bearing plates and anchor bolts. 51 7). Examine welding equipment, electrodes and materials used to 52 make connections for conformance to AWS standards. 53 8). Mark each field welded joint and connection as accepted or 54 rejected. Rejected joints and connections shall be marked 55 accepted after proper repairs have been made. 56 2. Welding & Materials:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 59 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 a. Inspection of welding by the Special Inspection and Testing Agency 2 will be such as to assure that the work conforms to specified 3 requirements, and will include: 4 1). Ascertainment that electrodes used for manual shielded 5 metal-arc welding and the electrodes and flux used for 6 submerged arc welding conform to the requirements of Section 7 05120 Structural Steel. 8 2). Ascertainment that the approved welding procedure and the 9 approved welding sequence are followed without deviation, unless 10 specific approval for change is obtained from the Structural 11 Engineer 12 3). Ascertainment that the welding is performed only by welding 13 operators and welders who are properly certified. The Testing 14 Agency shall witness such qualification testing of welding 15 operators and welders, as may be required. 16 4). Ascertainment that the fit-up, joint preparation, size, contour, 17 extent of reinforcement, and length and location of welds 18 conform to specified requirements and the contract drawings, and 19 that no specified welds are omitted or unspecified welds added 20 without approval of the Structural Engineer. 21 b. The testing agency shall perform tests in the Fabricator's shop as 22 follows: 23 1). All welds: 100% visual, 24 2). All full or partial penetration groove welded connections and 25 splices: 100% ultrasonic. 26 3). All other welds: 10% magnetic particle. 27 4). Acceptance criteria for such tests shall be in accordance with 28 ASTM A435. 29 5). Embedded plates and assemblies have all welded reinforcing 30 tested by magnetic particle and all stud connectors tested in 31 accordance with Article "Metal Deck" in the following quantities. 32 a). Assemblies supporting structural elements: 100% 33 c. The special inspection and testing agency shall test field welds as 34 follows: 35 1). All welds, including wall and shoring connections: 100% 36 visual. 37 2). All full or partial penetration groove welds: 100% ultrasonic. 38 3). All other welds, including certain wall and shoring 39 connections, and 40 piles: 10% magnetic particle. 41 4). Additional testing will be required of: 42 a). Ten percent inspection level: If more than 10 percent 43 of the tested welds are rejected, then an additional 10 44 percent of all such welds shall be tested using the same 45 method. This 10 percent additional testing process shall 46 be repeated until the rejection rate drops below one in 10. 47 5). All cost of additional inspection required by this paragraph 48 shall be borne by the Contractor. 49 6). In addition, if defective welds are discovered, the remaining 50 un-inspected welds shall receive ultrasonic or magnetic particle 51 inspection as may be required by the Structural Engineer. 52 d. The welding inspector will have the authority to reject weldments. 53 Such rejection may be based on visual inspection where in his opinion the 54 weldment would not pass a more detailed investigation. 55 e. Reports by the special inspection and testing agency's inspector will

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 60 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 contain, as a minimum, an adequate description of each weld tested, the 2 identifying mark of the welder responsible for weld, a critique of any 3 defects noted by visual inspection or testing, and a statement regarding 4 the acceptability of the weld tested, as judged by current AWS standards. 5 Reports shall be distributed as early as possible but not later than one 6 work week after the tests have been performed. The Structural Engineer 7 shall be notified by phone if, in the judgment of the inspector, test 8 results require immediate comment. 9 f. Radiographic testing may be substituted for ultrasonic. 10 3. High Strength & Slip-Critical Bolts: 11 a. Standard Bolts: 12 1). Inspect the bolt tightness of 10 percent of the bolts (minimum 13 of two), selected at random in each high strength bolted 14 connection. If rejected bolts are found in any connection, all the 15 remaining bolts in that connection shall be inspected for 16 tightness. Inspection procedure shall be in accordance with 17 "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 18 Bolts" approved by Research Council on Riveted and Bolted 19 Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation (Research Council 20 on Structural Connections). 21 2). If at any time rejectable bolts are found in more than three 22 percent of the inspected connections at any level, all high 23 strength bolted connections at that level shall be inspected and 24 this 100 percent inspection rate shall be continued on all 25 succeeding levels until rejectable bolts are found in less than 26 three percent of the connections. Cost of additional inspection 27 required by this paragraph shall be borne by the Contractor. 28 b. Tension Control (Self-Indicating) Bolts: 29 1). Inspect tightness of ten percent (minimum of two) of the 30 bolts, selected at random in each high strength bolted connection 31 in accordance with "Standard bolts" above. 32 2). Perform a visual inspection of all remaining high strength 33 bolted connections to assure that all torque-off splines have been 34 sheared. 35 3). When splines are not sheared, the Testing Agency shall 36 determine that proper bolt tension has been achieved by the 37 application of a properly calibrated testing torque or the 38 Contractor may, at his option, remove and replace all bolts with 39 unsheared splines. 40 a) All cost of additional inspection required by this 41 paragraph shall be borne by the Contractor. 42 43 44 45

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 61 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 05712: RAILINGS 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work. 6 1. The General Contractor shall provide all labor and materials tools and 7 equipment for a complete installation of the fabricated railings for stairs & ramps 8 as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 9 10 B. REFERENCES: 11 1. AISC “ASD Manual of Steel Construction”, 9th Edition 12 2. AISC “Manual of Steel Construction”, 9th Edition 13 3. ASTM A-36 “Specifications for Structural Steel”, 1996 14 4. ASTM A-53 “Specifications for Pipe, Steel, Black & Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated 15 Welded & Seamless”, 1990 16 5. ASTM A-123 “Specifications for Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on 17 Iron and Steel Products”, 1989 18 6. ASTM A-500 “Specifications for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon 19 Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes”, 1993 20 7. ASTM A-513 “Specifications for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon & Alloy 21 Steel Mechanical Tubing”, 1992 22 8. ASTM A-569 “Specifications for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot- 23 Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality”, 1991. 24 9. ASTM A-615 “Specifications for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for 25 Concrete Reinforcement”, 1993 26 10. ASTM A-780 “Specifications for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of 27 Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings”, 1993 28 11. ASTM E-303 “Method of Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using the 29 British Pendulum Tester”, 1974 30 12. AWS D 1.1 “Structural Welding Code – Steel”, 1994 31 13. AWS D 1.3 “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel”, 1989 32 14. AWS “Welding Procedure & Performance Qualification”, 1994 33 15. NAAMM “Metal Stair Manual”, 5th Edition 34 16. NOMMA “Guideline 1 – Joint Finishes”, December 1994 35 17. SSPC “Steel Structures Painting Manual”, Volume 11, 6th Edition 36 37 C. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS for HANDRAIL & RAILING SYSTEMS: 38 1. General: In engineering handrail and railing systems to withstand structural 39 loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials 40 based on the following: 41 a. Cold-Formed Structural Steel: AISI “Specification for the Design of 42 Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.” 43 b. Structural steel shapes ASTM A36 (Plates, bars, angles, tees and 44 channels: ASTM A36). 45 2. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Design, engineer, 46 fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements 47 of ASTM E 985 for structural performance based on testing performed according 48 to ASTM E 894 and E 935. 49 3. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate 50 and install handrails and railing systems to withstand the following structural 51 loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials for 52 handrails, railing systems, anchors, and connections. Apply each load to 53 produce the maximum stress in each of the respective components comprising 54 handrails and railing systems. 55 a. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following 56 loads applied as indicated.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 62 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 1) Concentrated load of 200 lb./lf (890 N) applied at any point 2 and in any direction. 3 2) Uniform load of 50 lb./lf per linear foot (730 N/m) applied 4 horizontally and concurrently with uniform load of 100 lbf per 5 linear foot (1460 N/m) applied vertically downward. 6 3) Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed 7 to act concurrently. 8 b. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the 9 following loads applied as indicated: 10 1) Concentrated load of 200 lb./lf (890 N) applied at any point 11 and in any direction. 12 2) Uniform load of 50 lb./lf per linear foot (730 N/m) applied in 13 any direction. 14 3) Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed 15 to act concurrently. 16 c. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a horizontal 17 concentrated load of 200 lb./lf (890 N) applied to 1 sq. ft. (0.09 sp. M) at 18 any point in the system, including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or 19 other elements composing the infill area. 20 1) Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with 21 loads on top rails of railing systems in determining stress of 22 guard. 23 4. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the 24 following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in engineering, 25 fabricating, and installing handrails and railing systems to prevent buckling, 26 opening of joints, overstressing of components and connections, and other 27 detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures 28 of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 29 a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degree F (67 degree C), ambient; 30 180 degree F (100 degree C), material surfaces. 31 5. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by 32 insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible 33 materials. 34 35 E. SUBMITTALS: 36 1. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the 37 Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 38 2. Product data for each product used in ornamental metalwork, including 39 finishing materials and methods. 40 3. Prepare handrail and railing systems shop drawings under the supervision of 41 a qualified professional engineer. 42 4. Shop drawings shall show fabrication and installation of ornamental 43 metalwork including plans, elevations, details of components, and attachments 44 to other units of Work. 45 5. Indicate materials and profiles of each ornamental metalwork member, 46 fitting, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. 47 a. Include setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of 48 anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed as unite of Work of 49 other sections. 50 b. For installed products indicated to comply with certain design 51 loadings, include structural analysis data sealed and signed by the 52 qualified professional engineer who was responsible for their 53 preparations. 54 6. Prepare steel railing shop drawings under the supervision of a qualified 55 professional engineer. 56 a. Shop drawings shall show fabrication and installation of steel staircase 57 including plans, elevations, details of materials, and attachments to

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 63 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 building structural. Indicate materials and profiles of each member 2 including welding type. 3 1) Include setting drawings, and directions for installation of 4 anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed to support the 5 stair structure. 6 2) Include structural analysis data sealed and signed by the 7 qualified professional engineer who was responsible for their 8 preparation. 9 3) Include analysis data of top and bottom moment connections 10 sealed and signed by the qualified professional engineer who was 11 responsible for their preparation. 12 7. Patterns, models or plaster castings made from proposed patterns for each 13 design of custom casting required. 14 8. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer’s color charts 15 consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the range of colors 16 expected and other finish characteristics available for each item indicated below. 17 a. Ornamental metal work composed of color-or acid etched 18 components. 19 b. Ornamental metalwork items with a based-enamel coating. 20 c. Ornamental metalwork items with a high-performance coating. 21 9. Samples for verification of each profile and pattern of fabricated metal and 22 each type of metal finish required, prepared on metal of same thickness and 23 alloy indicated for final unit of Work. 24 a. Where finished materials involve normal color and texture variations, 25 include sample sets composed of two or more units showing the 26 expected range of variations. 27 1) Include 6-inch- (150-mm-) long samples of linear shapes. 28 2) Include 6-inch- (150-mm-) square samples of plates. 29 3) Include full-size samples of castings and forgings. 30 10. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with 31 requirements specified under the “Quality Assurance” Article. 32 11. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the “Quality Assurance” 33 Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. 34 a. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, 35 names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information 36 specified. 37 38 F. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 39 1. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm with five (5) years experience in successfully 40 producing ornamental metalwork similar to that indicated for this Project and 41 with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying 42 the Work. 43 2. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of ornamental metalwork 44 specified in this Section by the same firm that fabricated it. Arrange for 45 fabrication and installation of stair & ramp railings by the same company. 46 3. Applicable Standards: 47 a. NAAMM “Metal Stair Manual” 48 b. AISC “ASD Manual of Steel Construction” & “Manual of Steel 49 Construction” 50 c. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code – Steel”, AWS D1.3 “Structural 51 Welding Code – Sheet Steel”, & AWS “Welding Procedure & Performance 52 Qualification” 53 4. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer legally authorized to practice 54 in jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering 55 services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the installation of assemblies 56 similar to this Project in material, design, and extent and that have a record of 57 successful in-service performance.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 64 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 5. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply 2 with requirements of Division 1 Section “Project Meetings.” 3 4 G. DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING: 5 1. Store ornamental metalwork inside a conditioned area, away from uncured 6 concrete and masonry, and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, 7 extreme temperatures, and humidity. 8 2. Delivery and store cast metal products in wooden crates with sufficient 9 excelsior to ensure that they will not be cracked or otherwise damaged. 10 11 H. PROJECT CONDITIONS: 12 1. Field Measurements: Where steel staircase is indicated to fit to other 13 construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field 14 measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop 15 drawings. 16 2. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying 17 the Work. 18 a. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, 19 General Contractor will guarantee dimensions and Ornamental 20 Metal/Steel Stair Fabricator will proceed with fabricating ornamental 21 metalwork without field measurements. 22 b. General Contractor will coordinate construction to ensure that actual 23 dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. 24 25 I. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 26 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 27 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 28 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 29 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 30 information specifically related to work of this section: 31 DIVISION 3: CONCRETE 32 Section 04100: Masonry 33 Section 05210: Structural Steel & Misc. Metal 34 Section 09900: Painting & Finishing 35 36 II. PRODUCTS 37 38 A. MATERIALS: 39 1. General: Provide metals free from surface blemishes where exposed to view 40 in the finished unit. 41 2. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, 42 stains, discoloration, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. 43 a. Steel and Iron: Provide steel and iron in the form indicated complying 44 with the following requirements. 45 1) Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. 46 2) Formed Steel Sheet: ASTM A-569 47 3) Steel Tubing: Cold-formed, ASTM A-500-B, and A-513. 48 4) Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53: Type and grade selected by fabricator 49 as required for design loading, black finish. 50 5) Reinforcing Bars: ASTM a-615, Grade 40, deformed. 51 6) Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanize after fabrication in accordance 52 with ASTM A-123. 53 54 B. FABRICATION, GENERAL: 55 1. Exposed Work: True to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and 56 with straight sharp edges. 57 2. Use only smooth materials free from burrs, pitting and other marks.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 65 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 a. Fastener Connections: provide hairline joints at exposed connections. 2 Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude 3 water penetration. 4 b. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS for recommended practices in 5 shop welding. Exposed welds to have finished appearance in accordance 6 with NOMMA “Guideline 1 – Joint Finishes” for Finish #3. 7 3. Form stairs & railings to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines, 8 and angles. 9 4. Provide components in sizes and profiles indicated, but not less than required 10 to comply with requirements indicated for structural performance. 11 5. Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets to assemble units and to attach 12 to other work. 13 6. Drill and tap for required fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 14 7. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. 15 8. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arises. 16 9. Assemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field 17 splicing and assembly. 18 a. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling 19 limitations. 20 b. Clearly mark units for re-assembly and coordinated installation. 21 c. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 22 23 E. FABRICATING HANDRAILS & RAILINGS 24 1. Wall-Mounted Handrails: 1-½ “ diameter tubular rail with wall returns, with ¼” 25 stamped plate wall brackets for exposed fastener; flat extension at top and 26 bottom of length required by code. 27 a. Provide brackets, weld plates, anchors, fasteners and other 28 accessories of types recommended by stair system manufacturer for 29 application indicated on the drawings 30 2. Non-welded Connections: Fabricated railing systems and handrails to 31 interconnect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings, unless 32 otherwise indicated. 33 a. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, 34 hairline joints. 35 3. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railing systems of materials 36 indicated below to interconnect members by welding. 37 a. Use welding method that is appropriate for metal and finish indicated 38 and that develops strength required to comply with structural 39 performance criteria. 40 b. Finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth, flush, and blended to 41 match adjoining surfaces. 42 c. Utilize #3 finish per NOMMA Guideline1: Joint Finishes, as guide to 43 finishing quality. 44 d. Provide welded connections for ferrous handrails and railing systems. 45 4. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railing systems to interconnect 46 members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using 47 fittings designed and fabricated for this purpose. 48 5. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows: 49 a. As detailed. 50 b. By radius bends of radius indicated. 51 c. By flush radius bends. 52 d. By bending. 53 e. By mitering at elbow bends. 54 f. By inserting prefabricated flush elbow fittings. 55 g. By any method indicated above applicable to change of direction

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 66 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 involved. 2 6. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce 3 uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain profile of 4 member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, or otherwise 5 deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components. 6 7. For handrails and railing systems with non welded connections that are 7 exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources, provide 8 weep holes or another means to drain water entrapped in hollow sections of 9 railing members. 10 8. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise 11 indicated; close ends of returns. 12 9. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with manufacturer’s 13 standard prefabricated end fittings. 14 10. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, 15 miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members 16 to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 17 a. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails 18 and railing systems to concrete or masonry work. 19 1) Fabricate anchorage devices that are capable of withstanding 20 load imposed by handrails and railing systems. 21 2) Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. 22 b. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel, not 23 less than 6 inches (150 mm) long and inside dimensions not less than ½ 24 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate 25 forming bottom closure. 26 1) Or, drill holes on site and utilize non-shrink grout to secure 27 posts. 28 11. Shop Painting: 29 a. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-1 Solvent Cleaning, SSPC SP-2 Hand 30 Tool Cleaning and SSPC SP-3 Power tool cleaning as required. 31 b. Shop Primer: Apply shop primer to stairs and landings after 32 fabrication. 33 1) Primer shall be manufacturer’s standard lead-free and 34 chromate free modified phenolic alkyd, FS TT-P-664C, dry film 35 thickness: 1.5 mil. Minimum. 36 c. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanize exterior areaway stairs, landing, 37 guardrail, hand-railings, and gate from basement, after fabrication in 38 accordance with ASTM A-123. 39 d. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re- 40 galvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less 41 than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, complying with DOD-P-21035 or 42 SSPC-Paint 20. 43 e. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC- 44 Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers. 45 46 III. EXECUTION: 47 48 A. RAILINGS, & GUARDS: 49 1. Stairs, railings, & guards shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s 50 installation instructions, and approved shop drawings, and to comply with 51 specified performance requirements when installed. 52 53 B. EXPOSED CONNECTIONS: 54 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. 55 56 C. ANCHORAGE DEVICES: 57 1. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing stairs and railings to in-

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 67 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 place construction. 2 2. Flanges shall be secured to masonry wall with expansion insert bolts. 3 3. Bolt inserts shall be grouted and caulked. 4 5 D. INSTALLATION: 6 1. All railing sections shall be installed plumb and level. 7 8 E. NEWEL POSTS: 9 1. Newel posts shall be installed in metal insert sleeved in the concrete (where 10 indicated on the drawings). 11 2. Sleeves shall be filled with grout. 12 13 F. FIELD WELDS: 14 1. Weld connections, which cannot be shop welded because of shipping size 15 limitations. 16 a. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. 17 18 G. FINISHED WORK: 19 1. Finished work shall be painted with two coats rust inhibitive paint color as 20 selected by owner. (See painting Section 09900 of this Specification.) 21

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 68 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 DIVISION 6: WOOD & PLASTICS 2 3 SECTION – 06067: HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATES 4 5 I. I. GENERAL 6 7 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 8 1. Contractor shall supply and install high pressure laminate as shown on 9 drawings and specified herein. Section includes: 10 a. General purpose grade high pressure decorative laminate. 11 b. Horizontal grade high pressure decorative laminate. 12 c. Vertical forming grade high pressure decorative laminate. 13 14 B. REFERENCES: 15 1. ANSI/NEMA LD-3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates. 16 2. ANSI A161.2 - Performance Standards for Fabricated High Pressure 17 Decorative Countertops. 18 3. NSF-35 - Laminated Plastics for Surfacing Food Service Equipment. 19 4. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of 20 Building Materials. 21 22 C. SUBMITTALS: 23 1. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. 24 2. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, and specifications. 25 3. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions and 26 interface with other products. 27 4. Samples: Submit minimum 2 inches by 2 inches (50 mm by 50 mm) samples 28 indicating full range of color and pattern variation. 29 30 D. PRODUCT DELIVERY & STORAGE: 31 1. High pressure laminate to be stored with top face-down and a caulk board on 32 top to protect material from damage and from warping. 33 2. Laminate to be protected from moisture and from contact with floors or 34 outside walls. 35 36 E. PRECONDITIONING: 37 1. Laminate and substrate to acclimate for at least 48 hours at same ambient 38 condition. Optimum conditions being approximately 75°F (24°C) and relative 39 humidity of 45 to 55%. 40 2. Air circulation to be provided around product. 41 42 F. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 43 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 44 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 45 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 46 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 47 information specifically related to work of this section: 48 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 49 Section 06200: Finish Carpentry 50 Section 12310: Cabinets, Casework, & Countertops 51 II. PRODUCTS 52 53 A. MANUFACTURERS: 54 1. Acceptable Manufacturer (Basis of Design): NEVAMAR DECORATIVE 55 SURFACES; 8339 Telegraph Road, Odenton, MD 21113-1397. ASD. Tel: (410) 56 551-5000 or (800) 638-4380. www.nevamar.com.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 69 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2. Alternative Acceptable Manufacturers shall be ARBORITE, FORMICA, or 2 WILSONART. 3 3. Provide all high pressure decorative laminates from a single manufacturer. 4 5 B. MATERIALS: 6 1. Plastic Laminate: 7 a. General Purpose; NEVAMAR(R) Armored Protection (tm) Laminated 8 Plastic Horizontal Grade H-5 (HGS): 9 1) Thickness: 0.048 plus/minus 0.005 inch (1.2 plus/minus 0.12 10 mm). 11 2) Finish: Selected by Owner. 12 b. Horizontal Grade; NEVAMAR(R) Armored Protection (tm) Laminated 13 Plastic Horizontal Grade H-4 (HGL): 14 1) Thickness: 0.039 plus/minus 0.005 inch (1.0 plus/minus 0.12 15 mm). 16 2) Finish: Selected by Owner. 17 c. Vertical Forming Grade; NEVAMAR(R) Armored Protection (tm) 18 Laminated Plastic Vertical Forming Grade VF-3 (VGP): 19 1) Thickness: 0.028 plus/minus 0.004 inch (0.7 plus/minus 0.10 20 mm). 21 2) Finish: Selected by Owner. 22 2. Core Material: Laminate grade plywood. 23 3. Adhesive: Contact, semi-rigid (PVAc) or rigid (Urea Resorcinol) adhesives are 24 recommended. Fabricator to follow adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. 25 26 III. EXECUTION 27 28 A. INSTALLATION: 29 1. Bond plastic laminate to core material using adhesives and techniques 30 recommended by adhesive manufacturer and ANSI A161.2. 31 2. Take care that moisture imbalance does not exist between plastic laminate 32 and substrate before fabrication. 33 3. Provide minimum radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at inside corners of cut-outs; 34 file edges smooth to prevent stress cracking. 35 4. Saw, drill, edge file, sand, and rout plastic laminate with decorative side up to 36 prevent cracking or chipping of laminate surface. 37 a. Use carbide tipped cutting edges on saws, drills, and routers. 38 b. Drill plastic laminate with a wood backing to prevent "breakout" at 39 bottom of drilled holes. 40 5. Cut curved edges slightly oversize and finish by sanding, filing, or routing for 41 smooth edges. 42

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 70 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION – 06100: ROUGH CARPENTRY 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A: SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. Provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment as required to complete 7 miscellaneous dimensional lumber framing, and wood blocking, as shown on the 8 drawings, specified herein and as necessary to complete the work of the 9 contract. 10 11 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 12 1. All work shall be performed by mechanics skilled in the wood framing trade. 13 2. Verification of all dimensions shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 14 15 C. HANDLING OF MATERIALS: 16 1. All materials shall be protected from the weather. 17 2. All materials shall be free of dampness, rot, mildew or the like. 18 19 D. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 20 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 21 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 22 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 23 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 24 information specifically related to work of this section: 25 Section 06200: Finish Carpentry 26 Section 06400: Architectural Woodwork 27 Section 07350: Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing & Insulation System 28 29 II. PRODUCTS 30 31 A. FRAMING & MISC. BLOCKING LUMBER: 32 1. Framing & misc. Blocking lumber shall be kiln dried #1 and #2 southern pine 33 and as shown on the drawings. 34 2. Maximum moisture content shall be 14%. 35 36 B. PLYWOOD FLOOR DECKING: 37 1. Plywood shall be 3/4" T&G APA rated STURD-I-FLOOR EXT-APA plywood. 38 39 C. ENGINEERED LUMBER STRUCTURAL BEAMS: 40 1. Beams shall be "G-P Lam LVL”, 2.0E, 1-3/4” thk., Fb = 2850 psi, as 41 manufactured by Georgia-Pacific Corp., or approved equal. 42 2. Sizes shall be as shown on the drawings. 43 44 D. PRESSURE TREATED LUMBER: 45 1. Pressure treated lumber shall be "wolmanized", .25 pound per cubic foot in 46 accordance with awpa standard c-1. 47 2. Pressure treated lumber shall be used for all plates or joists in contact with 48 masonry or concrete foundations. 49 50 E. NAILS: 51 1. Nails shall be common except as noted otherwise on the drawings. 52 2. Exterior nails exposed to the weather shall be galvanized. 53 54 F. Glue: 55 1. Glue shall be APA Specification AFG-01 construction adhesives, properly 56 applied, approved by the American Plywood Association

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 71 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2 III. EXECUTION: 3 4 A. FRAMING & MISC. BLOCKING: 5 1. All framing lumber shall be installed straight, plumb and true. 6 2. All joints shall be well nailed with connectors of appropriate size, number and 7 type. Lumber shall be free of checks and warps. 8 3. Lumber shall be dry. 9 Cut out and remove defects, which may render the lumber unsuitable for its 10 intended use. 11 4. The Owner may reject lumber, whether or not it has been installed, for 12 reasons of excessive warp, twist, mildew, fungus or mold, or for improper 13 cutting and installation. 14 a. Costs of replacement of rejected lumber shall be borne by the 15 Contractor. 16 5. Bearings of lumber assemblies shall be full width of associated members. 17 6. Cut or notch bearing area of lumber installed on a slope. 18 7. Set all horizontal members with natural camber up. 19 8. Set all blocking as necessary to provide for the work of other trades. 20 9. Use 16d or larger nails to connect two 2x lumber pieces. 21 10. Avoid splitting of wood. 22 a. Pre-bore holes as necessary. 23 b. Remove and replace split lumber. 24 11. Center plywood with face grain perpendicular to supports or continuously 25 over two supports. 26 12. Plywood floor decking shall be glued and nailed in strict accordance with the 27 (APA) American Plywood Association’s recommendations. 28 29 B. HOLES IN STRUCTURAL FRAMING: 30 1. Do not cut or notch structural lumber for installation of pipes, ducts, 31 conduit/wire, of the like without the review and approval of the Architect. 32 2. Holes for wire shall be limited to 1" diameter. 33 34

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 72 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION – 06200: FINISH CARPENTRY 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for 7 a complete installation of HM doors & frames, door hardware, cabinets, 8 casework, wood trim, and miscellaneous hardware as shown on the drawings, 9 specified herein and as necessary to properly complete the work to the complete 10 satisfaction of the Owner. 11 12 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 13 1. Work of this section shall comply with the recommendations of the 14 Architectural Woodwork Institute for Standard Grade Work. 15 2. All work shall be performed by mechanics skilled in the custom woodwork 16 trade. 17 3. The woodwork manufacturer and the Contractor are jointly responsible for 18 details and dimensions of all work specified in this section. 19 20 C. SUBMITTALS: 21 1. The Contractor shall submit samples of all products specified in this section 22 for the review and approval of the Owner. 23 24 D. HANDLING: 25 1. No materials specified in this section shall be delivered to the work site until 26 building and storage areas are sufficiently dry so that woodwork will not be 27 damaged by excessive changes in moisture content. 28 2. All materials shall be protected from damage. 29 30 E. RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENTS 31 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 32 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 33 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 34 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 35 information specifically related to work of this section: 36 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 37 Section 06400: Architectural Woodwork 38 DIVISION 8: DOORS 39 Section 10800: Toilet Accessories 40 Section 12310: Cabinets, Casework & Countertops 41 42 II. PRODUCTS & MATERIALS: 43 44 A. STANDING & RUNNING TRIM: 45 1. Standing & running trim shall be as shown on the drawings. 46 2. Where wood trim is shown on the drawings such shall be clear white pine, 47 birch, or approved equal. 48 3. Finger jointed materials will not be allowed. 49 50 B. WINDOW SILLS: 51 1. Window sills shall be ¾” x 15” clear stock, 7 ft. max. length machine finished 52 Pennsylvania PYRAMID BRAND slate as manufactured by THE STRUCTURAL SLATE 53 COMPANY Pen Argyl, PA 18071 (610) 863-4141, or approved equal, conforming 54 to ASTM C-629 Structural Slate specifications. 55 56 III. EXECUTION: 57

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 73 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 A. GENERAL: 2 1. Make joints in trim tight. 3 2. Conceal fastening whenever possible. 4 3. Finished trim lumber shall be installed plumb and level. 5 4. Sand all finished woodwork. 6 5. Adjoining surfaces of the same material in the same plane shall be sanded 7 flush. 8 6. All work shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with AWI 9 specifications for Custom Grade work. 10 7. Fasteners shall be finish nails or screws. 11 8. Finish nails shall be countersunk, filled and sanded. 12 9. Screws shall be countersunk and plugged with wood dowels matching the 13 adjacent materials, trimmed and sanded to match adjacent surface. 14 15

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 74 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION-06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor, material, equipment, related services, 7 and supervision required, including, but not limited to, manufacturing, 8 fabrication, erection, and installation for architectural woodwork as required for 9 the complete performance of the work, and as shown on the Drawings and as 10 herein specified. 11 a. Including the proposed new Wall Paneling in Meeting Room-114 & 12 Rebuilt Platform-118's built-in counter/desk woodwork. 13 14 B. REFERENCES 15 1. General: The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the 16 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic 17 designation only. The edition/revision of the referenced publications shall be the 18 latest date as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified. 19 2. American Wood Council (AWC): 20 a. AWC DCA, “Design for Code Acceptance.” 21 3. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):1. AWI AWS, “Architectural Woodwork 22 Standards.” 23 4. ASTM (ASTM): 24 a. ASTM D 523, “Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.” 25 b. ASTM E 84, “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics 26 of Building Materials.” 27 5. Forest Stewardship Council™ (FSC):1. FSC STD-01-001, “FSC Principles and 28 Criteria for Forest Stewardship.” 29 6. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA): 30 a. ANSI/HPVA HP-1, “American National Standard for Hardwood and 31 Decorative Plywood” (copyrighted by HPVA, ANSI approved). 32 b. HPVA HPH, “Hardwood Plywood Handbook.” 33 c. HPVA VSG, “Veneer Species Guide.” 34 35 C. SUBMITTALS 36 1. Product Data: Submit product data showing material proposed. Submit 37 sufficient information to determine compliance with the Drawings and 38 Specifications. Submit product data for each type of product and process 39 specified and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during 40 fabrication, finishing, and installation. 41 2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each product and accessory 42 required. Include information not fully detailed in manufacturer’s standard 43 product data, including, but not limited to, location of each item in dimensioned 44 plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices, and other 45 component 46 3. Samples: 47 a. Submit samples for initial selection. Submit samples of each specified 48 finish. Submit samples in form of manufacturer’s charts showing veneers 49 and finishes available. 50 4. Quality Control Submittals: 51 a. Fire Retardant Treatment Data: Submit fire retardant treatment data for 52 material treated to reduce combustibility. 53 54 D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 55 1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, 56 codes, ordinances, and regulations of Federal, State, and local authorities having

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 75 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from such authorities. 2 2. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI AWS for grades of architectural woodwork, 3 construction, finishes, and other requirements. Provide AWI certification labels or 4 AWI certificates of compliance indicating that woodwork meets requirements of 5 grades specified. 6 4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials with the following 7 characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM test method 8 indicated below, by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Intertek Testing Services 9 (ITS), Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA), or another inspecting 10 and testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 11 a. Surface burning characteristics shall not exceed values indicated below, 12 tested per ASTM E 84. 13 1) Flame Spread: 200. 14 2) Smoke Developed: 450. 15 b. Per AWC, veneer of a thickness of 1/28 inch (0.9 mm) or less can be 16 applied to a fire-resistant core and still retain fire-resistant core 17 properties: http://www.awc.org/publications/DCA/DCA1/DCA1.pdf 18 5. Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of the work, fabricate and erect mock-ups for 19 each type of finish and application required to verify selections made under 20 sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of 21 materials and execution. Build mock-ups using materials indicated for final unit 22 of work. 23 6. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct pre-installation conference in 24 accordance with Section 01 31 19 - Project Meetings. Prior to commencing the 25 installation, meet at the Project site to review the material selections, installation 26 procedures, and coordination with other trades. Mock-ups shall be reviewed 27 during the pre-installation conference. Pre-installation conference shall include, 28 but shall not be limited to, the Contractor, the Installer, and any trade that 29 requires coordination with the work. Date and time of the pre-installation 30 conference shall be acceptable to the Owner and the Architect. 31 32 E. DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING 33 1. Deliver materials to the Project site in supplier’s or manufacturer’s original 34 wrappings and containers (or suitable equivalent protection), labeled with 35 supplier’s or manufacturer’s name, material or product brand name, and lot 36 number, if any. 37 2. Store decorative hardwood plywood and fabricated products in dry interior 38 locations where temperature is maintained between 60°F (16°C) and 90°F (32°C) 39 and relative humidity is maintained between 30 percent and 55 percent. 40 3. Remove or loosen plastic wrappings. Sticker individual panels to hasten 41 acclimatization.Page 4 of 9cfpwood.com7900 Triad Center DriveSuite 42 200Greensboro, NC 27409Phone: 800.637.1609Fax: 336.605.6969 43 4. Cover decorative hardwood plywood panels and fabricated products to protect 44 from exposure to light until installed. 45 5. Protect decorative hardwood plywood from edge and surface damage. 46 47 F. PROJECT CONDITIONS 48 1. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install work until building is 49 enclosed, wet-work is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is 50 operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy 51 levels during the remainder of the construction period. 52 53 E. RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENTS 54 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 55 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 76 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 2 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 3 information specifically related to work of this section: 4 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 5 Section 06200: Finish Carpentry 6 Section 12310: Cabinets, Casework & Countertops 7 8 II. PRODUCTS 9 10 A. MATERIALS 11 1. Hardwood Veneer Core Plywood: Provide PureBond® process domestic veneer 12 core hardwood plywood as manufactured by Columbia Forest Products 13 (http://www.columbiaforestproducts.com/Products.aspx/VeneerCore). 14 a. Panel: 15 1) FSC 100% – Pure] [FSC-Mix]b. Manufacture according to 16 ANSI/HVPA HP-1. 17 2) Core construction shall be FSC-certified veneer core. 18 b. Thickness: 1/2” thick. 19 c. Veneers: 20 1) Face: 21 a) Species: Birch 22 b) Color Selection: Selected By Owner 23 c) Grade: A, per ANSI/HPVA HP-1. 24 d) Cut: Rift cut. 25 e) Veneer Match: Slip match. 26 d. Factory Finish: Provide clear UV-cured acrylic coating on face side. 27 1) Gloss Level: Satin, 31 to 45 gloss units measured on 60 degree 28 gloss meter per ASTM D 523. 29 e. Factory Finish: Provide pre-applied custom stained finish 30 (CustomColors™). Finish shall be a pre-applied, UV-cured, 100 percent 31 solid stain applied in the factory under controlled conditions. Provide 32 finish as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from 33 the manufacturer’s standards. 34 1) Gloss Level: Satin, 31 to 45 gloss units measured on 60 degree 35 gloss meter per ASTM D 523. 36 7. Fire-Retardant Treated Materials: Where indicated, use materials impregnated 37 with fire retardant chemical formulations indicated, by a pressure process or by 38 other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to produce products 39 with surface burning characteristics specified. 40 a. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise 41 affect finishes. 42 b. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during 43 treatment and drying processes that shall prevent lumber from warping 44 and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, 45 marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated architectural 46 woodwork. 47 c. Discard treated material that does not comply with requirements of 48 referenced woodworking standard. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, 49 discolored, or otherwise damaged or defective material. 50 51 III. EXECUTION 52 53 A. EXAMINATION 54 1. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work 55 is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing, with a copy to the Owner

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 77 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 and the Architect, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely 2 completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory 3 conditions have been corrected. 4 1. Beginning of the work shall indicate acceptance of the areas and 5 conditions as satisfactory by the Installer. 6 7 B. PREPARATION 8 1. Condition work to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas 9 before installing. Before installing work, examine shop-fabricated work for 10 completion and complete work as required. 11 12 C. INSTALLATION 13 1. General: Install in accordance with reviewed product data, final shop drawings, 14 manufacturer’s written recommendations, and as indicated on the Drawings. 15 2. Quality Standard: Install architectural woodwork to comply with AWI AWS for 16 the same grades specified in Part 2 - Products of this Section for type of 17 architectural woodwork involved. 18 3. Fire Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire retardant-treated 19 wood to comply with recommendations of chemical treatment manufacturer, 20 including, but not limited to, those for adhesives used to install architectural 21 woodwork. 22 4. Installation Tolerances: Install architectural woodwork plumb, level, true, and 23 straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. 24 25 D. ADJUSTING & CLEANING 26 1. Repair damaged and defective work where possible to eliminate functional and 27 visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace the work. 28 2. Clean architectural woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch- 29 up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 30 31 E. PROTECTION 32 A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the 33 Installer, that shall ensure that the work shall be without damage at time of 34 Substantial Completion

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 78 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 DIVISION 7: THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 2 3 SECTION - 07140: MASONRY WATER REPELLANT SYSTEM 4 5 I. GENERAL: 6 7 A. SCOPE: Provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for a complete 8 installation of exterior masonry water repellant on the proposed Addition's exterior 9 masonry wall surfaces specified herein. 10 11 B. REFERENCES 12 1. ASTM D 5703-83, Practice for Preparation Surface Cleaning of Clay Brick 13 Masonry 14 2. ASTM D E-96-80, Water Vapor Transmission for Coatings 15 3. ASTM E 96-90 and ASTM D 1653-72, Moisture Vapor Transmission Rate 16 4. ASTM G 53-90, Accelerated Weathering (QUV) 17 5. ASTM D 2369092, Test Method for Volatile Content Coatings 18 19 C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 20 1. Provide water repellent products which comply with the performance and 21 environmental regulations when tested by methods indicated. 22 2. Qualifications: 23 a. Installer Qualifications: The installer shall have a minimum of five 24 years experience in the successful application of water based repellents. 25 The installer and method of application shall be approved by the 26 repellent manufacturer. 27 b. The manufacturer shall provide a list of approved and qualified 28 installers. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years 29 experience in the manufacturer and applications of water based, one 30 component masonry waterproofing products. 31 32 D. SUBMITTALS: 33 1. Submit the manufacturers current technical product update indicating product 34 test results and compliance. 35 a. Submit MSDS sheets indicating VOC content and safety precautions 36 Provide evidence of the product manufacturer’s acceptance of the 37 applicator and installation methods. 38 b. Submit a report verifying the product manufacturer’s acceptance of 39 work site conditions. 40 c. Submit VOC Certification of compliance that water repellent materials 41 comply with regulations controlling the use of Volatile Organic 42 Compounds. 43 d. Submit the manufacturer’s executed warranty form with authorized 44 signatures at project closeout. 45 46 E. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS: 47 1. Deliver, store and handle all materials of this section in strict accordance with 48 the product manufacturer’s recommendations. 49 2. Store and protect water repellent materials from harmful weather conditions 50 as recommended by the product manufacturer. Do not allow the product to 51 freeze during shipment or storage. 52 53 F. PROJECT CONDITIONS 54 1. Environmental Requirements: In accordance with the manufacturers 55 recommendations, substrates and ambient air temperature shall be 40 degrees F.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 79 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 or greater and rising at installation time and remain above 40 degrees F. for at 2 least 12 hours after installation. Do not apply in snow, rain, fog or mist or when 3 such conditions are expected. Do not apply when relative humidity exceeds 85%, 4 or a temperatures less than 5 degrees F above the dew point. Allow surfaces to 5 attain temperature ranges and conditions recommended by manufacturer before 6 proceeding with water repellant system installation. 7 2. Follow the product manufacturer’s instructions with regard to safety, health, 8 and other related environmental precautions. 9 3. Comply with all applicable State, Federal and Local environmental and safety 10 regulations in place at the work site. 11 12 G. WARRANTY: Provide and submit the product manufacturer’s standard warranty on 13 all labor and materials of this section upon completion of the work. Comply with the 14 product manufacturer’s requirements for warranty issue during all phases of the work. 15 16 H. RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENTS 17 1. Documents affecting work of this section include but are not necessarily 18 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract 19 Drawings, and the Standard Form of Agreement. 20 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 21 information specifically related to work of this Section: 22 Section 04100: CMU Masonry 23 24 II. PRODUCTS 25 26 A. Products: Sealer shall be Water Based, single component blend, clear water repellent 27 system formulated for split face and smooth face veneer block as manufactured by 28 Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. of Jacksonville, FL, 32256-8208, Att.(ThoroDivision), 29 (904)828-4900, or approved equal. 30 31 B. Water Repellent System shall meet the following performance standards: 32 1. Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E96-90, with results of 47.5 grams/ft/24 33 hrs at 77 degrees F. (82% minimum as compared to untreated samples). 34 2. Percent reduction of leakage, ASTM E 514-86; with results of 94.8% 35 (minimum) brick walls. 36 3. Accelerated Weathering: (QUV), ASTM G-53; results 1500 hours- no loss of 37 repellency. 38 4. Percent Active Ingredients; no less than 12% 39 5. VOC content; less than 250 grams per liter 40 6. Density: 8.3+ / .1 lbs./gal. 41 7. Flash Point: AST< D 3276-82; results; greater and 212 degrees F. 42 8. Water Repellency Test: ASTM C 67-80, Method ; results 96% (minimum) 43 44 C. MIX: Mix in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 45 46 III. EXECUTION: 47 48 A. Comply with manufacturer’s most recent published product technical bulletins 49 including, installation instructions, substrate testing, surface preparation and cleaning 50 and post installation testing. 51 52 B. Examination: Verify substrata conditions are acceptable for water repellent system 53 installation in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 54 1. General: Determine acceptable removal techniques for contaminants harmful 55 to water repellent performance, such as dust and dirt, grease, oils, curing 56 compounds, form release agents, laitance, efflorescence, existing films and other

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 80 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 water repellent coatings. Remove, collect, sort and legally dispose of chemical 2 contaminants. 3 2. Stucco, Concrete or Masonry Units/CMU: Verify substrates have been 4 installed true in place and have cured to full load bearing capacity (28 days). 5 Identify contaminants, Remove and dispose of contaminated materials. Repair 6 Concrete imperfections. 7 3. Mortar Joints: Determine strength of mortar joints. Determine removal of 8 loose, soft, friable mortar. Replace damaged mortar and dry for at least 507 9 days prior to application of water repellent systems. 10 11 C. PREPARATION 12 1. Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces form damage during water 13 repellent system installation. 14 2. Prior to installation, clean substrates of substances that could impair 15 penetration or reaction of water-repellent system. Coordinate cleaning and 16 application to avoid contamination of newly treated surfaces. 17 3. Test and clean substrates in accordance with manufacturer’s printed 18 recommendations and the following National Standards. 19 a. ASTM D 5703, Practice for Preparatory Surface Cleaning for Clay Brick 20 Masonry 21 b. ADTM D 4261, Practice for Cleaning Concrete Unit Masonry for 22 Coating 23 c. ASTM D 4258, Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating 24 d. ASTM D 4262, Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned Concrete 25 e. ASTM D 4259, Practice for Abrading Concrete 26 5. Substrates shall be clean, dry, sound, and free of contaminants detrimental to 27 water repellent system performance. 28 a. High pressure water and/pr abrasive blasting to remove contaminants 29 will not be permitted with out the review and approval of the Architect. 30 b. Allow cleaned, damp or water soaked surfaces to become unsaturated 31 and totally dry before installation (3-5 days). 32 c. Efflorescence, mold, and mildew shall be treated neutralized and 33 removed prior to water repellent installation. 34 35 D. INSTALLATION/APPLICATION 36 1. Apply transparent water repellent system to properly prepared surfaces 37 indicted on the drawings. Apply water repellent within time restrictions after 38 mixing and surface preparation as recommended by the manufacturer. 39 2. Apply water repellent by low pressure spray techniques following 40 manufacturer’s recommended procedures. 41 3. Apply one component, water based products from the bottom up with total 42 saturation, providing a 6-8 inch run down. Apply water repellent materials as 43 demonstrated and approved at the mock up and not less than the manufacturer’s 44 minimum recommended coverage rate for surface/material to be treated. 45 4. Match approved samples for warrantable performance, appearance, and 46 coverage. Remove, re-apply or re-coat work not in compliance with contract 47 documents or manufacturer’s warranty requirements. 48 49 E. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 50 1. Provide manufacturer’s field service consisting of periodic site visits by the 51 manufacturer’s representative or designated distributor representative for 52 observation of water repellent installation. 53 2. The Owner reserves the right to complete recommended testing required by 54 the manufacturer at completion of work to assure warranty requirements and 55 contract compliance are met. Such testing shall be paid for by the Contractor.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 81 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2 3 F. CLEANING AND PROTECTION 4 1. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Remove 5 overspray coating from windows or areas not intended to be coated with hot 6 soap-water solution of water repellent manufacturer’s recommended cleaning 7 agent. 8 2. Remove construction debris from site resulting from work of this section.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 82 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 07190: MOISTURE BARRIERS 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work 6 1. The General Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and 7 equipment for a complete installation of moisture barriers as shown on the 8 drawings, specified herein and as necessary to complete the work of the 9 contract. 10 11 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 12 1. The materials of this section shall be installed in complete accordance with 13 the manufacturer's recommendations. 14 15 C. HANDLING: 16 1. Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturers' original unopened 17 packaging. 18 2. Protect all products from punctures, rips and other such damage. 19 20 D. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 21 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 22 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 23 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 24 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 25 information specifically related to work of this section: 26 Section 03100: Cast In Place Concrete 27 Section 07270: Fluid Applied Waterproof Air Barrier Membrane 28 29 II. PRODUCTS 30 31 A. MOISTURE BARRIER: 32 1. Moisture barriers shall be installed below all concrete slabs in contact with 33 ground. 34 2. Moisture barriers shall be 8 mil polyethylene sheeting. 35 36 III. PROCEDURES: 37 38 A. GENERAL: 39 1. All products of this section shall be installed in strict accordance with the 40 recommendations of the materials manufacturers. 41 2. Care shall be taken to ensure that all penetrations are patched tightly to 42 prevent infiltration. 43 44 45 46

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 83 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION 07212: BOARD INSULATION 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work 6 The General Contractor shall provide all labor and materials tools and equipment for a 7 complete installation of board type insulation as shown on the drawings, specified 8 herein and as necessary to complete the work of the contract. 9 10 B. QUALITY CONTROL: All work shall be performed by mechanics skilled in the 11 insulation trade. 12 13 C. HANDLING: Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturers' original unopened 14 packaging. Clearly identify the materials manufacturer, type, and R value. 15 1. Store materials in areas protected from the weather. 16 2. Protect from moisture and damage. Remove damaged materials from the 17 work site. 18 3. All materials shall be protected from the weather. All materials shall be free 19 of dampness, rot, mildew or the like. 20 21 D. RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENTS 22 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 23 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 24 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 25 Section 04100: CMU Masonry 26 27 II. PRODUCTS 28 29 A. FOUNDATION PERIMETER INSULATION 30 1. Board insulation shall be 2" thick extruded polystyrene board (R-10), as 31 manufactured by DOW Chemical Corporation or approved equal. 32 33 B. MASONRY CAVITY WALL INSULATION 34 1. Board insulation shall be 2-1/8” thick, Formular High-R CW Plus extruded 35 polystyrene (XPS) rigid foam insulation (R-12), as manufactured by Owening 36 Corning Foam Insulation, LLC or approved equal. 37 38 III. PROCEDURES: 39 40 A. GENERAL: 41 1. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the board insulation 42 manufacturer’s recommendations. 43

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 84 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 07213: FIBERGLASS BUILDING INSULATION 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for 7 a complete installation of thermal insulation in walls, and fire safing as shown 8 on the drawings, specified herein and as necessary to complete the work of the 9 contract to the complete satisfaction of the Owner. 10 11 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 12 1. All work shall be performed by mechanics skilled in the insulation trade. 13 14 C. HANDLING: 15 1. Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturers' original unopened 16 packaging. 17 2. Clearly identify the materials manufacturer, type, and R value. 18 3. All materials shall be stored in areas protected from the weather. 19 a. All materials shall be protected from the weather. 20 b. All materials shall be free of dampness, rot, mildew or the like. 21 4. Remove damaged materials from the work site. 22 23 D. REFERENCES: 24 • ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal 25 Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 26 • ASTM C 553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal 27 Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 28 • ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board 29 Thermal Insulation. 30 • ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of 31 Building Materials. 32 • ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of 33 Materials. 34 • ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building 35 Construction and Materials. 36 • ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical 37 Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C. 38 • ASTM E 814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through- 39 Penetration Fire Stops. 40 • Federal Specification HH-I-521F: Insulation Blankets, Thermal (Mineral 41 Fiber, For Ambient Temperatures). 42 • Federal Specification HH-I-558B: Insulation, Blocks, Blankets, Felts, 43 Sleeving (Pipe and Tube Covering), and Pipe fitting Covering, Thermal 44 (Mineral Fiber, Industrial Type) 45 • National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Life Safety Code 46 • Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL 2079 Standard test method for fire 47 resistance of Building Joint Systems. 48

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 85 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 E. SUBMITTALS: 2 1. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. 3 2. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, 4 including: 5 3. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 6 4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 7 Installation methods. 8 9 F. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 10 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with a minimum of ten years 11 experience manufacturing products in this section shall provide all products 12 listed. 13 Installer Qualifications: 14 2. Products listed in this section shall be installed by a single organization with 15 at least five years experience successfully installing insulation on projects of 16 similar type and scope as specified in this section. 17 18 G. DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING: 19 1. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging bearing 20 the brand name and manufacturer's identification until ready for installation. 21 2. Storage: Store materials in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from 22 water, and in such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling. 23 3. Handling: Handle materials to avoid damage. 24 25 H. PROJECT CONDITIONS: 26 1. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) 27 within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. 28 2. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside 29 manufacturer's absolute limits. 30 31 I. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 32 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 33 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 34 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 35 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 36 information specifically related to work of this section: 37 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 38 Section 09260: Gypsum Board Assemblies 39 Section 09500: Acoustical Tile & Ceiling Suspension System 40 41 II. PRODUCTS 42 43 A. MANUFACTURERS: 44 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: CertainTeed Corp., Insulation Group, which is 45 located at: 750 E. Swedesford Rd. P. O. Box 860 ; Valley Forge, PA 19482-0860; 46 Toll Free Tel: 800-233-8990; Fax: 610-341-7940; Email: request info; Web: 47 certainteed.com/CertainTeed/Pro/Design+Professional/Insulation 48 2. Substitutions: Approved equals. 49 a. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 86 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 provisions of Section 01600. 2 3 B. APPLICATIONS: 4 1. Exterior Stud Walls: Batt type. 5 Thickness: 6” 6 R-Value: R-19 7 8 C. BATT & ROLL INSULATION: 9 1. Thermal Batt Insulation: Certainteed Fiber Glass Building Insulation. Fiber 10 glass building insulation for walls, ceilings, attics and floors. 11 2. Complies with ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt insulation: 12 3. Facing: ASTM C 665, Type I, Unfaced. 13 a. Fire Hazard Classification: ASTM E 84: 14 1) Maximum Flame Spread Index; 25. 15 2) Maximum Smoke Developed Index; 50. 16 b. Wood Stud Size: 3-1/2” 17 c. Thermal Resistance: R -13 (RSI 3.35). 18 1) Thickness: 3-1/2” inches (159 mm). 19 2) Width: 16 inches (406 mm). 20 21 D. SOUND ATTENUATION FIRE BLANKET INSULATION: 22 1. Sound Attenuation Fire Blanket Insulation, Certainteed Thermofiber Sound 23 Attenuation Fire Blankets. Complies with ASTM C 665, Type 1, ASTM C 553 and 24 ASTM C 612, Type 1 mineral fiber thermal insulation manufactured from slag, a 25 by-product of iron ore reduction, and naturally occurring rock. 26 2. Fire Hazard Classification: ASTM E 84: 27 a. Maximum Flame Spread Index; 15. 28 b. Maximum Smoke Developed Index; 0. 29 3. Noncombustibility: ASTM E 136, passes. 30 4. Wood Stud Size: 3-1/2” 31 5. Thermal Resistance: R per 1 inch of thickness 3.7. 32 a. Density: 2.5 pcf nominal. 33 b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches (25.5 mm). 34 c. Thickness: 4 inches (102 mm). 35 d. Thickness: 6 inches (1524 mm). 36 e. Width: 16 inches (406 mm). 37 38 E. SAFING INSULATION: 39 1. Safing Insulation, Certainteed Thermofiber Safing Insulation. Complies with 40 ASTM C 665, Types I and III, ASTM C 612, Type IA, IB and II and ASTM C 553 and 41 mineral fiber thermal insulation. 42 2. Type: Unfaced. 43 a. Fire Hazard Classification: ASTM E 84: 44 1) Maximum Flame Spread Index; 15. 45 2) Maximum Smoke Developed Index; 0. 46 b. Noncombustibility: ASTM E 136, passes. 47 c. Density: 4.0 pcf nominal. 48 1) Thickness: 4 inches (102 mm). 49 2) Thermal Resistance: R per 1 inch of thickness 4.0.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 87 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2 III. EXECUTION 3 4 A. EXAMINATION: 5 1. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. 6 2. Verify that all exterior and interior wall, partition, and floor/ceiling assembly 7 construction has been completed to the point where the insulation may correctly be 8 installed. 9 3. Verify that mechanical and electrical services in ceilings, walls and floors have 10 been installed and tested and, if appropriate, verify that adjacent materials are dry 11 and ready to receive insulation. 12 4. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect 13 of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 14 15 B. PREPARATION: 16 1. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 17 2. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for 18 achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 19 20 C. INSTALLATION: 21 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 22 2. Install in exterior spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. 23 3. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. 24 4. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and 25 electrical services within plane of insulation. 26 5. Install insulation with vapor barrier installed facing the warm side. Seal or tape 27 joints as required. 28 29 D. PROTECTION: 30 1. Protect installed products until completion of project. 31 2. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 88 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 07270: FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOF AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work 6 1. Supply labor, materials and equipment to provide fluid applied waterproof air 7 barrier membrane over vertical above grade concrete masonry wallsas shown on 8 the Drawings and as specified herein. 9 10 B. DEFINITIONS: 11 1. Air Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to 12 the movement of air. 13 2. Air Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that 14 provides continuity. 15 3. Air Barrier Auxiliary Material: A transitional component that provides air 16 barrier continuity furnished by a source other than the primary air barrier 17 manufacturer. 18 4. Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials, accessory and 19 auxiliary materials applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to 20 abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall 21 22 C. REFERENCES: 23 1. Building Code and Material Evaluation Service Standards 24 • ICC ES AC 212 – March 1, 2005, ICC Acceptance Criteria for Water- 25 Resistive Coatings Used as Water-Resistive Barriers over Exterior 26 Sheathing 27 • May, 1997, CCMC (Canadian Construction Materials Centre) Technical 28 Guide for Air Barrier Material 29 • 2009 IBC, International Building Code 30 • 2009 IECC, International Energy Conservation Code 31 2. ASTM Standards: 32 • C 297-94, Test Method for Tensile Strength of Flat Sandwich 33 Constructions in 34 Flatwise Plane 35 • C 1177 Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum for Use as Sheathing 36 • D 522-93a, Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic 37 Coatings 38 • D 1970-00, Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified 39 Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice 40 Dam Protection 41 • D 3273-00, Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface 42 of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber 43 • D 4541-09, Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable 44 Adhesion Testers 45 • E 84-98, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building 46 Materials 47 • E 96-00, Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 48 • E 119-98, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 89 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 and Materials 2 • E 779-10, Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan 3 Pressurization 4 • E 783-02, Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage 5 Through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors 6 • E 1186-03 (2009), Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in 7 Building Envelopes and Air Barrier Systems 8 • 13. E 1827-96 (2007), Standard Test Methods for Determining 9 Airtightness of Buildings Using an Orifice Blower Door 10 • E 2178-03, Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 11 • E 2357-05, Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air 12 Barrier Assemblies 13 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards 14 • NFPA 285, Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation 15 Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing 16 Combustible Components 17 4. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) 18 • Rule 1113 (2007) – Architectural Coatings 19 20 D. SUBMITTALS: 21 1. Manufacturer's specifications, details, and product data. 22 2. Manufacturer’s ICC evaluation report confirming compliance with the IBC, IRC, 23 and IECC as an air barrier and water-resistive barrier. 24 3. Manufacturer's standard warranty. 25 4. Applicator's certificate of instruction. 26 5. Samples for approval as directed by architect or owner. 27 6. Shop drawings: substrate joints, cracks, flashing transitions, penetrations, 28 corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction, interfaces with 29 separate materials that form part of the air barrier assembly. 30 31 E. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 32 1. Manufacturer requirements 33 a. Manufacturer of exterior wall waterproof air barrier materials for a 34 minimum of 30 years in North America 35 b. ISO 9001:2008 Certified Quality System and ISO 14001:2004 Certified 36 Environmental Management System 37 2. Contractor requirements 38 a. Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of Sto materials, 39 b. Employ skilled mechanics who are experienced and knowledgeable in 40 waterproofing and air barrier application, and familiar with the 41 requirements of the specified work. 42 c. Provide the proper equipment, manpower and supervision on the job- 43 site to install the air barrier assembly in compliance with the project 44 plans & specifications, shop drawings, and Sto’s published specifications 45 and details. 46 3. Regulatory Compliance 47 a. Primary air barrier and joint treatment reinforcement materials: 48 1) Listed by IBC and recognized for use on all types of 49 construction.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 90 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2) Listed by CCMC and recognized for use on all types of 2 construction. 3 3) Comply with VOC requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1113. 4 4) Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 – 2010 5 5) Comply with ASHRAE 189.1 - 2009 6 4. Mock-ups 7 a. Build stand-alone site mock up or sample wall area on as-built 8 construction to incorporate back-up wall construction, typical details 9 covering substrate joints, cracks, flashing transitions, penetrations, 10 corners, terminations, tie-ins with adjoining construction, and interfaces 11 with separate materials that form part of the air barrier assembly. 12 13 F. PRE-CONSTRUCTION TESTING: 14 1. Conduct testing by qualified test agency or building envelope consultant 15 a. Conduct assembly air leakage testing in accordance with ASTM E 783. 16 b. Conduct adhesion testing to substrates in accordance with ASTM D- 17 4541. 18 c. Conduct wet sealant compatibility testing in accordance with sealant 19 manufacturer’s field quality control test procedure. 20 d. Notify design professional minimum 7 days prior to testing. 21 22 G. DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: 23 1. Deliver all materials in their original sealed containers bearing manufacturer's 24 name and identification of product. 25 2. Protect coatings (pail products) from freezing and temperatures in excess of 26 90F (32 C). Store away from direct sunlight. 27 3. Protect Portland cement based materials (bag products) from moisture and 28 humidity. Store under cover off the ground in a dry location. 29 4. Protect and store accessory and auxiliary products in accordance with 30 manufacturer’s written instructions. 31 32 H. PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS: 33 1. Maintain ambient and surface temperatures above 40F (4C) during 34 application and drying period, minimum 24 hours after application of 35 Air/Moisture barrier and EIFS. 36 2. Provide supplementary heat for installation in temperatures less than 40F 37 (4C). 38 3. Provide protection of surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from 39 application of materials. 40 41 I. PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS: 42 1. Maintain ambient and surface temperatures above 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) 43 during application and drying period, minimum 24 hours after application of 44 waterproof air barrier materials. 45 2. Provide supplementary heat for installation in temperatures less than 40 46 degrees F (4 degrees C) or if surface temperature is likely to fall below 40 47 degrees F (4 degrees C). 48 3. Provide protection of surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from 49 application of materials.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 91 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 K. WARRANTY: 2 1. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty. 3 4 L. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 5 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 6 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 7 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 8 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 9 information specifically related to work of this section: 10 Section 04100: CMU Masonry 11 12 II. PRODUCTS 13 14 A. MANUFACTURERS 15 1. Provide Air/Moisture Barrier and accessories from single source manufacturer 16 or approved supplier. 17 2. The following are acceptable manufacturers: 18 a. Sto Corporation. 19 20 B. MATERIALS 21 1. Primary Air Barrier Material: StoGuard with Sto Gold Coat - ready-mixed 22 flexible spray or roller applied waterproof air barrier membrane material 23 2. Accessory Materials 24 a. Joint and Rough Opening Treatments 25 1) Sto Gold Fill® with StoGuard Mesh: ready mixed flexible trowel 26 or spray applied air barrier material. 27 2) StoGuard® Rapid Seal™ with StoGuard Mesh: moisture cure 28 elastomeric waterproof air barrier material (mesh not required at 29 rough openings). 30 3) Sto Gold Coat with StoGuard Fabric: flexible waterproof air 31 barrier membrane material 32 4) StoGuard Tape: self adhering rubberized asphalt tape with 33 polyester fabric facing (for rough openings only). 34 b. Joint Reinforcements 35 1) StoGuard Mesh: nominal 4.2 oz/yd2 (142 g/m2) self-adhesive, 36 flexible, symmetrical, interlaced glass fiber reinforcing mesh, with 37 alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials. 38 2) StoGuard Fabric: non-woven integrally reinforced cloth 39 reinforcement. 40 3) StoGuard RediCornerTM: non-woven integrally reinforced pre- 41 formed cloth. 42 c. Transition Membranes 43 1) Sto Gold Fill with StoGuard Mesh: ready mixed flexible trowel 44 or spray applied air barrier material with treated glass fiber 45 reinforcing mesh. 46 2) StoGuard RapidSeal or StoGuard RapidSeal with StoGuard Mesh: 47 moisture cure elastomeric waterproof air barrier material with 48 treated glass fiber reinforcing mesh (where applicable). 49 3) Sto Gold Coat with StoGuard Fabric: flexible waterproof air 50 barrier membrane material with non-woven integrally reinforced

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 92 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 cloth. 2 4) StoGuard Tape: self adhering rubberized asphalt tape with 3 polyester fabric facing. 4 d. Primers 5 1) StoGuard Primer: rubber resin emulsion primer for use with 6 StoGuard Tape to enhance adhesion and allow installation down to 7 35 degrees F (1.7 degrees C). 8 3. Auxiliary Materials (by others) 9 a. Wet sealant: Dow Corning 758, 790, 791, and 795 sealants 10 b. Pre-cured sealant tape: Dow 123 11 c. Spray adhesive: 3M Super 77 Spray Adhesive 12 d. Spray foam: Dow Great Stuff for Gaps and Cracks 13 4. Patching and Leveling Material for Concrete and Masonry 14 a. Sto Leveler: polymer modified cementitious patch and leveling 15 material for prepared concrete and masonry surfaces up to 3/8 inch (10 16 mm). 17 b. Sto BTS Xtra: polymer modified lightweight cementitious patch and 18 leveling material for prepared concrete and masonry surfaces up to 1/8 19 inch (3 mm). 20 21 C. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 22 1. Durability, resistance to aging, water and water penetration resistance, 23 structural loading: joint treatment and primary air barrier material, comply with 24 ICC ES AC 212 25 2. Flexibility: ASTM D 522, primary air barrier material, no cracking or 26 delamination before and after aging using 1/8 inch (3 mm) mandrel at 14º F (10º 27 C) 28 3. Nail sealability: ASTM D 1970, 7.9.1, primary air barrier passes 29 4. Material air leakage: ASTM D 2178, primary air barrier and joint treatment < 30 0.004 cfm/ft2 at 1.57 psf (0.02 L/s·m2 at 75 Pa) 31 6. Resistance to mold: ASTM D 3273, no mold growth after 28 day exposure 32 7. Adhesion: joint treatment and primary air barrier material, ASTM C 297 or D 33 4541, > 30 psi (207 kPa), or exceeds strength of glass mat facing on glass mat 34 gypsum substrates 35 8. Surface burning: ASTM E 84, joint treatment and primary air barrier material 36 flame spread < 25, smoke developed < 450, Class A building material 37 9. Water vapor permeance: ASTM E 96 Method B, > 1 perm (57 ng/Pa∙s∙m2) 38 10. Fire resistance: ASTM E 119, meets requirements for a 1-hour fire-resistive 39 rating when tested with up to 4 inches (102 mm) of continuous foam plastic 40 insulation in a non-load-bearing steel frame wall assembly 41 11. Fire propagation: NFPA 285, meets requirements for use on all Types of 42 construction with up to 12 inches (305 mm) of continuous EPS foam plastic 43 insulation without height restriction 44 12. Assembly air leakage: ASTM E 2357, < 0.04 cfm/ft2 (0.2 L/s·m2) air leakage 45 after conditioning protocol 46 13. Field adhesion testing: ASTM D 4541, > 30 psi (207 kPA) or exceeds 47 strength of glass mat facing on glass mat gypsum substrates 48 14. Building envelope air leakage: ASTM E 779 or 1827, < 0.4 cfm/ft2 (2 49 L/s·m2)

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 93 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 15. Volatile Organic Compounds: SCAQMD Rule 1113, joint treatment and 2 primary air barrier material < 100 g/L 3 16. Water-resistive barrier: ICC ES 212, joint treatment and primary air barrier 4 comply and are listed in a valid ICC ESR. 5 6 D. DESIGN CRITERIA 7 1. Structural (Wind and Axial Loads) 8 a. Design for maximum allowable deflection normal to the plane of the 9 wall: L/240. 10 b. Design for wind load in conformance with code requirements. 11 2. Moisture Control 12 a. Prevent the accumulation of water in the wall assembly and behind the 13 exterior wall cladding: 14 1) Minimize condensation within the assembly. 15 2) Drain water directly to the exterior where it is likely to 16 penetrate components in the wall assembly (windows and doors, 17 for example). 18 3) Provide corrosion resistant flashing to direct water to the 19 exterior in accordance with code requirements, including: above 20 window and door heads, beneath window and door sills, at 21 roof/wall intersections, floor lines, decks, intersections of lower 22 walls with higher walls, and at the base of the wall. 23 3. Air Barrier Continuity: provide continuous air barrier assembly of compatible 24 air barrier components. 25 4. Substrates 26 a. Concrete Masonry Units: provide normal weight units with flush joints 27 (struck flush with the surface) and allow for a minimum of 2 coats of the 28 primary air barrier material, or a cementitious parge coat to fill and level 29 irregular surfaces and 1 coat of the primary air barrier material, prior to 30 the air barrier application, such that a void and pinhole free air barrier 31 surface is achieved. 32 5. Mechanical Ventilation: maintain pressurization and indoor humidity levels in 33 accordance with recommendations of ASHRAE (see 2005 ASHRAE Handbook— 34 Fundamentals). 35 36 37 III. EXECUTION 38 39 A. EXAMINATION 40 1. Inspect concrete and concrete masonry surfaces for: 41 a. Contamination — algae, dirt, dust, efflorescence, form oil, fungus, 42 grease, mildew or other foreign substances. 43 b. Surface deficiencies – weak, friable, chalkiness, laitance, bugholes, and 44 spalls. 45 c. Cracks — measure crack width and record location of cracks. 46 d. Damage or deterioration. 47 e. Moisture content and moisture damage — use a moisture meter to 48 determine if the surface is dry enough to receive the waterproof air 49 barrier and record any areas of moisture damage or excess moisture.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 94 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 f. Flush masonry mortar joints completely filled with mortar. 2 2. Inspect sheathing application for compliance with applicable requirement: 3 a. Exterior Grade and Exposure I wood based sheathing: E30U-2007, 4 Engineered Wood Construction Guide, and the requirements of the 5 applicable building code. 6 b. Glass mat faced gypsum sheathing in compliance with ASTM C 1177: 7 consult manufacturer’s published recommendations and ICC ES Report. 8 Conform with 9 project requirements for wind load resistance. 10 c. Cementitious sheathing — Consult manufacturer’s published 11 recommendations and ICC ES Report. Conform with project requirements 12 for wind load resistance. 13 3. Report deviations from the requirements of project specifications or other 14 conditions that might adversely affect the waterproof air barrier installation. Do 15 not start work until deviations are corrected. 16 17 B. SURFACE PREPARATION 18 1. Concrete Masonry 19 a. Remove surface contamination and weak surface conditions. Use 20 chemical cleaners such as TSP (trisodium phosphate) detergent to remove 21 oil and grease and rinse with potable water. Use chemical cleaners to 22 remove efflorescence or other surface contamination in accordance with 23 manufacturer’s written instructions. Use mechanical methods such as 24 waterblasting, sandblasting, and wire brushing to remove weak surface 25 conditions. 26 b. Repair cracks up to 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide by raking with a sharp tool 27 to remove loose, friable material and blow clean with oil-free compressed 28 air. Apply joint treatment material over crack, embed reinforcement 29 (where applicable), and smooth joint treatment material with a trowel, 30 drywall or putty knife to cover the reinforcement. 31 c. Remove projecting fins, ridges, and mortar by mechanical means. 32 Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, lintels and shelf angles. 33 d. Fill honeycombs, aggregate pockets, holes and other voids with 34 patching material. 35 2. Sheathing 36 a. Remove and replace damaged sheathing. 37 b. Spot surface defects such as over-driven fasteners, knot holes, or 38 other voids in sheathing with knife grade joint treatment material. 39 c. Spot fasteners with knife grade or coating joint treatment material. 40 41 C. INSTALLATION 42 1. Coordinate work with other trades to ensure air barrier continuity with 43 connections at foundation, floor lines, flashings, lintels and shelf angles, 44 openings and penetrations such as pipes, vents, windows and doors, masonry 45 anchors, rafters or beams, joints in construction, projections such as decks and 46 balconies, and roof line. 47 2. Rough opening protection: 48 a. Install transition membrane into and around rough opening. Refer to 49 Sto details 20.03a-e and applicable Sto product bulletins.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 95 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 3. Sheathing joints 2 a. Install joint treatment material with applicable reinforcement over 3 sheathing joints. Refer to Sto detail 20.00a and applicable Sto product 4 bulletins. 5 4. Transitions 6 a. Install air barrier accessory materials (with reinforcement where 7 applicable), or auxiliary material at transition areas: foundation, floor 8 lines, flashings, lintels and shelf angles, openings and penetrations such 9 as pipes, vents, windows and doors, masonry anchors, rafters or beams, 10 joints in construction, projections such as decks and balconies, and roof 11 line. Refer to Sto Tech Hotline No. 0211-BSc and applicable Sto product 12 bulletins. 13 5. Waterproof air barrier membrane 14 a. Concrete – install one coat of Sto Gold Coat by spray or roller in a 15 uniform, continuous film of 10 wet mils to the prepared concrete 16 substrate. Do not install over working or moving joint sealants. 17 b. Concrete Masonry - install one liberal coat of Sto Gold Coat by spray 18 or roller in a uniform, continuous film to the prepared concrete masonry 19 substrate. Backroll spray applications. Allow to dry. Install a second 20 liberal coat in a uniform, continuous film, and backroll spray applications, 21 to achieve a void and pinhole free surface. Depending on the condition of 22 the surface a minimum of 10 wet mils up to a maximum of 30 wet mils 23 per coat is required. Apply additional coats if needed to achieve a void 24 and pinhole free surface. Do not install over working or moving joint 25 sealants. 26 1) Important Note: The number of coats and thickness is highly 27 dependent on CMU composition, unit weight (lightweight or 28 normal weight), porosity, joint profile, and other variables that 29 may exist. For “rough” CMU wall surfaces skim coat the entire wall 30 surface with the leveling material to fill and level the surface prior 31 to applying the waterproof air barrier membrane and transition 32 materials. When a skim coat of the leveling material is installed 33 only one coat of the waterproof air barrier membrane is typically 34 required. Use the mock-up and site tests as the basis for the 35 work. 36 6. Sheathing 37 a. Glass mat faced gypsum sheathing: install one coat of Sto Gold Coat 38 by spray or roller in a uniform, continuous film of 10 wet mils to the 39 prepared glass mat gypsum substrate to achieve a void and pinhole free 40 surface. Do not install over working or moving joint sealants. 41 42 D. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 43 1. Owner’s qualified testing agency or building envelope consultant shall 44 perform inspections and tests. 45 2. Inspections: air barrier materials are subject to inspection to verify 46 compliance with requirements. 47 a. Condition of substrates and substrate preparation. 48 b. Installation of primary air barrier material, accessory materials, and 49 compatible auxiliary materials over structurally sound substrates and in

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 96 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 conformance with architectural design details, contractor’s shop 2 drawings, project mock-up, and manufacturer’s written installation 3 instructions. 4 c. Air barrier continuity and connections without gaps and holes at 5 foundation, floor lines, flashings, lintels and shelf angles, openings and 6 penetrations such as pipes, vents, windows and doors, masonry anchors, 7 rafters or beams, joints in construction, projections such as decks and 8 balconies, and roof line. 9 3. Tests: air barrier materials and assembly are subject to tests to verify 10 compliance with performance requirements: 11 a. Qualitative air leakage test: ASTM E 1186 12 b. Quantitative air leakage test: ASTM E 779, E 783, and E 1827 13 c. Adhesion test: ASTM D 4541 14 d. Qualitative adhesion and compatibility testing: wet sealant 15 manufacturer’s field quality control adhesion test 16 4. Repair non-conforming substrates and air barrier material installation to 17 conform with project requirements. 18 5. Take corrective action to repair and replace, reinstall, seal openings, gaps, or 19 other 20 sources of air leakage to conform with project performance requirements. 21 22 E. PROTECTION AND CLEANING 23 1. Protect air barrier materials from damage during construction caused by 24 wind, rain, freezing, continuous high humidity, or prolonged exposure to sun 25 light. 26 2. Protect air barrier materials from damage from trades, vandals, and water 27 infiltration during construction. 28 3. Repair damaged materials to meet project specification requirements. 29 4. Clean spills, stains, soiling from finishes or other construction materials that 30 will be exposed 31 in the completed work with compatible cleaners. 32 5. Remove all masking materials after work is completed. 33 34 35

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 97 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 07411: PREFORMED METAL WALL PANELS 2 3 I. GENERAL: 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work. The General Contractor shall provide all labor and 6 materials tools and equipment for a complete installation of preformed metal wall panel 7 systems as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 8 9 B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: All work shall be performed by mechanics skilled in the 10 installation of preformed metal roof and wall panel systems. 11 12 C. SHOP DRAWINGS & SAMPLES: The General Contractor shall submit shop drawings for 13 all installation procedures of the metal roofing. Shop drawings shall illustrate pan size, 14 seaming methods, eave and side wall details, and all flashing conditions. No work shall 15 be performed until drawings have reviewed and approved by the Architect. 16 17 D. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Do not deliver materials to the project site 18 until suitable facilities for storage and protection are available. Protect materials 19 from damage during transit and at the project site. Store under cover (sloped to 20 provide positive drainage). Do not expose materials with strippable protective film to 21 direct sunlight or extreme heat. Do not allow storage of other materials or allow 22 staging of other work on installed metal panel roof systems 23 24 E. FIELD MEASUREMENTS shall be taken by the installer, for verification of dimensional 25 correctness in relationship to original plans, prior to providing manufacturer with a bill 26 of material 27 28 F. WARRANTY: 29 1. Submit manufacturer’s standard 20 year finish warranty for color retention, 30 adhesion, and freedom from chalking. 31 2. Submit 2 year weather-tightness and workmanship warranty from installer. 32 33 G. RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENTS 34 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 35 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 36 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 37 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 38 information specifically related to work of this section: 39 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 40 Section 07900: Sealants and Caulking 41 42 II. PRODUCTS 43 44 A. WALL PANEL: Shall be CORRO-LOK PANEL, Horizontal Corrugated Rib w/ Wind-Lok 45 interlock concealed fastening system as manufactured by ATAS INTERNATIONAL, INC. 46 6612 Snowdrift Road, Allentown, PA (610-395-8445) or approved equal. 47 1. Aluminum Sheet: shall conform to ASTM B 209 48 2. Wall Panels shall be rolled formed 7/8” rib panel of .032 aluminum, 16-5/8” 49 wide panels, with a concealed fastening system. 50 3. Panel lengths shall be cut to customer specifications. 51 4. Finish shall be fluoropolymer coating, provide multi-coat PVF2 KYNAR 500 52 finish system on exposed metal surfaces (w/ 20 year limited warranty) finish,

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 98 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 smooth texture, color selected by Owner from manufacturer’s standard colors 2 3 C. ACCESSORIES: 4 1. Provide formed accessories of the same gauge and finish as the primary panel 5 system, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 6 2. Fasteners: provide corrosion resistant fasteners as required for the project 7 conditions and panel type. 8 9 D. SEALANTS: shall be clear silicone, GE 50 year or approved equal. 10 11 III. FABRICATION 12 13 A. PANELS: 14 1. Factory fabrication in a controlled environment. 15 2. Panels to be tension leveled during roll-forming process. 16 3. Panels to be produced in longest lengths possible, except when modular 17 units are utilized. 18 19 B. ACCESSORIES: Factory fabricate trim and flashing components in standard 12 foot 20 lengths. 21 22 C. MISCELLANEOUS: 23 1. Form all components true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from 24 distortion or defects. 25 2. Cut panels to precise lengths indicated on approved shop drawings or as 26 required by field conditions 27 28 IV. EXECUTION 29 30 A. EXAMINATION: 31 1. Installer shall examine all substrates on which panel system will be applied, 32 and notify Architect if surfaces are not suitable. 33 2. Installer must field verify all necessary dimensions prior to fabrication of 34 materials. 35 36 B. INSTALLATION:: 37 1. Install metal panels and accessories in strict accordance with the 38 manufacturers instructions. 39 2. Protect surfaces from contact with cementitious materials, and other 40 dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or other coatings. 41 3. Fasten panels to structural support with fasteners provided or approved by 42 the panel manufacturer. 43 4. Install panels plumb, level, and true to line. 44 5. Installation is achieved by interlocking the panel into the preceding panel and 45 fastening with mechanical fasteners. 46 6. The fasteners will be concealed by the rib of the adjoining panel. 47 7. Install roof panels with no transverse seams. 48 8. Remove protective masking from panels immediately after each panel is 49 installed. 50 9. Do not allow shavings, metal dust or chips to fall on panels. 51 10. Care should be taken during handling of panels to prevent bending, twisting,

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 99 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 abrasion, scratching, denting, etc. 2 11. Workmanship to comply with standards established by the Architectural 3 Sheet Metal Community. 4 5 C. ADJUSTING & CLEANING: 6 1. Touch-up minor abrasions with matching paint provided by panel 7 manufacturer. Remove and replace panels that cannot be satisfactorily touch-up 8 (see Metal Construction Association Technical Bulletin #95-1051. 9 2. Sweep and remove chips, shavings and dust from roof on a daily basis 10 during the installation period. Leave installed work clean, free from grease, 11 finger marks and stains. 12 3. Remove protective masking from materials immediately after installation of 13 product. 14 4. Upon completion of the installation, remove scraps and debris from project 15 site. 16 17 D. PRODUCTION: 18 1. Provide protection as required to assure that completed work of this section 19 will be without damage or deterioration at date of substantial completion. 20 2. Safety clothing, equipment and precautions must be utilized according to 21 safety standards.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 100 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 07530: FULLY ADHERED ROOFING & INSULATION SYSTEM 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of Work: 6 1. The project consists of installing Carlisle's Sure-Seal (black) Design “A” Fully 7 Adhered Roofing System over the existing dead level roof area and tie in of the 8 new roofing to existing flat roof areas as shown on the drawings and as outlined 9 below. 10 a. The existing dead level roof system is a combination of mechanically 11 fastened & fully adhered Firestone EPDM. This specification is written 12 about a Carlisle fully adhered system but other equal system may be 13 submitted for the review of the Owner. Membrane system shall include 14 polyisocyanurate board roof insulation over the both the existing metal or 15 wood roof deck, and the new addition wood deck. 16 b. Portions of the existing dead level roof shall be pitched to existing 17 roof drains, or adjoining sloped roofs, shall receive tapered insulation to 18 facilitate drainage of the roof as specified herein and as indicated on the 19 drawings. 20 2. Work shall also include removal of selected existing roof curbs and edge nailers 21 and installation of new nailers, curbs, copings, gravel stops and miscellaneous 22 flashing as required to coordinate and properly tie the existing roof system into 23 the new materials and as further required at all roof penetrations and roof top 24 equipment. 25 26 B. EXTENT OF WORK: 27 1. Provide all labor, material, tools, equipment, and supervision as necessary to 28 properly complete the installation of the new EPDM roofing and insulation and tie 29 in the new materials with the existing. New membrane Sure-Seal .060” thick 30 reinforced EPDM Membrane Fully-Adhered Roofing System or approved equal 31 system including flashings and insulation as specified herein and as indicated on 32 the drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's most current specifications 33 and details. 34 2. The roofing contractor shall be fully knowledgeable of all requirements of the 35 contract documents and shall make themselves aware of all job site conditions 36 that will affect their work. 37 3. The roofing contractor shall confirm all given information and advise the 38 building owner, prior to bid, of any conflicts that will affect their cost proposal. 39 4. Any contractor who intends to submit a bid using a roofing system other than 40 the approved manufacturer must submit for pre-qualification in writing fourteen 41 (14) days prior to the bid date. Any contractor who fails to submit all information 42 as requested will be subject to rejection. Bids stating "as per plans and specs" will 43 be unacceptable. 44 45 C. SUBMITTALS: 46 1. Prior to starting work, the roofing contractor must submit the following: 47 a. Shop drawings showing layout, details of construction and identification 48 of materials. 49 b. Sample of the manufacturer's Membrane System Warranty.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 101 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 c. Submit a letter of certification from the manufacturer, which certifies 2 the roofing contractor is authorized to install the manufacturer's roofing 3 system and lists foremen who have received training from the 4 manufacturer along with the dates training was received. 5 d. Certification from the membrane manufacturer indicating the 6 membrane thickness over the reinforcing scrim (top ply membrane 7 thickness) is nominal .015” (15 mil). 8 e. Certification of the manufacturer's warranty reserve. 9 f. Submit manufacturers’ specification sheets for roof copings, roof drip 10 edges, and curbs. 11 2. Upon completion of the installed work, submit copies of the roofing system 12 manufacturer's final inspection to the Architect prior to the issuance of the 13 manufacturer's warranty. 14 15 D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: 16 1. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened 17 containers or wrappings with the manufacturer's name, brand name and 18 installation instructions intact and legible. 19 2. Deliver in sufficient quantity to permit work to continue without interruption. 20 3. Comply with the manufacturer's written instructions for proper material 21 storage. 22 a. Store Sure-Weld membrane in the original undisturbed plastic wrap in 23 a cool, shaded area. Sure-Weld membrane that has been exposed to the 24 elements for approximately 7 days must be prepared with Sure-Seal 25 Weathered Membrane Cleaner prior to hot air welding. 26 b. Store curable materials (adhesives and sealants) between 60˚F and 27 80˚F in dry areas protected from water and direct sunlight. If exposed to 28 lower temperature, restore to 60˚F minimum temperature before using. 29 c. Store materials containing solvents in dry, well ventilated spaces with 30 proper fire and safety precautions. Keep lids on tight. Use before 31 expiration of their shelf life. 32 4. Insulation must be on pallets, off the ground and tightly covered with 33 waterproof materials. 34 5. Any materials which are found to be damaged shall be removed and replaced at 35 the applicator's expense. 36 37 F. WORK SEQUENCE: 38 1. Schedule and execute work to prevent leaks and excessive traffic on 39 completed roof sections. Care should be exercised to provide protection for the 40 interior of the building and to ensure water does not flow beneath any 41 completed sections of the membrane system. 42 2. Do not disrupt activities in occupied spaces. 43 44 G. USE OF THE PREMISES: 45 1. Before beginning work, the roofing contractor must secure approval from the 46 building owner's representative for the following: 47 a. Areas permitted for personnel parking. 48 b. Access to the site. 49 c. Areas permitted for storage of materials and debris.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 102 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 d. Areas permitted for the location of cranes, hoists and chutes for 2 loading and unloading materials to and from the roof. 3 4 H. EXISTING CONDITIONS: 5 1. If discrepancies are discovered between the existing conditions and those 6 noted on the drawings, immediately notify the owner's representative by phone 7 and solicit the manufacturer's approval prior to commencing with the work. 8 Necessary steps shall be taken to make the building watertight until the 9 discrepancies are resolved. 10 11 I. TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS: 12 1. Temporary Utilities: 13 a. Water, power for construction purposes and lighting are available at 14 the site and will be made available to the roofing contractor. 15 b. Provide all hoses, valves and connections for water from a source 16 designated by the owner when made available. 17 c. When available, electrical power should be extended as required from 18 the source. Provide all trailers, connections and fused disconnects. 19 2. Temporary, Sanitary Facilities: 20 Sanitary facilities will not be available at the job site. The roofing 21 contractor shall be responsible for the provision and maintenance of 22 portable toilets or their equal. 23 3. Building Site: 24 a. The roofing contractor shall use reasonable care and responsibility to 25 protect the building and site against damages. The contractor shall be 26 responsible for the correction of any damage incurred as a result of the 27 performance of the contract. 28 b. The roofing contractor shall remove all debris from the job site in a 29 timely and legally acceptable manner so as to not detract from the 30 aesthetics or the functions of the building. 31 3. Security: 32 Obey the owner's requirements for personnel identification, inspection 33 and other security measures. 34 35 J. JOB SITE PROTECTION: 36 1. The roofing contractor shall adequately protect building, paved areas, service 37 drives, lawn, shrubs, trees, etc. from damage while performing the required 38 work. Provide canvas, boards and sheet metal (properly secured) as necessary 39 for protection and remove protection material at completion. The contractor 40 shall repair or be responsible for costs to repair all property damaged during the 41 roofing application. 42 2. During the roofing contractor's performance of the work, the building owner 43 will continue to occupy the existing building. The contractor shall take 44 precautions to prevent the spread of dust and debris, particularly where such 45 material may sift into the building. The roofing contractor shall provide labor 46 and materials to construct, maintain and remove necessary, temporary 47 enclosures to prevent dust or debris in the construction area(s) from entering the 48 remainder of the building. 49 3. Do not overload any portion of the building, by either use of or placement of

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 103 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 equipment, storage of debris, or storage of materials. 2 4. Protect against fire and flame spread. Maintain proper and adequate fire 3 extinguishers. 4 5. Take precautions to prevent drains from clogging during the roofing 5 application. Remove debris at the completion of each day's work and clean 6 drains, if required. At completion, test drains to ensure the system is free 7 running and drains are watertight. Remove strainers and plug drains in areas 8 where work is in progress. Install flags or other telltales on plugs. Remove 9 plugs each night and screen drain. 10 6. Store moisture susceptible materials above ground and protect with 11 waterproof coverings. 12 7. Remove all traces of piled bulk material and return the job site to its original 13 condition upon completion of the work. 14 15 K. SAFETY: 16 1. The roofing contractor shall be responsible for all means and methods as 17 they relate to safety and shall comply with all applicable local, state and federal 18 requirements that are safety related. Safety shall be the responsibility of the 19 roofing contractor. All related personnel shall be instructed daily to be mindful 20 of the full time requirement to maintain a safe environment for the facility's 21 occupants including staff, visitors, customers and the occurrence of the general 22 public on or near the site. 23 24 L. WORKMANSHIP: 25 1. Applicators installing new roof, flashing and related work shall be factory 26 trained and approved by the manufacturer they are representing. 27 2. All work shall be of highest quality and in strict accordance with the 28 manufacturer's published specifications and to the building owner's satisfaction. 29 3. There shall be a supervisor on the job site at all times while work is in 30 progress. 31 32 M. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 33 1. The Sure-Weld membrane roofing system must achieve a UL Class A and FM I- 34 90 rating. 35 2. The manufacturer must have a minimum of 20 years experience in the 36 manufacturing of vulcanized thermal set sheeting. 37 3. Unless otherwise noted in this specification, the roofing contractor must 38 strictly comply with the manufacturer's current specifications and details.. 39 4. The roofing system must be installed by an applicator authorized and trained by 40 the manufacturer in compliance with shop drawings as approved by the 41 manufacturer. The roofing applicator shall be thoroughly experienced and upon 42 request be able to provide evidence of having at least five (5) years successful 43 experience installing single-ply EPDM roofing systems and having installed at least 44 one (1) roofing application or several similar systems of equal or greater size 45 within one year. 46 5. Provide adequate number of experienced workmen regularly engaged in this 47 type of work who are skilled in the application techniques of the materials 48 specified including operation of hot air welding equipment and power supply. 49 Provide at least one thoroughly trained and an experienced superintendent on

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 104 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 the job at all times roofing work is in progress. 2 6. There shall be no deviations made from this specification or the approved shop 3 drawings without the prior written approval of the Architect. Any deviation from 4 the manufacturer's installation procedures must be supported by a written 5 certification on the manufacturer's letterhead and presented for the Architect's 6 consideration. 7 7. Upon completion of the installation, the applicator shall arrange for an 8 inspection to be made by a non-sales technical representative of the membrane 9 manufacturer in order to determine whether or not corrective work will be required 10 before the warranty will be issued. Notify the building owner seventy-two (72) 11 hours prior to the manufacturer's final inspection. 12 13 N. JOB CONDITIONS, CAUTIONS & WARNINGS: 14 1. Reefer to Carlisle's Carlisle’s Design “A” Fully Adhered Roofing System 15 specification, Part II - Application, for General Job Site Considerations. 16 a. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) should be on location at all times 17 during the transportation, storage and application of materials. 18 b. When positioning membrane sheets, exercise care to locate all field 19 splices away from low spots and out of drain sumps. All field splices 20 should be shingled to prevent bucking of water. 21 c. When loading materials onto the roof, the Carlisle Authorized Roofing 22 Applicator must comply with the requirements of the building owner to 23 prevent overloading and possible disturbance to the building structure. 24 d Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in 25 compliance with the manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when 26 conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with the 27 manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. 28 e. Proceed with work so new roofing materials are not subject to 29 construction traffic. When necessary, new roof sections shall be protected 30 and inspected upon completion for possible damage. 31 f. Provide protection, such as 3/4 inch thick plywood, for all roof areas 32 exposed to traffic during construction. Plywood must be smooth and free 33 of fasteners and splinters. 34 g. The surface on which the insulation or roofing membrane is to be 35 applied shall be clean, smooth, dry, and free of projections or 36 contaminants that would prevent proper application of or be incompatible 37 with the new installation, such as fins, sharp edges, foreign materials, oil 38 and grease. 39 h. New roofing shall be complete and weathertight at the end of the work 40 day. 41 i. Contaminants such as grease, fats and oils shall not be allowed to come 42 in direct contact with the roofing membrane. 43 44 O. WARRANTY: 45 1. Provide manufacturer's 20 year Total System Warranty covering both labor 46 and material with no dollar limitation. The maximum wind speed coverage shall 47 be peak gusts of 120 mph measured at 10 meters above ground level. 48 Certification is required with bid submittal indicating the manufacturer has 49 reviewed and agreed to such wind coverage.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 105 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 a. Note: For projects specified with warranties 20 year or longer and/or 2 wind coverage specified greater than 72 mph, additional design 3 enhancements are required. Refer to Carlisle published Sure-Weld 4 Specifications 5 b. Note: Warranty Length Minimum Membrane Thickness 20 year / . 6 060-mil Sure-Weld 7 2. Warranty shall also cover leaks caused by accidental punctures: 16 man-hours 8 per year for .080-mil Sure-Weld 9 3. When white Sure-Weld membrane is specified, a Reflectivity Warranty 10 Amendment is available indicating the membrane will meet the Energy Star 11 program reflectivity guidelines for both new and aged membrane for a period of 12 10 years. 13 4. Pro-rated Membrane System Warranties shall not be accepted. 14 5. Evidence of the manufacturer's warranty reserve should be requested from the 15 manufacturer and included as part of the project submittals for the Architect 's 16 approval. 17 18 P. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 19 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 20 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 21 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 22 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 23 information specifically related to work of this section: 24 Section 04100: Masonry 25 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 26 Section 07620: Flashing and Sheet Metal 27 Section 07631: Gutters & Downspouts 28 Division 15000: Plumbing (On Liberty Drawings) 29 30 II. PRODUCTS 31 32 A. GENERAL: 33 1. All components of the specified roofing system shall be products of CARLISLE 34 SYNTEC SYSTEMS or accepted by CARLISLE SYNTEC SYSTEMS as compatible. 35 2. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect and accepted by the membrane 36 manufacturer, all products (including insulation, fasteners, fastening plates and 37 edgings) must be manufactured and supplied by the roofing system manufacturer 38 and covered by the warranty. 39 40 B. MEMBRANE: 41 1. Furnish SURE-SEAL .060 inch thick reinforced EPDM (Ethylene, Propylene, 42 Diene Terpolymer) in the largest sheet possible. The membrane shall conform to 43 the minimum physical properties of ASTM D4637. 44 a. When a 10 foot wide membrane is to be used, the membrane shall be 45 manufactured in a single panel with no factory splices to reduce splice 46 intersections. Sure-Seal .060” thick non-reinforced membrane is 47 available with pre-applied splice tape. 48 49 C. INSULATION/UNDERLAYMENT 50 1. When applicable, insulation shall be installed in multiple layers. The first and

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 106 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 second layer of insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the substrate in 2 accordance with the manufacturer's published specifications. 3 2. Insulation shall be minimum 2” of polyisocyanurate board as supplied by 4 CARLISLE SynTec Incorporated. Minimum R-value required is R-30. 5 3. Tapered Insulation shall be INSULFOAM Premium Tapered Insulation, 6 Insulfoam is a Division of Carlisle Construction Materials a wholly owned 7 subsidiary of CARLISLE Companies Incorporated. Custom cut tapered (EPS) 8 Expanded polystyrene. 9 10 D. ADHESIVES AND CLEANERS: All products shall be furnished by CARLISLE and 11 specifically formulated for the intended purpose. 12 1. Bonding Adhesive: Sure-Seal 90-8-30A 13 2. Splicing Cement: Sure-Seal EP-95 Splicing Cement 14 3. Splice Tape and Primer: Sure-Seal SecurTAPE and HP-250 or LV-600 Primer 15 4. Cleaning Solvent: Sure-Seal or Sure-White Splice Cleaner or Sure-Seal 16 Weathered Membrane Cleaner 17 5. Internal seam sealant: Sure-Seal In-Seam Sealant (used with adhesive 18 splices only) 19 6. External seam sealant: Sure-Seal or Sure-White Lap Sealant 20 7. Sealer: Sure-Seal Pourable Sealer 21 8. Insulation adhesive: Sure-Seal FAST Adhesive 22 23 E. FASTENERS AND PLATES 24 1. HP Fasteners: A threaded, black epoxy electro-deposition coated fastener 25 used for membrane and insulation securement into steel and wood roof decks. 26 2. Insulation Fastening Plates: A 3 inch diameter FM approved metal plate used 27 for insulation attachment. 28 3. Polymer Seam Plates: A 2 inch diameter plastic fastening plate incorporating 29 barbs on the underside of the plate. This plate is required for membrane and 30 RUSS attachment installed in conjunction with steel roof decks. May also be used 31 for insulation attachment. 32 4. Sure-Tite (ST) Fastening Bars: A 1” x .040” x 10’ long galvalume-coated steel 33 fastening bar used with Sure-Tite Fasteners for membrane securement into steel 34 or wood decks. 35 5. RUSS (Reinforced Universal Securement Strip): A 6 or 9 inch wide, 100 foot 36 long strip of Sure-Seal reinforced EPDM membrane. 37 a. The 6 inch wide RUSS shall be utilized horizontally or vertically (in 38 conjunction with Seam Fastening Plates) below the EPDM membrane for 39 additional membrane securement. In lieu of standard 6 inch wide RUSS, 40 9 inch wide Pressure-Sensitive RUSS can be used beneath field membrane 41 to create perimeter sheets. 42 b. The 9 inch wide RUSS shall be utilized in conjunction with metal 43 edgings to allow the continuation of the EPDM deck membrane as flashing 44 in accordance with Carlisle details. 45 46 E. FASTENERS AND PLATES 47 1. HP Fasteners: a threaded, black epoxy electro-deposition coated fastener 48 used with steel and wood roof decks. 49 2. HP-X Fasteners: A heavy duty #15 threaded fastener with a phillips head used

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 107 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 for insulation securement into steel, wood plank or minimum 15/32 inch thick 2 plywood when increased pullout resistance is desired. 3 3. Pre-Assembled ASAP Fasteners: A pre-assembled 3” diameter Plastic Plate 4 and standard phillips head fastener used for insulation attachment into steel or 5 wood decks. Installed using Olympic Fastening Tools. 6 4. InsulFast Fasteners: A threaded #12 fastener with #3 phillips head used for 7 insulation attachment into steel or wood decks. 8 5. HP Term Bar Nail-Ins: A 1-1/4” long expansion anchor with a zinc plated 9 steel drive pin used for fastening the Carlisle Termination Bar or Seam Fastening 10 Plates to concrete, brick, or block walls. 11 6. Seam Fastening Plates: a 2 inch diameter metal plate used for additional 12 membrane securement. 13 7. Insulation Fastening Plates: a nominal 3 inch diameter plastic or metal plate 14 used for insulation attachment. 15 16 F. METAL EDGING AND MEMBRANE TERMINATIONS 17 1. Carlisle Drip Edge: a metal fascia/edge system with a 22 or 24 gauge 18 continuous anchor cleat and .032 inch thick aluminum or 24 gauge steel fascia. 19 Metal fascia color shall be as designated by the Owner's Representative. 20 2. Sure-Weld Coated Metal: 4'x 10' coated metal sheets made from 24 gauge 21 galvanized steel with a minimum .035" thick non-reinforced (white, gray or tan) 22 Sure-Weld laminate. Sure-Weld membrane can be welded directly to the Sure- 23 Weld Coated Metal in accordance with the manufacturer’s detail. 24 3. Carlisle Termination Bar: a 1 inch wide and .098 inch thick extruded aluminum 25 bar pre-punched 6 inches on center; incorporates a sealant ledge to support Lap 26 Sealant and provide increased stability for membrane terminations. 27 28 III. EXECUTION 29 30 A. GENERAL: 31 1. Comply with the manufacturer's published instructions for the installation of 32 the membrane roofing system including proper substrate preparation, job site 33 considerations and weather restrictions. 34 2. Position sheets to accommodate contours of the roof deck to avoid bucking 35 water. 36 37 B. MEMBRANE PLACEMENT & BONDING: 38 1. Unroll and position membrane without stretching. Allow the membrane to 39 relax for approximately 1/2 hour before bonding. Fold the sheet back onto itself 40 so half the underside of the membrane is exposed. 41 2. Apply Sure-Weld Bonding Adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's 42 published instructions, to the exposed underside of the membrane and the 43 corresponding substrate area. Do not apply Bonding Adhesive along the splice 44 edge of the membrane to be hot air welded over the adjoining sheet. Allow the 45 adhesive to dry until it is tacky but will not string or stick to a dry finger touch. 46 a. Roll the coated membrane into the coated substrate while avoiding 47 wrinkles. Brush down the bonded section of the membrane sheet 48 immediately after rolling the membrane into the adhesive with a soft 49 bristle push broom to achieve maximum contact.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 108 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 b. Fold back the unbonded half of the membrane sheet and repeat the 2 bonding procedure. 3 3 Install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner, overlapping edges 4 approximately 4 inches. Do not apply bonding adhesive to the splice area. 5 6 D. MEMBRANE SPLICING (ADHESIVE SPLICE) 7 1. Fold the top sheet back and clean the dry splice area (minimum 3 inches wide) 8 of both membrane sheets by scrubbing with clean natural fiber rags saturated 9 with Splice Cleaner or HP-250 Primer. When using Sure-Seal (black) PRE- 10 KLEENED membrane, cleaning the splice area is not required unless 11 contaminated with field dirt or other residue. 12 2. Apply Splicing Cement and In-Seam Sealant in accordance with the 13 manufacturer's specifications and roll the top sheet onto the mating surface. 14 3. Roll the splice with a 2 inch wide steel roller and wait at least 2 hours before 15 applying Lap Sealant to the splice edge following the manufacturer's 16 requirements. 17 4. Field splices without In-Seam Sealant must be overlaid with uncured flashing. 18 19 E. MEMBRANE SPLICING (TAPE SPLICE) 20 1. Overlap adjacent sheets and mark a line 1/2 inch out from the top sheet. 21 2. Fold the top sheet back and clean the dry splice area (minimum 2-1/2 inches 22 wide) of both membrane sheets with Sure-Seal Primer as required by the 23 membrane manufacturer. 24 3. Where Splice Tape is not pre-applied, apply Splice Tape to bottom sheet with 25 the edge of the release film along the marked line. Press tape onto the sheet 26 using hand pressure. Overlap tape roll ends a minimum of 1 inch. 27 4. Remove the release film and press the top sheet onto the tape using hand 28 pressure. 29 5. Roll the seam toward the splice edge with a 2 inch wide steel roller. 30 6. Install a 6 inch wide section of Pressure-Sensitive Flashing or Elastoform 31 Flashing over all field splice intersections and seal edges of flashing with Lap 32 Sealant. 33 7. The use of Lap Sealant with tape splices is optional except at tape overlaps 34 and cut edges of reinforced membrane where Lap Sealant is required. 35 36 F. FLASHING: 37 1. Flashing of parapets, curbs, expansion joints and other parts of the roof must 38 be performed using Sure-Weld reinforced membrane. Sure-Weld non-reinforced 39 membrane can be used for flashing pipe penetrations, Sealant Pockets, and 40 scuppers, as well as inside and outside corners, when the use of pre-molded 41 accessories is not feasible. 42 2. Follow manufacturer's typical flashing procedures for all wall, curb, and 43 penetration flashing including metal edging/coping and roof drain applications. 44 45 G. OTHER MATERIALS: 46 1. All roof insulation, curbs, copings, gravel stops and miscellaneous flashing shall 47 be installed in strict accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s and flashing 48 manufacturers’ recommendations. 49 2. Install InsulFoam insulation with continuous side joints and end joints,

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 109 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 staggered so that they are offset by a minimum of 12" from the end joints in 2 adjacent rows. Insulation should abut tightly against adjacent boards. Joints 3 greater than 1/2" should be filled with the same insulation that is being used in 4 the field of the roof. All insulation joints must be offset a minimum of 6" 5 between layers. Use an approved mechanical fastener of sufficient length to 6 penetrate into or through the deck by the amount prescribed for the specific 7 fastener. Fasteners should never be closer than 6" from the edges of the 8 insulation board, and should be placed in a pattern to achieve the desired 9 approval. Use appropriate insulation plates with the fasteners. Care must be 10 taken to avoid over-driving or under-driving the fastener and plate assembly. 11 12 H. DAILY SEAL: 13 1. On phased roofing, when the completion of flashings and terminations is not 14 achieved by the end of the work day, a daily seal must be performed to 15 temporarily close the membrane to prevent water infiltration. 16 2. Complete an acceptable membrane seal in accordance with the manufacturer's 17 requirements. 18 19 H. CLEAN UP: 20 1. Perform daily clean-up to collect all wrappings, empty containers, paper, and 21 other debris from the project site. Upon completion, all debris must be disposed 22 of in a legally acceptable manner. 23 2. Prior to the manufacturer's inspection for warranty, the applicator must 24 perform a pre-inspection to review all work and to verify all flashing has been 25 completed as well as the application of all caulking. 26 27

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 110 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 07620: FLASHING & SHEET METAL 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. The General Contractor shall provide labor and materials, tools and 7 equipment to install all flashing, sheet metal and misc. flashing as shown on the 8 drawings and specified herein. 9 10 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 11 1. Comply with the guides and recommendations of the current edition of 12 "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" as published by the Sheet Metal and Air- 13 conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). 14 15 C. SUBMITTALS: 16 1. Provide materials lists and color samples of all materials of this section. 17 2. Provide manufacturer's specifications and installation recommendations upon 18 request of the Architect. 19 20 D. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 21 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and not necessarily limited 22 to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, The Contract Drawings and 23 the Standard form of Agreement. 24 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 25 information specifically related to work of this section. 26 Section 04100: CMU Masonry 27 Section 07530: Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing & Insulation System 28 29 II. PRODUCTS 30 31 A. FLASHINGS: 32 1. Flashings shall be as manufactured by ALCOA BUILDING PRODUCTS, P.O. Box 33 716, Sidney, Ohio 45365, 1-800-455-1179, or approved equal. 34 2. Finish of all materials specified in this section shall be factory prefinished 35 baked enamel, color as selected by the Owner from the manufacturer's standard 36 colors. 37 3. Step flashing at penetrations shall be .032" prefinished aluminum. 38 4. Eave drip flashing shall be .032" prefinished aluminum. 39 5. Side wall flashing shall be .032" prefinished aluminum. 40 41 B. SCREWS: 42 1. Screws shall be galvanized steel or as per roofing/flashing manufacturers' 43 recommendations. 44 45 III. EXECUTION: 46 47 A. GENERAL: 48 1. Installation of all flashing shall be in complete accordance with materials 49 manufacturers' recommendations. 50 2. The Contractor shall warrant a completely watertight installation. 51

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 111 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION 07631: GUTTERS & DOWNSPOUTS 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work 6 The General Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for a 7 complete installation of preformed gutters and downspouts, as shown on the drawings, 8 specified herein and as required to complete the work of the contract. 9 1. Work shall also include installation of a new scupper to be cut into the 10 existing roof edge adjacent an area of the existing roof to provide secondary 11 drainage. 12 13 B. QUALITY CONTROL: Gutters and downspouts shall comply with the American 14 Architectural Manufacturing Association Specification 1495.1 "Specifications for 15 Aluminum Gutters and Downspouts", and shall carry a 20 year pro-rated materials 16 warranty by the manufacturer. 17 18 C. SUBMITTALS: Provide materials lists and color samples of all materials of this 19 section. Provide manufacturer's specifications and installation recommendations upon 20 request of the Architect. 21 22 D. RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENTS 23 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and not necessarily limited to 24 General and Special Requirements of Division 1, The Contract Drawings and the 25 Standard form of Agreement. 26 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 27 information specifically related to work of this section. 28 Section 07352: Fully-Adhered Membrane Roofing & Insulation System 29 Section 07620: Flashing & Sheet Metal 30 31 II. PRODUCTS 32 33 A. GUTTERS, SPOUTING & ACCESSORIES: 34 1. Gutters, spouting and accessories shall be shop fabricated from 032" 35 prefinished aluminum coil stock as manufactured by ALCOA BUILDING 36 PRODUCTS, PO Box 716, Sidney, Ohio 45365, 1-800-455-1179, or approved 37 equal. 38 2. Finish of all materials specified in this section shall be factory pre-finished 39 baked enamel, color shall be “RED” matching the existing roof edge at the 40 building. 41 3. Gutters shall be shop fabricated 6” K type., fabricated from .032" aluminum. 42 4. Downspouts shall be 3 1/4” x 5” corrugated rectangular aluminum fabricated 43 of .032" gage aluminum, color as selected by the Owner from the manufacturer's 44 standard colors. 45 5. Hangers shall be spaced on 3’-0” o.c. max. centers. 46 47 III. EXECUTION 48 49 A. GENERAL: 50 1. Gutters, spouting and accessories shall be installed in strict accordance with 51 materials manufacturer's recommendations. 52 2. Form metals accurately to the dimensions and shapes as required. 53 3. Form and install metals so as to provide for expansion and contraction of the 54 materials. 55 4. Care must be exercised in placing aluminum in contact with metals or 56 materials not compatible with aluminum. Dissimilar materials shall be painted or 57 otherwise protected when they are in contact with aluminum, or when drainage 58 from them passes over aluminum.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 112 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 5. Run all downspouts to precast concrete splashblocks, or underground roof 2 storm water system, locations as indicated on the drawings.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 113 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 07900: SEALANTS & CAULKING 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. Provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for a complete 7 installation of caulking and sealants as shown on the drawings, as specified 8 herein and as necessary to provide for completely weathertight completed work. 9 a. Work shall include but not be limited to all locations as required to 10 provide a positive barrier to the passage of air or moisture, exterior and 11 interior perimeter of all openings in exterior walls such as joints where 12 new replacement windows and/or trim meets existing construction, joints 13 where interior windows meet new wall coverings and/or trim and joints. 14 15 B. HANDLING: 16 1. Materials shall be delivered to job site in manufacturers' unopened 17 containers. 18 2. Containers shall be clearly marked as to manufacturer, brand name, and 19 identifying numbers as applicable. 20 3. Material shall be stored as recommended by the product manufacturers. 21 22 C. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 23 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 24 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 25 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 26 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 27 information specifically related to work of this section: 28 Section 04100: CMU Masonry 29 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 30 Section 06200: Finish Carpentry 31 Division 7 – Thermal & Moisture Protection 32 Division 8 - Doors & Windows 33 Division 9 - Finishes 34 35 III. PRODUCTS 36 37 A. EXTERIOR SEALANT: 38 1. Exterior sealant shall be a paintable, non-sag one part polyurethane sealant, 39 DYNATROL XL as manufactured PECORA Corporation or approved equal. 40 41 B. PRIMER: 42 1. Primer shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 43 44 C. BACKER ROD: 45 1. Backer rod shall be open cell polyurethane, closed cell polyurethane or “Sof- 46 Rod” as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 47 2. Use type recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each application. 48 49 D. BOND BREAKER TAPE: 50 1. Bond breaker tape shall be pressure sensitive adhesive polyethylene, TEFLON, 51 or polyurethane foam tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 52 53 E. SILICONE SEALANTS & ADHESIVES: 54 1. TREMCO®: phone#1-800-321-7906 55 a. Spectrem 1® 56 2. GE SILICONE®: phone#1-800-332-3390 57 a. Silpruf®

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 114 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 b. Silglaze II® 2 3. PECORA®: phone#1-800-523-6688 3 a. 896 Silicone – fast cure® (1-877-OMEGA77 to order caulk color-matched 4 to panels) 5 b. 890 Silicone – slow cure® 6 4. DOW Corning®: phone#1-800-248-2481 (20 yr. Warranty available) 7 a. 791 Silicone sealant® 8 b. 795 Silicone sealant® 9 c. 995 Silicon sealant® 10 11 III. EXECUTION: 12 13 A. PREPARATION: 14 1. Cut away old sealant as close to joint edges as possible. 15 2. Clean all joint surfaces of contaminants and impurities to the depth at which 16 the new sealant and backer materials are to be installed. 17 a. This may be accomplished by several methods, abrading with a wire 18 brush (hand or power), grinding, saw cutting or solvent cleaning. 19 b. Follow solvent manufacturer’s safe handling recommendations and 20 local, state and federal regulations regarding solvent usage. 21 3. Blow out all dust, loose particles, old sealant, backer rod and other debris 22 using oil free compressed air. 23 24 B. EXAMINATION: 25 1. Contractor shall verify that all joint surfaces are clean, sound, free of defects 26 and that dimensions are within sealant manufacturer’s size requirements. 27 2. Commencement of sealant installation shall be evidence that contractor has 28 verified compliance of existing conditions. 29 30 C. INSTALLATION: 31 1. Solvent clean aluminum and any other non-porous surfaces with 32 recommended solvent using the “Two Cloth Method”. 33 2. If recommended by the sealant manufacturer, apply primer according to 34 manufacturer’s instructions. 35 3. Install backer rod using blunt or rounded tools to assure uniform depth 36 (+/- 1/8”) without puncturing or twisting. 37 a. Closed cell rod shall be a minimum 20% oversized. 38 b. Install bond breaker tape in shallow joints. 39 4. Mask or protect adjacent areas that are not receive sealant. 40 5. Apply sealant in joints using a pressure gun with nozzle cut to appropriate 41 size. 42 a. Deposit sealant in a uniform and continues bead with no gaps or air 43 pockets 44 6. Use sufficient pressure to fill all voids and gaps solid to the backer material. 45 7. Surface shall be smooth, free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and 46 imbedded impurities. 47 8. After all joints have been completely filled than shall be neatly tooled to 48 eliminate air pockets or voids. 49 9. Tool joints to required configuration with a blunt instrument as soon as 50 possible after installation, but before sealant begins to skin over. 51 10. Remove all masking immediately after tooling 52 11. Clean all work upon completion.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 115 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 DIVISION 8: DOORS & WINDOWS 2 3 SECTION - 08100: STEEL DOORS & FRAMES 4 5 I. GENERAL 6 7 A. SCOPE: Description of the work: 8 1. Provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for a complete 9 installation of hollow metal doors and frames as shown on the drawings and as 10 specified herein. 11 12 B. REFERENCES: 13 1. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials 14 a. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc- 15 Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot- 16 Dip Process. 17 b. ASTM A 924 - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, 18 Metallic Coated by the Hot Dip Process. 19 c. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold- 20 Rolled, Carbon, High Strength Low-Alloy, High Strength Low Alloy with 21 Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. 22 d. ASTM E 90 - Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission 23 Loss of Building Partitions. 24 e. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. 25 2. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 26 a. ANSI/DHI A115 - Specifications for Hardware Preparations in Standard 27 Steel Doors and Frames. 28 b. ANSI/DHI A115.IG - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. 29 c. ANSI A156.7 - Hinge Template Dimensions. 30 d. ANSI A 250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory 31 Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 32 e. ANSI A250.4 – Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical 33 Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcing. 34 f. ANSI A 250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard 35 Steel Doors and Frames. 36 g. ANSI A 250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime 37 Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 38 h. ANSI/SDI 250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel 39 Frames 40 3. SDI - Steel Door Institute 41 a. SDI 105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel frames. 42 b. SDI 111 - Recommended Details and Guidelines for Standard Steel 43 Doors and Frames and Accessories. 44 c. SDI 112 - Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel 45 Doors and Frames. 46 d. SDI 117 - Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and 47 Frames. 48 e. SDI 118 - Basic Fire Door Requirements. 49 f. SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel 50 Doors and Frames. 51 g. SDI 124 - Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 52 4. NAAMM/HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association 53 a. HMMA 840 - Guide Specification for Installation and Storage of Hollow 54 Metal Doors and Frames

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 116 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 b. HMMA 820 TN01- Grouting Hollow Metal Frames 2 c. HMMA 820 TN03 – Guidelines for Glazing of Hollow Metal Transom, 3 Sidelight and Windows 4 5. Building Code references 5 a. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. 6 b. NFPA 105 - Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies 7 and Other Opening Protectives 8 c. NFPA 252 – Standard Method of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 9 d. ANSI/UL 10C - Standard for Safety for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of 10 Door Assemblies 11 e. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 12 f. UL - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc 13 g. WH - Certification Listings; Warnock Hersey International Inc. 14 h. Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) 361 Guidelines 15 16 C. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: 17 1. Doors & frames: conform to applicable codes for fire ratings. It is the intent of 18 this specification that door hardware and its application comply or exceed the 19 standards for labeled openings. In case of conflicts in required fire protection 20 ratings, provide fire ratings as required by NFPA and UL. 21 a. Fire door assemblies in exit enclosures and exit passageways: 22 maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 250°F 23 (121°C) above ambient at the end of 30 minutes of the standard fire test 24 exposure. 25 26 D. SUBMITTALS: 27 1. Submit for review six (6) complete copies of the hollow metal shop drawings 28 covering complete identification of items required for the project. Include 29 manufacturer’s names and identification of product. Included six (6) complete 30 copies of catalog cuts and/or technical data sheets and other pertinent data as 31 required to indicate compliance with these specifications. 32 a. Shop Drawings: submit complete and detailed with respect to 33 quantities, dimensions, specified performance, and design criteria, 34 materials and similar data to enable the Architect to review the 35 information as required. 36 2. Indicate frames configuration, anchor types and spacing, location of cutouts 37 for hardware, reinforcement, to ensure doors and frames are properly prepared 38 and coordinated to receive hardware. 39 3. Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cutouts 40 for glass lights and louvers. 41 4. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions, including a current copy of 42 ANSI A250.11 as part of the shop drawing submittal. 43 5. Shop drawings, product data, and samples: stamp with Contractor’s stamp 44 verifying they have been coordinated and reviewed for completeness and 45 compliance with the contract documents. 46 6. Shop drawings submitted without the above requirements will be considered 47 incomplete, will NOT be reviewed, and will be returned directly to the Contractor. 48 7. Follow the same procedures for re-submittal as the initial submittal with the 49 appropriate dates revised. 50 8. Provide evidence of manufacturer's membership in the Steel Door Institute. 51 52 E. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 53 1. Select a qualified hollow metal distributor who is a direct account of the 54 manufacturer of the products furnished. In addition, that distributor must have in

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 117 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 their regular employment an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), a Certified 2 Door Consultant (CDC) or an Architectural Openings Consultant (AOC), who will 3 be available to consult with the Architect and Contractor regarding matters 4 affecting the door and frame opening. 5 2. Conform to requirements of the above reference standards. Submit test 6 reports upon request by the Owner or Architect. 7 3. Underwriters’ Laboratories and Intertek Testing Services / Warnock Hersey, 8 labeled fire doors and frames: 9 a. Label fire doors and frames listed in accordance with Underwriters 10 Laboratories standard UL10C, and Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door 11 Assemblies. 12 b. Construct and install doors and frames to comply with applicable issue 13 of ANSI/NFPA 80. 14 c. Manufacture Underwriters' Laboratories labeled doors and frames 15 under the UL factory inspection program and in strict compliance to UL 16 procedures, and provide the degree of fire protection, heat transmission 17 and panic loading capability indicated by the opening class. 18 d. Manufacture Intertek Testing Services / Warnock Hersey labeled doors 19 and frames under the ITS/WH factory inspection program and in strict 20 compliance to ITS/WH procedures, and provide the degree of fire 21 protection capability indicated by the opening class. 22 e. Affixed physical label or approved marking to fire doors and/or fire 23 door frames, at an authorized facility as evidence of compliance with 24 procedures of the labeling agency. Labels to be metal, paper or plastic. 25 Stamped or die cast labels are not permitted. Labels are not to be 26 removed, defaced or made illegible while the door is in service as covered 27 in NFPA Pamphlet 80. 28 f. Conform to applicable codes for fire ratings. It is the intent of this 29 specification that hardware and its application comply or exceed the 30 standards for labeled openings. In case of conflict between types required 31 for fire protection, furnish type required by NFPA and UL. 32 4. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member of the Steel Door Institute. 33 5. Installer: Minimum five years documented experience installing products 34 specified in this Section. 35 36 F. DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING: 37 1. Storage of Doors 38 a. Store doors vertically in a dry area, under proper cover. Place the units 39 on at least 4" high wood sills on floors in a manner that will prevent rust 40 and damage. 41 b. Avoid storage in non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which create a 42 humidity chamber and promote rusting. 43 c. If the door becomes wet, or moisture appears, remove protective 44 wrapping immediately. 45 d. Provide a 4" space between the doors to permit air circulation. 46 e. Proper storage is required to meet the requirements of ANSI/SDI 47 A250.11 and HMMA 840. 48 2. Storage of Frames 49 a. Store frames in an upright position with heads uppermost under cover 50 on 4" wood sills on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. 51 Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which create a humidity 52 chamber and promote rusting. 53 1) Store assembled frames in a vertical position, five units 54 maximum in a stack.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 118 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2) Provide a 2" space between frames to permit air circulation 2 b. Provide proper storage for doors and frames, to maintain the quality 3 and integrity of the factory applied paint, and maintain the requirements 4 of ANSI/SDI A250.10 and HMMA 840. 5 c. Sand, touch up and clean prime painted surfaces prior to finish 6 painting in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 7 8 G. COORDINATION: 9 1. Coordinate Work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture 10 or fabrication of internal cutouts and reinforcement for door hardware, electric 11 devices and recessed items. 12 2. Coordinate work with frame opening construction, door and hardware 13 installation. 14 3. Sequence installation to accommodate required door hardware. 15 4. Verify field dimensions for factory assembled frames prior to fabrication. 16 17 H. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 18 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 19 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 20 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 21 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 22 information specifically related to work of this section: 23 Section 04100: Masonry 24 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 25 Section 06200: Finish Carpentry 26 Section 08200: Wood Doors 27 Section 08710: Finish Hardware 28 29 II. PRODUCTS 30 31 A. MANUFACTURERS: 32 1. Acceptable manufacturers for doors and frames specified are listed below. 33 a. Steelcraft, Cincinnati, Ohio 34 b. Curries, Mason City, Iowa 35 2. Or Architect approved equal. 36 3. Provide steel doors and frames from a single manufacturer. 37 38 B. DOORS: 39 1. Construct exterior/interior doors to these designs and gages: 40 a. Exterior Doors: Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel, ASTM A 41 653, Class A60, 18 gage [0.042" (1mm)], 16 gage [0.053" (1.3mm)] or 14 42 gage [0.067” (1.7mm)] Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel, with 43 closed tops. 44 1) Include galvannealed components and internal reinforcements 45 with galvannealed doors. 46 2) Close tops of exterior swing-out doors to eliminate moisture 47 penetration. Galvannealed steel top caps are permitted. 48 b. Interior Doors: Cold-rolled steel, A 1008, 20 gage [0.032" (.8mm)], 18 49 gage [0.042” (1mm)], or 16 gage [0.053" (1.3mm)] cold rolled or 50 galvannealed steel. 51 1) Include galvannealed components and internal reinforcements 52 with galvannealed doors. 53 2. Factory prime painted doors indicated on door schedule as HM. 54 3. Hardware Reinforcements:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 119 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 a. Hinge reinforcements for full mortise hinges: minimum 7 gage [0.180" 2 (4.7mm)]. 3 b. Lock reinforcements: minimum 16 gage [0.053" (1.3mm)]. 4 c. Closer reinforcements: minimum 14 gage [0.067" (1.7mm)], 20” long. 5 d. Galvannealed doors: include galvannealed hardware reinforcements. 6 e. Projection welded hinge and lock reinforcements to the edge of the 7 door. 8 f. Provided adequate reinforcements for other hardware as required. 9 4. Glass moldings and stops (both labeled and non-labeled doors): 10 a. Fabricate glass trim from 24 gage [.6mm] steel conforming to: 11 1) Interior openings ASTM designation A 366 cold rolled steel 12 2) Exterior openings ASTM designation A 924 Zinc-Iron Alloy- 13 Coated galvannealed steel with a zinc coating of 0.06 ounces per 14 square foot (A60) for exterior openings. 15 b. Install trim into the door as a four sided welded assembly with 16 mitered, reinforced and welded corners. 17 c. Trim: identical on both sides of the door. 18 d. Exposed fasteners are not permitted. Labeled and non-labeled doors: 19 use the same trim. 20 e. Acceptable mounting methods: 21 1) Fit into a formed area of the door face, not extending beyond 22 the door face, and interlocking into the recessed area 23 2) Cap the cutout not extend more than 1/16” [1.6mm] from the 24 door face. 25 5. Full Flush Type Doors Construction 26 a. ANSI-A250.4 criteria and tested to 5,000,000 operating cycles. 27 b. Approved door core constructions: 28 1) Honeycomb: Reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and 29 insulated with impregnated Kraft honeycomb core completely 30 filling the inside of the doors and laminated to inside faces of both 31 panels using contact adhesive applied to both panels and 32 honeycomb core. Acceptable products: 33 a) Steelcraft: L 34 2) Polystyrene: Reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and 35 insulated with a rigid polystyrene core bonded to the inside faces 36 of both panels with contact adhesive. Fill voids around the 37 perimeter of the door with honeycomb. Acceptable products: 38 a) Steelcraft: L with polystyrene option 39 b) Curries: 707D 40 3) Temperature Rise Doors: Mineral fiber core material to comply 41 with the 250° F (121° C) maximum temperature rise rating. 42 Acceptable products: 43 a) Steelcraft: T 44 b) Curries: 727D 45 c. Vertical edge seams: Provide doors with continuous vertical mechanical 46 inter-locking joints at lock and hinge edges with visible edge seams, or a 47 one piece full height 14 gage channel. Apply a continuous bead of 48 structural epoxy in the internal vertical connection.: 49 d. Filled Vertical Edges (F): Continuous vertical mechanical interlocking 50 joint with internal epoxy seal; edge seams epoxy filled and ground 51 smooth. 52 1) Steelcraft: LF edge option 53 2) Curries: N edge option 54 e. Bevel hinge and lock door edges 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 2 inches (50 mm).

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 120 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 Square edges on hinge and/or lock stiles are not acceptable. 2 f. Reinforce top and bottom of doors with galvannealed 14 gage, welded 3 to both panels. 4 6. Electrical Requirements: 5 a. General: Coordinate electrical requirements for doors and frames. 6 Make provisions for installation of electrical items arranged so that wiring 7 can be readily removed and replaced. 8 b. Doors with Electric Hinges: 9 1) General: Furnish conduit raceway to permit wiring from electric 10 door hardware. 11 2) Hinge Locations: Provide electric hinge at intermediate or 12 center location. Top or bottom electric hinge locations are not 13 acceptable. 14 3) Refer to 08710 for electrified hardware items. 15 16 C. DOOR FRAMES: 17 1. Construct exterior and metal door frames to these profiles, designs and 18 gages; 19 a. Exterior Frames: Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel, ASTM A 20 653, Class A60, 16 gage [0.053" (1.3mm)] or 14 gage [0.067” (1.7mm)] 21 Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel. 22 b. Interior Frames in Masonry: Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel, 23 ASTM A 653, Class A60, 16 gage [0.053” (1.3mm)] galvannealed steel. 24 c. Interior Frames in stud wall construction: 16 gage [0.053” (1.3mm)] 25 cold rolled frames. 26 d. Interior KD Drywall Frames (Slip-On construction): 16 gage [0.053” 27 (1.3mm)] cold rolled frames. 28 e. Include galvannealed components and internal reinforcements with 29 galvannealed frames. 30 2. Flush Frames: knocked down for field assembly or set-up and welded with 31 temporary shipping bars. Factory die-mitered corner connections reinforced with 32 four integral tabs to secure and interlock at jambs to head. Unless otherwise 33 indicated, frame will have 2” faces and 5/8” stops. Frame depths per the 34 architectural door schedule. 35 a. Provide frames with a minimum of six wall anchors and two adjustable 36 base anchors of manufacturer’s standard design. Acceptable products: 37 1) Steelcraft: F 38 2) Curries: M 39 b. Provide welded 3 sided frames as follows: 40 1) Face welded: Weld miter joints between head and jamb faces 41 completely along their length either internally or externally. 42 a) The remaining elements of the frame profile (soffit, stop 43 and rabbets) are not welded. 44 2) Grind and finish face joints smooth. 45 3. Drywall Frames: same as flush frames, 16 gage except: 46 a. Form frames with double return backbends to prevent cutting into 47 drywall surface. Design knock down frames to be securely installed in the 48 rough opening after wallboard is applied. 49 1) Drywall frames: knocked down for field assembly. Factory die- 50 mitered corner connections reinforced at miters, including soffit 51 tabs to secure and interlock at jambs to head 52 b. Locate adjustable anchors in each jamb 4” from the top of the door 53 opening to hold frame in rigid alignment. 54 1) Provide security anchor at strike jambs on all frames 7´6” high

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 121 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 and over. 2 c. Base anchor options: 3 1) Weld-in base anchor attaching plate in each jamb for field 4 installation of loose base anchors to allow proper anchoring at 5 base of frame. 6 2) Acceptable products: 7 a) Steelcraft: DW 8 b) Curries: C with P0087 9 4. Prepare frames to receive inserted type door silencers (3) per strike jamb on 10 single doors, and (2) per head for pair of doors. Stick-on silencers are not 11 permitted. 12 5. Frame Hardware Reinforcements: 13 a. Mortise hinge reinforcement: minimum 7 gage [0.180” (4.7mm)]. 14 Provide high frequency hinge reinforcement for top hinge on all 15 exterior, cross corridor, and stairwell frames, in accordance with 16 SDI 111-H, Example “A” Application, where full mortise hinges are 17 specified. 18 b. Strike reinforcements: minimum 16 gage [0.053” (1.3mm)] and 19 prepared for an ANSI-A115.1-2 strike. 20 c. Closer reinforcement: minimum 14 gage [0.067” (1.7mm)] steel. 21 d. Projection weld hinge and strike reinforcements to the door frame. 22 e. Provide metal plaster guards for all mortised cutouts. 23 f. Provide adequate reinforcements for other hardware as required. 24 g. Include galvanized hardware reinforcements in all galvannealed 25 frames. 26 6. Electrical Requirements: 27 a. General: Coordination all electrical requirements for doors and frames. 28 Make provisions for installation of electrical items arranged so that wiring 29 can be readily removed and replaced. 30 1) Provide cutouts and reinforcements required for metal door 31 frame to accept electric components. 32 2) Frame with Electrical Hinges: Weld UL listed grout guard cover 33 box welded over center hinge reinforcing. Top or bottom hinge 34 locations are not permitted. Contractor to reference 3.01.E, for 35 continuous hinges. 36 3) Provide cutouts and reinforcements required to accept security 37 system components. 38 4) Refer to 08710 for electrified hardware items. 39 b. Provide mortar box, welded in head of door frame at exterior frames 40 for future door contact switch provided by Owner. Size, type, location and 41 conduit requirements to be provided by Owner. 42 43 D. CONSTRUCTION OF ARCHITECTURAL STICK COMPONENTS: 44 1. Fabricate architectural stick frame assemblies from standard frame 45 components, fabricated from 14 gage galvanized steel A60 for exterior, and 16 46 gage cold rolled steel for interior. 47 2. Construct architectural stick frame assemblies of standard frame 48 components, fabricated as specified. 49 a. Exterior Frames: Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel, ASTM A 50 653, Class A60, 16 gage [0.053" (1.3mm)] or 14 gage [0.067” (1.7mm)] 51 Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel. 52 b. Interior Frames in Masonry: Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel, 53 ASTM A 653, Class A60, 16 gage [0.053” (1.3mm)] galvannealed steel. 54 c. Interior Frames in stud wall construction: 16 gage [0.053” (1.3mm)]

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 122 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 cold rolled frames. 2 d. Include galvannealed components and internal reinforcements with 3 galvannealed frames. 4 3. Frame component requirements: 5 a. Prepare required sticks at door openings and frame assemblies for 6 hardware as specified. 7 b. Fabricate frame assemblies from three basic components: 8 1) Open Sections (perimeter members) identical in configuration 9 to standard frames 10 2) Closed sections (intermediate members) with identical jamb 11 depth, face dimensions, and stops as open sections. 12 3) Sill sections: Fabricated from galvanized steel, flush with both 13 faces of adjacent vertical members. Cut individual components to 14 length and notched to assure square joints and corners. 15 c. Externally welded face joints at meeting mullions or between mullions 16 and other frame members on the face surfaces only. Grind and finish face 17 joints smooth. 18 d. Ship frame assemblies to the jobsite completely welded. Field joints 19 permissible only when the size of the total assembly exceeds shipping 20 limitations. Fabricate oversized frames in sections designated for splicing 21 in the field. Provide frames with joint reinforcements 14 gage, 8" long. 22 Field weld joint reinforcement inside and tack weld outside joint at both 23 faces, grind, and finish smooth and uniform in appearance, after 24 installation. 25 e. Pierced and dimpled glazing beads for use with manufacturers’ 26 standard fasteners. 27 f. Provide necessary anchors for jambs, heads, and sills of assemblies. 28 4. Verification of field dimensions as required. Do not begin fabrication until 29 these dimensions have been verified, submitted, and approved. 30 31 E. FABRICATION: 32 1. Face Welded Frames: 33 a. Continuous face weld the joint between the head and jamb faces along 34 their length either internally or externally. 35 1) Grind, prime paint, and finish smooth face joints with no 36 visible face seams. 37 b. Externally weld, grind, prime paint, and finish smooth face joints at 38 meeting mullions or between mullions and other frame members per a 39 current copy of ANSI/SDI A250.8. 40 c. Provide two temporary steel spreaders (welded to the jambs at each 41 rabbet of door openings) on welded frames during shipment. 42 1) Remove temporary steel spreaders prior to installation of the 43 frame. 44 45 F. FINISH: 46 1. Doors, frames and frame components are required to be cleaned, 47 phosphatized, and finished with one coat of baked-on rust inhibiting prime paint 48 in accordance with the ANSI/SDI A250.10 “Test Procedures and Acceptance 49 Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.” 50 51 III. EXECUTION 52 53 A. INSTALLATION: 54 1. Install doors and frames in accordance with Steel Door Institute’s

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 123 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 recommended erection instructions for steel frames ANSI A250.11. 2 2. Install label doors and frames in accordance with NFPA-80. 3 3. Remove temporary steel spreaders prior to installation of frames. 4 4. Set frames accurately in position; plumb, align and brace until permanent 5 anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary wood 6 spreaders. 7 a. Field splice only at approved locations indicated on the shop drawings. 8 Weld, grind, and finish as required to conceal evidence of splicing on 9 exposed faces. 10 5. Provide full height 3/8” to 1-1/2” thick strip of polystyrene foam blocking at 11 non-labeled frames requiring grouting where continuous hinges are specified. 12 a. Apply the strip to the back of the frame, where the hinge is to be 13 installed, to facilitate field drilling or tapping. 14 6. Where grouting is required in masonry, provide and install temporary bottom 15 and intermediate wood spreaders to maintain proper width and avoid bowing or 16 deforming of frame members. Refer to ANSI A250.11-2001, Standard. 17 a. Hollow Metal Frames to receive grouting: comply with a current copy 18 of ANSI/SDI Standard A250.8, paragraph 4.2.2, whereby grout will be 19 mixed to provide a 4" maximum slump consistency and hand troweled 20 into place. 21 b. Do not use grout mixed to a thinner, pumpable consistency; this 22 practice is not recommended and not permissible. Refer to HMMA 820 23 TN01 Grouting Hollow Metal Frames. 24 7. Provide a vertical wood brace during grouting of frame at openings over 4’0” 25 wide, to prevent sagging of frame header. 26 8. Glaze and seal exterior transom, sidelight and window frames in accordance 27 with HMMA-820 TN03. 28 9. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturers’ instructions and 29 Section 08710 FINISH HARDWARE of these Specifications. 30 a. Install hardware with only factory-provided fasteners. 31 b. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at head and 32 jambs, to achieve maximum operational effectiveness and appearance. 33 34 B. ADJUSTING: 35 1. Final Adjustments: Adjust operating doors and hardware items just prior to 36 final inspection and acceptance by the Owner and Architect. 37 a. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. 38 b. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames that are 39 damaged, bowed or otherwise unacceptable. 40 2. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or 41 damaged areas of prime coat, and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying 42 primer. 43 44 C. PROTECTION: 45 1. Provide protective measures required throughout the construction period to 46 ensure that door and frame units will be without damage or deterioration, other 47 than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. 48

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 124 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION – 08200: WOOD DOORS 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the work: 6 1. Provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment as necessary for a 7 complete installation of wood doors as shown on the drawings, specified herein 8 and as necessary for the completion of the work, to the satisfaction of the 9 Owner. 10 2. The Owner desires that the Addition & Renovated Areas wood doors match 11 the wood doors on the attached Police Station wing, for veneer style & finish. 12 13 B. REFERENCES: 14 1. Architectural Woodwork Standards, latest edition, published jointly by the 15 Architectural Woodwork Institute, the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer 16 Association of Canada, and the Woodwork Institute. 17 2. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A, latest edition. 18 3. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 6A, latest edition. 19 20 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 21 1. Wood doors and frames shall conform to the requirements and 22 recommendations of the Architectural Woodwork Institute Architectural 23 Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications for Architectural Flush Doors. 24 2. Qualification: 25 a. Firm (woodwork manufacturer) with no less than 5 years of production 26 experience similar to this Project, whose qualifications indicate the ability 27 to comply with the requirements of this Section. 28 b. The woodwork manufacturer must have had at least one project in the 29 past 5 years where the value of the woodwork was within 20 percent of 30 the cost of woodwork for this Project. 31 3. Single Source Responsibility: A single manufacturer shall provide and install 32 the work of this Section. 33 34 C. DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING: 35 1. Coordinate fabrication, delivery, and installation with the general contractor 36 and other applicable trades 37 2. Deliver materials only when the project is ready for installation and the 38 general contractor has provided a clean storage area. 39 3. Deliver the doors to the work site in the manufacturers' unopened containers. 40 a. Take care to protect doors and frames from damage. 41 4. Delivery of doors shall be made only when the area of operation is enclosed, 42 all plaster and concrete work is dry and the area broom clean. 43 a. No materials specified in this section shall be delivered to the work 44 site until building and storage areas are sufficiently dry so that woodwork 45 will not be damaged by excessive changes in moisture content. 46 5. Maintain indoor temperature and humidity within the range recommended by 47 the Architectural Woodwork Standards for the location of the project. 48 49 D. SUBMITTALS: 50 1. Shop Drawings 51 a. The Contractor shall prepare and submit shop drawings for all work of 52 this section for the review and approval of the Architect and the Owner. 53 b. Submit shop drawings in conformance to the requirements of the 54 Architectural Woodwork Standards. 55 c. Shop drawings shall be in sufficient detail and scale to determine 56 compliance with the intent of the quality grades specified.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 125 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2. Samples: 2 a. Submit four finished samples of each species and cut of wood to be 3 used. 4 b. Veneer samples to be minimum 12” (305 mm) by 12” (305 mm). 5 c. Samples shall represent the range of color and grain expected to be 6 provided. 7 8 E. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 9 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 10 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 11 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 12 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 13 information specifically related to work of this section: 14 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 15 Section 06200: Finish Carpentry 16 Section 08100: Metal Doors & Frames 17 Section 08710: Finish Hardware 18 19 II. PRODUCTS 20 21 A. COMPONENTS: 22 1. Flush Wood Doors: 23 a. Non-rated interior swing doors shall be birch veneer, flush, solid 24 cross-banded staved lumber core as manufactured by SIMPSON, HAGER, 25 MOHAWK or approved equal.. 26 b. Doors shall be manufactured in accordance with NWWDA I.S. 6-A-97 27 AWI 7th Edition standards for premium and custom grade architectural 28 quality doors, 29 c. Doors shall be of sizes and operations as shown on the drawings. 30 d. Cores shall be low density wood blocks, kiln dried, not more than 2½” 31 wide random lengths, joints staggered, conforms to ANSI Section 32 1300/NWDA I.S.1. 33 34 B. FABRICATION: 35 1. Slab doors shall be Architectural Woodwork Standards Custom Grade: 36 2. Doors shall be 5 ply construction. 37 3. Size of doors; type, size, and location of lights and louvers; astragals, edging, 38 flashing, and specialty hardware; shall be as indicated on the door schedule. 39 4. Fire-rated doors shall be of the construction standard of the manufacturer 40 and conform with the requirements of all applicable labeling agencies. 41 5. Provide blocking as required for surface mounted hardware to prevent the 42 need for through bolting. 43 44 III. EXECUTION 45 46 A. EXAMINATION: 47 1. Verify that frames are set square, plumb, level, and in plane. 48 49 B. INSTALLATION: 50 1. Install all work in conformance with the Architectural Woodwork Standards, 51 latest edition. 52 a. Installation shall conform to the AWS Grade of the items being 53 installed. 54 1. Installation of all wood doors shall be in complete compliance with the 55 recommendations of the door manufacturers. 56 2. Doors shall be secured in place square, plumb, & level.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 126 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 3. Hardware shall be installed complete and as recommended by the 2 manufacturer.. 3 4. Check alignment of door, frame and hardware for proper clearances and free, 4 smooth operation. 5 6 C. ADJUSTING & TOUCH-UP: 7 1. Before completion of the installation, the installer shall adjust all moving and 8 operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 9 2. All nicks, chips, and scratches in the finish shall be filled and retouched. 10 Damaged items which cannot be repaired shall be replaced. 11 12 D. CLEANUP: 13 1. Upon completion of installation, the installer shall clean all installed items of 14 pencil and ink marks, and broom clean the area of operation, depositing debris 15 in containers provided by the general contractor.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 127 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 08305: ACCESS PANELS 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. The General Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and 7 equipment for a complete installation of lockable metal access panels to provide 8 access area under the east stairway, to each toilet room plumbing chase, access 9 to all heat and plumbing main valves (in finished areas) and all other concealed 10 mechanical, electrical and plumbing equipment requiring maintenance, 11 adjustment or service as specified herein and as necessary for a complete and 12 proper installation. 13 14 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 15 1. All fire rated access panels shall UL approved. 16 2. All fire rated access panels shall bear the UL label of the same rating as the 17 assembly in which they are located. 18 19 C. SUBMISSIONS: 20 1. The Contractor shall provide manufacturers' catalogue cut sheets and 21 specifications for all materials specified in this section. 22 23 D. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 24 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 25 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 26 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 27 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 28 information specifically related to work of this section: 29 Section 04100: Masonry 30 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 31 Section 09260: Gypsum Drywall 32 DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING (On Liberty Drawings) 33 DIVISION 15 – HVAC (On Liberty Drawings) 34 DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL (On Liberty Drawings) 35 36 II. PRODUCTS 37 38 A. ACCESS PANELS: 39 1. Access panels shall be SERIES BAR as manufactured by BAR-CO, a Division OF 40 METAL SERVICE COMPANY, INC., Hwy 84 By Pass East, P.O. Box 1334, Enterprise, 41 Alabama 36331, (205) 347-9451; or approved equal. 42 a. Plumbing chase access panels shall be selected from SERIES 300 for 43 metal partition wall installation. 44 b. Rated assemblies shall have rated access panels of the same rating as 45 the assembly. 46 c. Plumbing chase access panels size shall be 16”w. x 48” ht. as shown 47 on the drawings or as required to provide convenient access as required. 48 d. Access panels in exterior ceilings and soffits shall be galvanized steel 49 suitable for painting in the field by the same manufacturer. 50 e. Panels shall be field painted or shop painted in color as selected by 51 the Owner. 52 f. Exterior access panels shall be thermally insulated or shall have 53 moveable / removable thermal insulation installed behind. 54 g. Panel types shall be coordinated to frame with the material in which it 55 is located. 56 h. Rated assemblies shall have rated access panels of the same rating as 57 the assembly.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 128 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 i. Panels shall be flush. 2 j. All access doors shall be provided with cylinder lock and two keys. 3 k. All doors shall be keyed alike. 4 l. Frames shall be fabricated of 16 ga. steel, doors of 14 ga. 5 m. Drywall and plaster framing beads shall be galvanized steel. 6 n. Finish shall be baked enamel primer. 7 o. Hinges shall be double acting concealed spring to permit 175 degree 8 opening. 9 p. Panels shall be removable by taking pin out of hinge leaf attached to 10 the panel. 11 q. Size shall be as shown on the drawings or as required to properly 12 access the concealed equipment. 13 r. Sizes may be adjusted with the review and approval of the architect 14 and the Owner to coordinate with field framing conditions. 15 16 II. EXECUTION 17 18 A. EXAMINATION: 19 1. Verify that frames are set square, plumb, level, and in plane. 20 21 B. INSTALLATION: 22 1. Install all work in conformance with the Architectural Woodwork Standards, 23 latest edition. 24 a. Installation shall conform to the AWS Grade of the items being 25 installed. 26 1. Installation of all access panels shall be in complete compliance with the 27 recommendations of the access panel manufacturers. 28 2. Doors shall be secured in place square, plumb, & level. 29 3. Hardware shall be installed complete and as recommended by the 30 manufacturer.. 31 4. Check alignment of door, frame and hardware for proper clearances and free, 32 smooth operation. 33 34 C. ADJUSTING & TOUCH-UP: 35 1. Before completion of the installation, the installer shall adjust all moving and 36 operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 37 2. All nicks, chips, and scratches in the finish shall be filled and retouched. 38 Damaged items which cannot be repaired shall be replaced. 39 40 D. CLEANUP: 41 1. Upon completion of installation, the installer shall clean all installed items of 42 pencil and ink marks, and broom clean the area of operation, depositing debris 43 in containers provided by the general contractor. 44 45 46 47

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 129 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 08400: ALUMINUM ENTRANCES, DOORS & STOREFRONTS 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. The General Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and 7 equipment to install exit/entrance framing, and doors as shown on the drawings, 8 specified herein and as necessary to properly complete the work of the contract. 9 2. Section Includes: YKK AP Aluminum Entrances, glass and glazing, and door 10 hardware and components. 11 a. YKK AP Series 35D Medium Stile Swing Entrances. 12 3. Entrance Performance Requirements: 13 a. Air Infiltration (Single Acting Butt Hinges or Offset Pivots): Air 14 infiltration shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283-91 at static 15 pressure of 1.57 PSF (7 Pa). Infiltration shall not exceed the following: 16 1) For 35DH Pair of Doors: 1.20 CFM/FT² of total door and frame 17 area. 18 b. Structural: Corner strength shall be tested per YKK AP's dual moment 19 load test procedure and certified by an independent testing laboratory to 20 ensure weld compliance and corner integrity 21 c. Door Structural: Door corner structural strength shall be tested per 22 YKK AP’s dual moment test procedure and certified by an independent 23 testing laboratory to ensure corner integrity and weld compliance. 24 Certified test procedures andresults are available upon request. 25 d. Uniform Load Test: For 35D Pair of Doors: 50 psf. 26 e. Forced Entry Resistance: 300 lbs. satisfactory. 27 28 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 29 1. Qualifications: 30 a. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced (as determined by 31 contractor) to perform work of this section who has specialized in the 32 installation of work similar to that required for this project and who is 33 acceptable to product manufacturer. 34 b. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing field 35 service representation during construction, approving acceptable installer 36 and approving application method. 37 2. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project 38 requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions, and 39 manufacturer’s warranty requirements. 40 41 C. SUBMITTALS: 42 1. General: The Contractor shall provide manufacturers' catalogue cut sheets 43 and specifications for all materials specified in this section. 44 2. The Contractor shall provide hardware lists and templates for all metal doors 45 to the metal door manufacturers. 46 3. Hardware schedules shall be provided to the Architect for review and approval 47 4. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 48 a. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance with 49 specified performance characteristics. 50 51 D. PROJECT CONDITIONS / SITE CONDITIONS: 52 1. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field 53 measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop 54 drawings.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 130 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2. Coordinate field measurements, fabrication schedule with construction 2 progress to avoid construction delays. 3 4 D. WARRANTY: 5 1. Project Warranty: Refer to “Conditions of the Contract” for project warranty 6 provisions. 7 2. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's 8 standard warranty document executed by an authorized company official. 9 3. Manufacturer’s Product Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, 10 manufacturer’s warranty for entrance system as follows: 11 a. Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s one (1) year standard warranty 12 commencing on the substantial date of completion for the project 13 provided that the warranty, in no event, shall start later than six (6) 14 months from the date of shipment by YKK AP America Inc. 15 16 E. DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING: 17 1. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead- time 18 requirements to avoid construction delays. 19 2. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Deliver materials in 20 manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification 21 labels intact. 22 3. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful 23 weather conditions. 24 4. Handle entrance doors and components to avoid damage. 25 a. Protect entrance doors against damage from elements, construction 26 activities, and other hazards before, during and after entrance 27 installation. 28 29 F. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 30 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 31 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 32 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 33 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 34 information specifically related to work of this section: 35 Section 04100: CMU Masonry 36 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 37 Section 08100: Metal Doors & Frames 38 Section 08200: Wood Doors 39 Section 08710: Finish Hardware 40 41 II. PRODUCTS: 42 43 A. MANUFACTURERS: (Acceptable Manufacturers/Products) 44 1. Acceptable Manufacturers 45 a. Basis of Design: 46 YKK AP America Inc. 47 Riverside Parkway 48 Austell, GA 30168 49 Telephone: (678) 838-6000; Fax: (678) 838-6001 50 b. Storefront System: YKK AP YES 45 TU Storefront System. 51 c. Or approved equal. 52 2. Storefront Framing System: 53 a. Description: Center set, exterior flush glazed; jambs and vertical 54 mullions continuous; head, sill, intermediate horizontal attached by screw

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 131 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 spline joinery or shear block attachment. 2 b. Components: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum mullions, 3 90 degree corner posts, entrance door framing, and indicated shapes. 4 c. Thermal Barrier: Provide continuous thermal barrier by means of a 5 poured and debridged pocket consisting of a two-part, chemically curing 6 high density polyurethane which is bonded to the aluminum by YKK 7 ThermaBond Plus®. Systems employing non-structural thermal barriers 8 are not acceptable. 9 3. Medium Stile Swing Doors: YKK AP Series 35D/35DH Medium Stile Swing 10 Doors. 11 a. Description: 3-1/2" (88.9 mm) Door Stile 12 13 B. MATERIALS: 14 1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063-T5 Aluminum Alloy. 15 2. Aluminum Sheet: 16 a. Anodized Finish: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 5005-H14 Aluminum 17 Alloy, 0.050" (1.27 mm) 18 minimum thickness. 19 b. Painted Finish: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003-H14 Aluminum 20 Alloy, 0.080" (1.95 mm) minimum thickness. 21 22 C. ACCESSORIES: 23 1. Manufacturer's Standard Accessories: 24 a. Fasteners: Zinc plated steel concealed fasteners; Hardened aluminum 25 alloys or AISI 300 series stainless steel exposed fasteners. 26 b. Glazing: Setting blocks, edge blocks, and spacers in accordance with 27 ASTM C 864, shore durometer hardness as recommended by 28 manufacturer; Glazing gaskets in accordance with ASTM C 864. 29 c. 0.050 Aluminum Sill Flashing End Dams must have 3 point 30 attachment. 31 32 D. RELATED MATERIALS: (Specified In Other Sections) 33 1. Sealants: Refer to Joint Treatment (Sealants) Section. 34 2. Glass: Tempered Insulating Glass: Glazing in doors and windows adjacent to 35 doors shall be tempered insulating glass (Refer to Glass and Glazing Section). 36 37 E. FABRICATION: 38 1. Shop Assembly: Fabricate and assemble units with joints only at intersection 39 of aluminum members with uniform hairline joints; rigidly secure, and sealed in 40 accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 41 a. Hardware: Drill and cut to template for hardware. Reinforce frames 42 and door stiles to receive hardware in accordance with manufacturer's 43 recommendations. 44 b. Welding: Conceal welds on aluminum members in accordance with 45 AWS recommendations or methods recommended by manufacturer. 46 Members showing welding bloom or discoloration on finish or material 47 distortion will be rejected. 48 49 F. FINISHES & COLORS: 50 1. YKK AP America Anodized Plus® Finish: 51 CODE DESCRIPTION 52 YS1N* Clear Anodized Plus® 53 (* ) Indicates standard finish usually carried as inventory. 54 Anodized Plus® is an advanced sealing technology that completely

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 132 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 seals the anodic film yielding superior durability (See AAMA 612). 2 2. Anodized Finishing: Prepare aluminum surfaces for specified finish; apply 3 shop finish in accordance with the following: 4 a. Anodic Coating: Electrolytic color coating followed by an organic seal 5 applied in accordance with the requirements of AAMA 612. Aluminum 6 extrusions shall be produced from quality controlled billets meeting AA- 7 6063-T5. 8 1) Exposed Surfaces shall be free of scratches and other serious 9 blemishes. 10 2) Extrusions shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic 11 oxide treatment and then sealed with an organic coating applied 12 with an electrodeposition process. 13 3) The anodized coating shall comply with all of the requirements 14 of AAMA 612: Voluntary Specifications, Performance 15 Requirements and Test Procedures for Combined Coatings of 16 Anodic Oxide and Transparent Organic Coatings on Architectural 17 Aluminum. Testing shall demonstrate the ability of the finish to 18 resist damage from mortar, salt spray, and chemicals commonly 19 found on construction sites, and to resist the loss of color and 20 gloss. 21 4) Overall coating thickness for finishes shall be a minimum of 22 0.7 mils. 23 a) CASS Corrosion Resistance Test, CASS 240/ASTM B368 24 Test Method. 25 b) Other AAMA 2605 Performance Tests specified in these 26 specifications, such as: 7.3 Dry Film Hardness; 7.8.2 Salt 27 Spray Resistance; 7.9.1.2 Color Retention, South Florida; 28 7.9.1.4 Gloss Retention, South Florida. 29 3. High Performance Organic Coating Finish: 30 a. Type Factory applied two-coat 70% Kynar resin by Arkema or 70% 31 Hylar resin by Solvay Solexis, fluoropolymer based coating system, 32 Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVF-2), applied in accordance with YKK AP 33 procedures and meeting AAMA 2605 specifications. 34 b. Colors: Selected by Architect from the following: 35 1) Standard coating color charts. 36 2) Custom coating color charts. 37 3) Color Name and Number: 38 4. Finishes Testing: 39 a. Apply 0.5% solution NaOh, sodium hydroxide, to small area of finished 40 sample area; leave in place for sixty minutes; lightly wipe off NaOh; Do 41 not clean area further. 42 b. Submit samples with test area noted on each sample. 43 44 III. EXECUTION 45 46 A. MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS/RECOMMENDATIONS: 47 1. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product installation data and 48 recommendations for installation requirements of doors, frames, hardware, and 49 other components in accordance with manufacturer’s warranty provisions. 50 51 B. EXAMINATION: 52 1. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have been 53 previously installed under other sections) are acceptable for product installation 54 in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 133 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2. Verify openings are sized to receive window units and sill plate is level in 2 accordance with manufacturer’s acceptable tolerances. 3 a. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements for window installation. 4 5 C. PREPARATION: 6 1. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces 7 from damage during product installation. 8 9 D. INSTALLATION: 10 1. General: Install entrance system in accordance with manufacturer’s 11 instructions and AAMA storefront and entrance guide specifications manual. 12 Provide support and anchor in place. 13 a. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate 14 construction tolerances and other irregularities. 15 b. Protect aluminum members in contact with masonry, steel, concrete, 16 or dissimilar materials using nylon pads or bituminous coating. 17 c. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten 18 system to building structure. 19 d. Shim and brace aluminum system before anchoring to structure. 20 e. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp and twist. Maintain 21 assembly dimensional tolerances aligning with adjacent work. 22 f. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. 23 g. Adjusting: Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 24 25 2. Related Products Installation Requirements: 26 a. Sealants (Perimeter): Refer to Division 7 Joint Treatment (Sealants) 27 Section. 28 b. Glass: Refer to Division 8 Glass & Glazing Section. 29 1) Reference: ANZI Z97.1, CPSC 16 CFR 1201 and GANA Glazing 30 Manual. 31 32 E. ADJUSTING & CLEANING: 33 1. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. 34 Repair or replace damaged installed products. 35 a. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s 36 instructions, prior to owner’s acceptance. 37 b. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of 38 debris. 39 2. Protection: Protect installed product’s finish surfaces from damage during 40 construction. 41 a. Protect aluminum windows from damage from grinding and polishing 42 compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful contaminants. 43 b. Remove and replace damaged aluminum windows at no extra cost. 44 45

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 134 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 15, 2019

1 SECTION – 08610 REPLACEMENT WINDOWS 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work 6 The General Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for a 7 complete installation of replacement windows as shown on the drawings, specified 8 herein and as necessary to complete the construction. 9 10 B. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 11 1. Performance Requirements: Provide products/systems that have been 12 manufactured, fabricated, and installed to the following performance criteria: 13 a. Comply with ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. 14 b. Performance Class: H-LC 25 15 c. Performance Grade: 25 16 d. U-Factor (NFRC 100): 0.33 17 e. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) (NFRC 200): 33 18 f. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC) (ASTM E90): 21 19 g. Sound Transmission Class (STC) (ASTM E90): 26 20 2. Structural Requirements: Provide products/systems capable of withstanding 21 wind loads based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project 22 that pass AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Structural Load Test: 23 a. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to 24 Product from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per 25 second) at 33 feet (10 meters) above grade, according to ASCE, Section 6, 26 based upon mean roof heights indicated on Drawings. 27 b. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph 28 c. Importance Factor: 1 = 1.0 29 e. Exposure Category: B 30 f. Wind Load Requirement: 20 psf 31 32 C. SUBMITTALS 33 1. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the 34 Contract and Division 01 Submittal Procedures Section. 35 2. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation guides. 36 3. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings indicating direction of operable parts, 37 typical jamb, head and sill conditions, and special mullion reinforcement details. 38 4. Color Samples: Submit selection and verification samples, including the 39 following: 40 5. Hardware: Submit samples indicating typical finish on window hardware. 41 6. Cladding: Submit color samples of vinyl cladding. 42 7. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 43 a. Warranty documents specified herein. 44 b. Owner’s Manual: Bound manual clearly identified with project name, 45 location, and completion date. Identify type and size of units installed. 46 Provide recommendations for periodic inspections, care, and 47 maintenance. Identify common causes of damage with instructions for 48 temporary repair. 49

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 135 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 15, 2019

1

2 D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 3 1. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience 4 on projects of similar size and complexity. 5 2. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals: State of Pennsylvania Universal 6 Construction Code (UCC) per the International Code Council (ICC) Regulations. 7 3. Certifications: 8 a. Insulating Glass Units: Provide insulating glass units permanently 9 marked with certification label of Insulating Glass Certification Council 10 (IGCC) indicating compliance. 11 4. Pre-installation Meetings: A pre-installation meeting shall be held at a 12 mutually agreed time and place, prior to commencement of any construction 13 activities. The purpose of this meeting will be to review the conditions and 14 establish the field measurement quidelines of existing window openings prior to 15 ordering the replacement windows. 16 17 E. DELIVERY, STORAGE, and HANDLING 18 1. General: Comply with Division 01 Product Requirements Section. 19 a. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time 20 requirements to avoid construction delays. 21 2. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original unopened, undamaged 22 containers with identification labels intact. 23 3. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful 24 environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions 25 recommended by the manufacturer. 26 a. Store materials and accessories off ground, under cover, and 27 protected from weather and construction activities. 28 29 F. PROJECT CONDITIONS 30 1. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field 31 measurements before fabrication. Record measurements on shop drawings. 32 Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction 33 progress to avoid construction delays. 34 a. Install units in accordance with manufacturer’s safety and weather 35 requirements 36 G. WARRANTY 37 1. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s 38 standard limited warranty document. Manufacturer’s limited warranty is in 39 addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract 40 documents. 41 42 D. RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENTS 43 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 44 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 45 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 46 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 47 information specifically related to work of this section: 48 Section 06100: Rough and Finish Carpentry 49

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 136 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 15, 2019

1 II. PRODUCTS 2 3 A. MANUFACTURER: Provide products from the following manufacturer: 4 1. Andersen Windows, Inc.,100 4th Ave. N, .Bayport, MN 55003-1096, Phone: 5 (800) 299-9029, . Fax: (800) 752-9230, E-mail: 6 [email protected]., www.andersenwindows.com . 7 8 B. METAL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS: 9 1. Proprietary Products/Systems: Metal clad picture over awning windows, 10 including the following: 11 a. Andersen® E-Series picture unit paired over awning replacement 12 windows at locations as indicated on the drawings. 13 2. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted. 14 15 C. MATERIALS 16 1. Construction: 17 a. Cladding: Extruded aluminum, minimum thickness 0.050 inch (1.27 18 mm). 19 b. Frame: Preservative treated laminated veneer lumber. 20 c. Interior Exposed Frame: Preservative treated solid lumber, kiln dried 21 and suitable for stain or painted finish. 22 d. Sash: Preservative treated solid lumber, kiln dried and suitable for stain 23 or painted finish. 24 2. Wood Species: Pine 25 3. Interior Finish: 26 a. Painted Factory Applied before assembly: White. 27 4. Exterior Finish: 28 a. Anodized Frame: Architectural quality, in compliance with AAMA 611 29 Class I , Color: S.B.O. 30 b. Anodized Sash: Architectural quality, in compliance with AAMA 611 31 Class, Color: S.B.O. 32 33 D. GLAZING 34 1. General: Insulating glass units certified through the Insulating Glass 35 Certification Council as conforming to the requirements of IGCC. Provide dual 36 sealed units consisting of polyisobutylene primary seal and silicone secondary 37 seal. Provide metal spacers with bent or soldered corners. 38 2. High-Performance™ Low-E4™ Glass, Argon Blend Filled Insulating Glass 39 Units: 40 Glass: Insulating glass units consisting of an outboard lite of clear annealed 41 glass conforming to ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3 and an inboard lite of 42 clear annealed glass conforming to ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. 43 44 E. ACCESSORIES 45 1. Insect Screens: 46 a. Frames: Half height 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) rolled aluminum frame with 47 chromate conversion coating. Provide matching corner locks and latch 48 retainers. 49 b. Insect Screen Cloth: 18 by 16 aluminum mesh, gunmetal finish.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 137 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 15, 2019

1 c. Frame Finish: High-bake polyester finish in the following color: 2 Frame Finish: White. 3 4 F. FABRICATION 5 Preservative Treatment: Treat wood sash and frame members after machining 6 with water repellent preservative in accordance with WDMA I.S.4. 7 8 III. EXECUTION

9 A. MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS 10 1. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the window 11 manufacturer.

12 B. EXAMINATION 13 1. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that site conditions are acceptable for 14 installation of units, including the following: 15 2. Concrete surfaces are dry and free of excess mortar, rocks, sand, and other 16 construction debris 17 3. Masonry openings are square and dimensions are correct. 18 4. Rough openings are square and dimensions are correct. 19 5. Sill plates are level. 20 6. Existing wood framed window openings are dry, clean, sound, and well nailed 21 or glued, free of voids and without offsets at joints. 22 7. Nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in openings and within 3 inches (75 23 mm) of rough opening. 24 8. Do not proceed with installation of units until unacceptable conditions are 25 corrected.

26 C. PREPARATION 27 1. Check measurements to confirm correct unit size. 28 2. Cut varnish/paint seal and remove and save interior stops. 29 3. Cut bottom sash balance cords, if present. Remove bottom sash and dispose 30 of properly. 31 4. Remove parting stops. 32 5. Lower top sash and cut top sash balance cords, if present. Remove top sash 33 and dispose of properly. 34 6. Remove pulleys if present and dispose of properly. Fill pulley voids with 35 wood blocking. 36 7. Remove weight pocket covers and weights if present and dispose of properly. 37 Fill weight pockets with insulation.

38 D. INSTALLATION 39 1. General: 40 a. Remove insert components, parts, accessories, and installation guides 41 from carton. 42 b. Inspect insert components and verify that components are not 43 damaged and that parts are included before disposing of carton. 44 c. Shop-assemble multiple units before installation in accordance with

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 138 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 15, 2019

1 manufacturer’s installation guides. 2 2. Interface With Other Work: 3 a. Perform installation in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions. 4 Install units level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, 5 anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to 6 wall flashing and other adjacent construction. 7 b. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of 8 corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 9 Install insulation in shim space around unit perimeter to maintain 10 continuity of building insulation. Do not overfill. 11 c. Hold back exterior siding or other finish materials from edge of unit to 12 allow for expansion and contraction and installation of proper joint 13 sealant with backing materials. Seal perimeter of unit after exterior finish 14 is applied per requirements of Division 07 “Joint Sealants” Section. 15 d. Finish interior units per requirements specified in related sections. 16 Refer to, and comply with, additional requirements in manufacturer’s 17 installation guides. 18 e. Install optional hardware and unit accessories after cleaning. 19 D. SITE TOLERANCES: 20 1. Adjust operation, insect screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at 21 contact points and weatherstripping for smooth operation and weathertight 22 closure.

23 E. CLEANING 24 1. Clean units using cleaning material and methods specifically recommended 25 by window manufacturer. 26 2. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 27 3. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. 28 4. Protect unit surfaces from masonry cleaning solution that could damage 29 insulation glass panels or hardware. 30 5. Remove debris from work site and properly dispose of debris.

31 F. PROTECTION 32 1. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity 33 on the site. 34

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 139 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION 08560 BULLET RESISTANT TRANSACTION WINDOW 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for 7 a complete installation of bullet resistant transaction windows with HM frames, 8 and glazing as shown on the drawings, specified herein and as necessary to 9 properly complete the work to the complete satisfaction of the Owner. 10 2. Including: 11 a. Bullet Resistant Transaction Windows. 12 b. Bullet Resistant Devices. 13 c. Dip tray covers. 14 15 B. REFERENCES 16 1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 17 a. UL 752 - Standard for Bullet-Resisting Equipment. 18 19 C. SUBMITTALS 20 1. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 – Submittals & Substitutions. 21 2. Product Data: 22 a. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used. 23 b. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 24 c. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 25 d. Typical installation methods. 26 e. Chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and 27 patterns. 28 f. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, 29 minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square representing actual product, color, 30 and patterns. 31 g. Shop Drawings: Include details of materials, construction and finish. 32 Include relationship with adjacent construction. 33 34 D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 35 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products 36 specified in this section with a minimum five years documented experience. 37 2. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section 38 with minimum two years documented experience with projects of similar scope and 39 complexity. 40 3. Source Limitations: Provide each type of product from a single manufacturing 41 source to ensure uniformity. 42 43 E. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE 44 1. Convene a conference approximately two weeks before scheduled 45 commencement of the Work. Attendees shall include Architect, Contractor and 46 trades involved. Agenda shall include schedule, responsibilities, critical path items 47 and approvals. 48 49 F. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 50 1. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions 51 and recommendations. 52 2. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperature, and construction 53 operations. 54 55 G. PROJECT CONDITIONS

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 140 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 1. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) 2 within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. 3 2. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's 4 recommended limits. 5 6 H. SEQUENCING 7 1. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to 8 prevent interruption of construction progress. 9 10 I. WARRANTY 11 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty. 12 13 J. RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENTS 14 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 15 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 16 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 17 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 18 information specifically related to work of this section: 19 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry. 20 Section 06200: Finish Carpentry 21 Section 08100: Metal Doors & Frames 22 Section 08710: Finish Hardware 23 Section 09900: Painting & Finishing 24 25 II. PRODUCTS 26 27 A. MANUFACTURERS 28 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: North American Bullet Proof, P.O. Box 628 1144 29 Guadalupe Drive, Cibolo, TX 78108, phone: 888-746-8427, E-mail: 30 [email protected] 31 2. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of 32 Section 01300 – Submittals & Substitutions. 33 34 B. BULLET RESISTANT TRANSACTION WINDOWS 35 1. Basis of Design: EXTW-Prime Painted-Bolt-In- Plastic Laminate Counter 36 Transaction Window, Model EXTW3-P-BF-PL; as manufactured by North American 37 Bullet Proof. 38 2. EXTW Series transaction windows by North American Bullet Proof are designed 39 to allow for both voice communication and the passing of documents or currency 40 without compromising the safety of the staff. This “fixed” transaction windows is 41 provided with a “voice around” passive communication system for interior 42 applications. NABP outfits the EXTW’s with a plastic laminate parcel shelf 43 incorporating an MDT series stainless steel deal tray to pass documents or cash. 44 2. Performance & Design Requirements: 45 a. Bullet Resistance: UL 752, Level 3. 46 b. Finish: Factory applied rust-inhibiting primer. 47 c. Frame: 48 1) Opening Size: As indicated on Drawings. 49 2) Profile: Single rabbeted.. 50 3) Profile Dimensions: As indicated on the Drawings. 51 4) Three sided frame bolted to deal tray and voice panel frame. 52 5) Corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 53 3. Glazing: UL Level 3- Bullet Resistant Glass, SECUR-TEM+Poly SP311, as 54 manufactured by Global Security Glazing. 55 a. Ul Standard 752-Level 3

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 141 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 a. Thickness: 1-1/8” 2 3. Deal Tray: 3 a. Single deal tray: Deal tray sized to pass items not exceeding 8” x 8” 4 inches 5 b. Material: Stainless steel. 6 c. Drop-in Tray: Modified non-labeled assembly with 3-sided frame: 7 Natural voice transmission spacers. 8 9 III. EXECUTION 10 11 A. EXAMINATION 12 1. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly constructed and 13 prepared. 14 2. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect 15 in writing of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 16 17 B. PREPARATION 18 1. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 19 2. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for 20 achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 21 22 C. INSTALLATION 23 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, approved submittals, and 24 UL 752, and in proper relationship with adjacent construction. 25 2. Install all equipment plumb, level, rigid and in true alignment. 26 3. Set equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations. 27 Use proper anchoring devices for the material to be anchored to. All exposed 28 anchor holes shall be used for anchoring. 29 4. Anchor frames securely in place to supports. Use attachment methods 30 permitting adjustment for construction tolerances, irregularities, alignment, and 31 expansion and contraction. 32 Installation tolerances: Do not exceed the following installation tolerances: 33 5. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) measured on a line, 90 degrees 34 from one jamb, at the upper corner of the frame at the other jamb. 35 6. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) measured on jambs on a 36 horizontal line parallel to the plane of the wall 37 7. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) measured at face corners of jambs on 38 parallel lines perpendicular to the plane of the wall. 39 8. Plumb: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) measured on the jamb at the floor. 40 9. Adjust installed doors for correct function and smooth operation. 41 42 D. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 43 1. Field Inspection: Coordinate field inspection in accordance with appropriate 44 sections in Division 01. 45 2. Manufacturer's Services: Coordinate manufacturer's services in accordance with 46 appropriate sections in Division 01. 47 48 E. CLEANING AND PROTECTION 49 1. Clean products in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. 50 Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 51 2. Protect installed products until completion of project. 52

53

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 142 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 08710: FINISH HARDWARE 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. Provide all labor and materials tools and equipment for a complete 7 installation of hardware as shown on the drawing, as specified herein and as 8 necessary to complete the construction. 9 10 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 11 1. The contractor shall engage the services of a member of the American Society 12 of Architectural Hardware Consultants to prepare a detailed hardware schedule, 13 check shop drawings, and supervise installation of all finish hardware. 14 a. The hardware consultant shall be responsible for all coordination and 15 detailing of finish hardware. 16 17 C. SUBMITTAL: 18 1. Prepare and submit for the review and approval of the Architect a complete 19 hardware schedule, indicating type and operation of all hardware on all doors. 20 2. Submit manufacture’s catalog sheet and specifications on each hardware 21 item. 22 23 D. HANDLING: 24 1. Each hardware item shall be individually packaged. 25 2. Deliver all hardware items to the work site in their manufacturers' original 26 packaging displaying manufacturer, brand name, and identifying code as 27 applicable. 28 3. Store all hardware indoors, protected from the weather, moisture and 29 extremes of heat and cold. 30 31 E. ALLOWANCE: 32 1. The Contractor shall include an allowance of $12,000.00 for the purchase 33 and delivery of hardware materials only. 34 2. Labor to install door hardware shall be included in the base contract price. 35 36 F. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 37 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 38 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 39 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 40 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 41 information specifically related to work of this section: 42 Section 08100: Steel Doors & Frames 43 Section 08200: Wood Doors 44 Section 08400: Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts 45 46 II. PRODUCTS 47 48 A. GENERAL HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: 49 1. Hinges: 50 a. All doors 6'-0" or more in height shall have three hinges per door. 51 b. Doors 7'-6" or more in height shall have four hinges per door. 52 c. Hinges for exterior doors shall have non-removable pins. 53 d. Hinges for steel or aluminum doors shall have concealed ball-bearing 54 or Stanite type bearings. 55 e. All hinges shall have button tip pins. 56 f. Furnish butt hinges which permit full 180 degree swing of doors. 57 2. Locks::

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 143 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 a. Locks shall be listed cylindrical type. 2 b. Locks shall be Heavy Duty as manufactured by BEST. 3 3. Keypad Locksets: 4 a. Keypad Locksets shall be similar & compatible with keypads locksets 5 used on the existing Police Station Wing, as manufactured by SARGENT, 6 Assa Abloy. 7 b. Profile Series v.G1.5 Cylindrical Lock 8 3. Closers: 9 a. Closers shall be cast iron alloy, non-handed, full cover, full rack and 10 pinion, hardened steel spindle, needle roller bearings, and shall have 15% 11 power adjustment and be tested to exceed ANSI 156.4, Grade 1. 12 b. Closers shall be CORBIN series DC-2210. 13 4. Door Holders & Stops: 14 a. Whenever possible wall type bumpers shall be used for interior doors. 15 b. Bumper are to have proper type of fastening devices of construction to 16 which is it is attached. 17 5. Silencers: 18 a. All doors in metal frames shall have rubber silencers, three per single 19 door leaf. 20 6. Push-Pulls: 21 a. Push-pulls shall match and be coordinated with locking/latching 22 hardware. 23 7. Thresholds: 24 a. Handicapped accessible, aluminum, all exterior doors. 25 8. Weather-stripping: 26 a. Bottom brush sweeps with pressure sensitive preformed rubber at 27 head and both jambs. 28 9. Exit Devices: 29 a. Panic devices shall be provided at all exterior exit doors and all 30 interior exit doors where entry control may be required. 31 b. Exit devices for single doors shall be MONARCH 18R SERIES with 32 dogging operation. 33 10. Fasteners: 34 a. Furnish all necessary fastening hardware. 35 b. All exposed fasteners shall match the finish of the hardware item on 36 which they are installed. 37 12. Fire Exit Hardware: 38 a. All hardware on fire rated doors shall UL rated fire exit hardware. 39 13. Trim: 40 a. Levers shall be provided (conforming per ADA accessibility guidelines) 41 at all swing doors unless noted otherwise. 42 b. Trim shall be Grade 1 for all swing doors as manufactured by BEST, 43 CORBIN, RUSSWIN, SARGENT, SCHLAGE or approved equal 44 1) Provide non-removable hinge pins on all exterior doors. 45 2) Provide door stops on all swinging doors. 46 3) Weather-strip all exterior doors. 47 48 III. EXECUTION 49 50 A. INSTALLATION: 51 1. Mount hardware at heights as recommended by the Americans with 52 Disabilities Act. 53 2. Install each hardware item in accordance with manufacturer's requirements 54 and recommendations. 55 3. Check alignment of door, frame and hardware for proper clearances and free, 56 smooth operation. 57

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 144 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 B. ADJUSTING: 2 1. Before completion of the installation, the installer shall adjust all moving and 3 operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 4 5 C. CLEANUP: 6 1. Upon completion of installation, the installer shall clean all installed items of 7 pencil and ink marks, and broom clean the area of operation, depositing debris 8 in containers provided by the general contractor. 9 10

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 145 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 08810: GLASS & GLAZING 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work 6 The General Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment to 7 install the glass/glazing to the aluminum entrance doors as shown on the drawings, 8 specified herein and as necessary to properly complete the work of the contract. 9 1. Section Includes: 10 a. Flat glass materials. 11 b. Insulating glass units. 12 c. Glazing accessories. 13 14 B. REFERENCES: 15 1. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in 16 Buildings—Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. 17 2. ASTM C 162 - Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products. 18 3. ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal 19 Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers. 20 4. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 21 5. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass—Kind HS, 22 Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 23 6. ASTM C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. 24 7. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 25 8. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method For Determining the Rate of Air Leakage 26 Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure 27 Differences Across the Specimen. 28 9. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior 29 Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 30 10. ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating 31 Glass Units. 32 11. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 33 12. ASTM E 1300 - Standard Practice for Determining the Minimum Thickness 34 and Type of Glass Required to Resist a Specified Load. 35 13. GANA (GM) - FGMA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America. 36 14. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America. 37 15. GANA (LGDG) - Laminated Glass Design Guide; Glass Association of North 38 America. 39 40 C. DEFINITIONS: 41 1. Sealed Insulating Glass Unit Surfaces: 42 a. Side 1 - Exterior surface of outer pane. 43 b. Side 2 - Interior surface of outer pane. 44 c. Side 3 - Interior surface of inner pane. 45 d. Side 4 - Exterior surface of inner pane. 46 47 D. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: 48 1. Design requirements: 49 a. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads 50 acting normal to plane of glass in accordance with the International 51 Building Code 2000. 52 b. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads 53 acting normal to plane of glass to a design pressure of 25 pound per 54 square foot in accordance with ASTM E 1300. 55 c. Limit glass deflection to ¾ inch or flexure limit of glass with full 56 recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 57 E. SUBMITTALS

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 146 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 1. General: Prepare, review, approve, and submit product data, shop drawings, 2 samples, and other submittals in accordance with “Conditions of the Contract” 3 and Division 1 Submittals Sections. Product data, shop drawings, samples, and 4 similar submittals are defined in “Conditions of the Contract.” 5 2. Product Data: Flat glass materials manufacturer’s descriptive literature 6 indicating conformance to specified performance requirements for specified flat 7 glass materials. 8 3. Verification Samples: 9 a. Flat Glass Materials: Two 4 inch by 4 inch samples of each glass type 10 specified. 11 b. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Two 12 inch by 12 inch samples 12 representative of unit construction. 13 c. Opacifier for Spandrel Glass: Indicated match to Architect's color 14 selection. 15 4. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 16 a. Design Data: Glass size calculations, prepared in accordance with 17 specified method. 18 b. Certificates: a. Contractor’s certification that: 19 1) Products of this section, as provided, meet or exceed specified 20 requirements. 21 2) Fabricator of sealed insulating glass units meets specified 22 qualifications. 23 3) Installer of products of this section meets specified 24 qualifications. 25 26 F. QUALITY ASSURANCE 27 1. Qualifications: 28 a. Manufacturer, Flat Glass Materials: Minimum five (5) years documented 29 experience producing glass products specified this section. 30 b. Fabricator, Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Minimum five (5) years 31 documented experience producing sealed insulating glass units specified 32 this section. 33 c. Installer: Minimum five (5) years documented experience installing 34 products specified in this section, and approved by fabricator. 35 36 G. PROJECT/ SITE CONDITIONS 37 1. Environmental Requirements: Installation of glass products at ambient air 38 temperature below 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) is prohibited. 39 2. Field Measurements: When construction schedule permits, verify field 40 measurements with drawing dimensions prior to fabrication of glass products. 41 42 H. WARRANTY 43 1. Provide ten (10) year warranty to include replacement of sealed glass units 44 exhibiting seal failure, interpane dusting or misting. 45 2. Provide ten (10) year warranty to include replacement for laminated glass 46 exhibiting delamination. 47 3. Provide a written 5-year warranty from date of manufacture for Viraspan™ 48 ceramic frit spandrel glass. Warranty covers deterioration due to normal 49 conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary 50 to the glass manufacturer’s published instructions. 51 52 I. MAINTENANCE: 53 1. Extra Materials: Supply two of each size and type of insulating glass units. 54 55 J. RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENTS 56 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 147 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 2 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 3 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 4 information specifically related to work of this section: 5 6 Section 08400: Aluminum Entrances 7 8 II. PRODUCTS 9 10 A. MANUFACTURER 11 1. Acceptable Manufacturers, Flat Glass Materials: SUN MANAGEMENT GLASS 12 SYSTEM, supplied by PILKINGTON; P.O. Box 799, 811 Madison Ave., Toledo, OH 13 43697-0799; Telephone 419-247-4721, FAX 419-247-4517. 14 2. Substitutions: 15 a. General: Refer to Division 1 Substitutions for procedures and 16 submission requirements. 17 1) Pre-Contract (Bidding Period) Substitutions: Submit written 18 requests ten (10) days prior to bid date. 19 2) Post-Contract (Construction Period) Substitutions: Submit 20 written request in order to avoid window installation and 21 construction delays. 22 b. Substitution Documentation 23 1) Product Literature and Drawings: Submit product literature and 24 drawings modified to suit specific project requirements and job 25 conditions. 26 2) Certificates: Submit certificate(s) certifying substitute 27 manufacturer (1) attesting to adherence to specification 28 requirements for window 29 system performance criteria, and (2) has been engaged in the 30 design, manufacturer and fabrication of aluminum windows for a 31 period 32 of not less than ten (10) years. (Company Name) 33 3) Test Reports: Submit test reports verifying compliance with 34 each test requirement for window sizes required by the project. 35 4) Product Sample and Finish: Submit product sample, 36 representative of window size for the project, with specified finish 37 and color. 38 c. Substitution Acceptance: Acceptance will be in written form, either as 39 an addendum or modification, and documented by a formal change 40 order signed by the Owner and Contractor. 41 42 B. MATERIALS 43 1. Uncoated High Performance Tinted Float Glass 44 a. Acceptable Product: PILKINGTON EverGreen High-Performance Tint 45 b. Description: Uncoated High Performance Tinted Float Glass meeting 46 requirements of ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 2, Quality q3 47 c. Nominal Glass Thickness: ¼ inch (6 mm). 48 d. Performance Characteristics: 49 1) Visible Light Transmittance: 66 Percent 50 2) Visible Light Reflectance: 6 Percent. 51 3) Total Solar Energy Transmittance: 34 Percent. 52 4) Total Solar Energy Reflectance: 5 Percent. 53 5) UV Transmittance: 14 Percent. 54 6) Summer U-Value: 55 7) Winter U-Value: 56 8) Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.51

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 148 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 9) Shading Coefficient: 0.59 2 2. Solar-Control Low-Emmissivity Pyrolytic Float Glass 3 a. Acceptable Product: PILKINGTON Solar E™ Solar Control Low-E 4 b. Description: Solar-Control Low-Emmissivity Pyrolytic Float Glass 5 meeting requirements of ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3. 6 c. Nominal Glass Thickness: ¼ inch (6 mm). 7 d. Performance Characteristics: 8 1) Visible Light Transmittance: 61 Percent 9 2) Visible Light Reflectance: 10 Percent. 10 3) Total Solar Energy Transmittance: 44 Percent. 11 4) Total Solar Energy Reflectance: 11 Percent. 12 5) UV Transmittance: 43 Percent. 13 6) Summer U-Value: 14 7) Winter U-Value: 15 8) Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.52 16 9) Shading Coefficient: 0.61 17 3. Setting Blocks: ASTM C 864, neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; 18 length 4 inches (100 mm), width of glazing rabbet space less 1/16 inch (1.5 19 mm), height required for glazing method, pane weight, and pane area. 20 4. Spacer Shims: ASTM C 864, neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; 21 length 3 inches (75 mm), one half height of glazing stop, thickness required for 22 application , one face self-adhesive. 23 5. Glazing Tape: Butyl compound tape with integral resilient tube spacer, 10 to 24 15 Shore A durometer hardness, black color, coiled on release paper; widths 25 required for specified installation. 26 6. Glazing Tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, maximum water absorption 27 by volume 2 percent, designed for 25 percent compression percent for air barrier 28 and vapor retarder seal, black color, coiled on release paper over adhesive on 29 two sides; widths required for specified installation. 30 7. Glazing Splines: ASTM C 864, resilient polyvinyl chloride, extruded shape to 31 fit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. 32 8. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C 864, resilient polyvinyl chloride, extruded shape to 33 fit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. 34 9. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer’s standard type. 35 10. Sealants: Specified in Section 07900. 36 11. Silicone Polyester Enamel: Type recommended by flat glass materials 37 manufacturer; color selected by Architect. 38 39 C. FABRICATION 40 1. Acceptable Fabricators. 41 a. ALDERFER GLASS CO. 144, Telford Pike, P.O. Box 70, Telford, PA 42 18969-0070, Phone (215) 723-1192, Fax: (215) 723-3980 43 b. HUTTS GLASS CO., Inc. 1600 Swamp Pike, Gilbertsville, PA 19525, 44 Phone: (610) 369-1026, Fax: (610) 369-5023 45 c. Or another approved fabricator. 46 2. Heat-Strengthened Glass: 47 a. Cut float glass materials to indicated sizes and provide cut-outs and 48 holes, if indicated, before heat strengthening. 49 b. Heat strengthen float glass materials in accordance with ASTM C 50 1048, Kind HS. 51 3. Tempered Glass: 52 a. Cut float glass materials to indicated sizes and provide cut-outs and 53 holes, if indicated, before heat strengthening. 54 b. Fully temper float glass materials in accordance with ASTM C 1048, 55 Kind FT.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 149 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 4. Laminated Glass: 2 a. Cut float glass materials to indicated sizes and provide cut-outs and 3 holes, if indicated, before heat strengthening. 4 b. Heat strengthen float glass materials in accordance with ASTM C 5 1048, Kind HS. 6 c. Laminate plastic interlayer between glass panes in accordance with 7 ASTM C 1172. 8 d. Laminated glass to conform to GANA (LGDG) and requirements of 9 ANSI Z97.1. 10 5. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: 11 a. Fabricate units in accordance with ASTM E 774, Class CBA, with 12 components and performance characteristics specified in SCHEDULES 13 Article of this section. 14 b. Fabricate units in accordance with ASTM E 774, Class CBA: 15 c. Components: 16 1) Outer Pane: 17 a) Glass Type: PILKINGTON EverGreen High-Performance 18 Tint 19 b) Glass Color: Natural Green 20 c) Glass Thickness: ¼ inch (6 mm). 21 d) Heat Treating: Heat strengthened.* 22 e) Heat Treating: Fully tempered.* 23 2) Air Space: ½ inch wide, hermetically sealed, argon-filled. 24 3) Inner Pane: 25 a) Glass Type: PILKINGTON Solar E™ Solar Control Low-E 26 b) Glass Color: Clear 27 c) Glass Thickness: ¼ inch (6 mm). 28 d) Heat Treating: Heat strengthened.* 29 e) Heat Treating: Fully tempered.* 30 d. Performance Characteristics: 31 1) Visible Light Transmittance: 41 Percent 32 2) Visible Light Reflectance: 12 Percent. 33 3) Total Solar Energy Transmittance: 17 Percent. 34 4) Total Solar Energy Reflectance: 7 Percent. 35 5) UV Transmittance: 8 Percent. 36 6) Summer U-Value: 0.33 37 7) Winter U-Value: 0.29 38 8) Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.32 39 9) Shading Coefficient: 0.37 40 6 Provide unit edge seals meeting requirements of ASTM E 773, with aluminum 41 spacers having mitered and corners, and silicone sealant for glass-to-spacer 42 seals. 43 44 III. EXECUTION 45 46 A. ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS. 47 1. ALDERFER GLASS CO. 144, Telford Pike, P.O. Box 70, Telford, PA 18969- 48 0070, Phone (215) 723-1192, Fax: (215) 723-3980 49 2. HUTTS GLASS CO., Inc. 1600 Swamp Pike, Gilbertsville, PA 19525, Phone: 50 (610) 369-1026, Fax: (610) 369-5023 51 3. Or another approved installer. 52 53 B. EXAMINATION 54 1. Verify that openings for glazing are correct size and within tolerance. 55 2. Verify that glazing channels and recesses are clean and free of obstructions,

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 150 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 that weeps are clear, and that channels and recesses are ready for glazing. 2 3 C. PREPARATION 4 1. Clean contact surfaces to receive sealant with solvent; wipe dry. 5 2. Seal porous glazing channels and recesses with primer or sealer compatible 6 with substrate. 7 3. Prime surfaces to receive sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s 8 instructions. 9 10 D. INSTALLATION 11 1. Install Pyrolytic monolithic glass with Pyrolytic surface to exterior (Surface 1). 12 2. Install Pyrolytic monolithic glass with Pyrolytic surface to interior (Surface 2). 13 3. Install sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturers’ written instructions 14 and recommendations. 15 4. Exterior Dry Method (Tape and Gasket Spline): 16 a. Apply glazing tape or spline to glass; butt-joint tape edges; seal joints 17 with butyl sealant. 18 b. Place setting blocks with edge blocks maximum 6 inches from 19 glass edges and intermediate blocks at ¼ points of glass panel 20 length. 21 c. Set glass unit on setting blocks; apply pressure against fixed stop for 22 full contact. 23 d. Install removable stops without displacing glazing tape or spline; 24 apply pressure for full continuous contact. 25 e. Trim sight-exposed tape flush with stop. 26 2. Exterior Wet/dry Method (Formed Tape and Sealant): 27 a. Apply glazing tape to glass; butt-joint tape edges; seal joints with 28 butyl sealant. 29 b. Apply glazing tape to permanent stops, ¼ inch below sight line; butt- 30 joint tape edges; seal joints with butyl sealant. 31 c. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop 32 with frame; ensure full perimeter seal between glass and frame for 33 continuity of air and vapor seal. 34 d. Place setting blocks with edge blocks maximum 6 inches from glass 35 edges and intermediate blocks at ¼ points of glass panel length. e. 36 f. Set glass unit on setting blocks; apply pressure against fixed stop for 37 full contact. 38 g. Install removable stops without displacing glazing tape; insert spacer 39 strips between glazing and applied stops; terminate spacer strips ¼ inch 40 below sight line; apply pressure for full continuous contact. 41 h. Fill gap between glazing and stop with sealant to depth equal to bite 42 of frame on glazing and to 3/8 inch below sight line. 43 i. Apply cap bead of sealant along void between stop and glazing to 44 uniform line flush with sight line; tool sealant surface smooth. 45 3. Exterior Wet Method (Sealant and Sealant): 46 a. Place setting blocks at ¼ points; install glazing unit. 47 b. Install removable stops; center glass unit in space by inserting spacer 48 shims both sides at intervals of 24 inches; set spacer shims ¼ inch below 49 sight line. 50 c. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with sealant to depth equal to bite 51 of frame on glazing and to 3/8 inch below sight line; ensure full contact 52 with glazing for continuity of air and vapor seal. 53 d. Apply sealant to uniform line flush with sight line. Tool sealant surface 54 smooth. 55 4. Exterior Butt Glazed Method (Sealant Only): 56 a. Brace glass in position for duration of glazing process; mask edges of

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 151 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 glass at adjoining glass edges and between glass edges and framing 2 members. 3 b. Secure small diameter non-adhering foamed rod on back side of joint. 4 c. Apply sealant to open side of joint in continuous operation; completely 5 fill joint without displacing foam rod; tool sealant surface smooth to 6 concave profile. 7 d. Allow sealant to cure, then remove foam backer rod. 8 e. Apply sealant to opposite side; tool sealant smooth to concave profile. 9 f. Remove masking tape. 10 5. Interior Dry Method (Tape and Tape): 11 a. Apply glazing tape to permanent stops, allowing tape edge to project 12 1/16 inch above stop; butt-joint tape edges; seal joints with butyl 13 sealant. 14 b. Place setting blocks with edge blocks maximum 6 inches from glass 15 edges and intermediate blocks at ¼ points of glass panel length. 16 c. Set glass unit on setting blocks; apply pressure against fixed stop for 17 full contact. 18 d. Apply glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing as described above. 19 e. Install removable stops without displacing glazing tape; apply 20 pressure for full continuous contact. 21 f. Trim sight-exposed tape flush with stop. 22 6. Interior Wet/Dry Method (Tape and Sealant): 23 a. Apply glazing tape to glass; butt-joint tape edges; seal joints with 24 butyl sealant. 25 b. Place setting blocks with edge blocks maximum 6 inches from glass 26 edges and intermediate blocks at ¼ points of glass panel length. 27 c. Set glass unit on setting blocks; apply pressure against fixed stop for 28 full contact. 29 d. Install removable stops without displacing glazing tape; insert spacer 30 strips between glazing and applied stops; terminate spacer strips ¼ inch 31 below sight line; apply pressure for full continuous contact. 32 e. Fill gap between glazing and stop with sealant to depth equal to bite 33 of frame on glazing and to uniform line flush with sight line; tool sealant 34 surface smooth. 35 f. Trim sight-exposed tape flush with stop. 36 7. Interior Wet Method (Compound and Compound): 37 a. Place setting blocks at ¼ points; install glazing unit. 38 b. Install applied stops; center glass unit in space by inserting spacer 39 shims both sides at intervals of 24 inches; set spacer shims ¼ inch below 40 sight line. 41 c. Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers’ clips. 42 d. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound to flush 43 with sight line; tool surface to straight line. 44 8. Installation of glazing in aluminum entrances is specified in Section 08400. 45 46 E. CLEANING 47 1. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. 48 2. Remove labels after glass installation is complete. 49 3. Clean glass surfaces and adjacent surfaces. 50

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 152 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 DIVISION 9: FINISHES 2 3 SECTION - 09260: GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 4 5 I. GENERAL 6 7 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 8 1. Provide and install standard drywall, shaft wall, and fiberglass-mat faced, 9 moisture & mold resistant gypsum sheathing, and tile backer board as shown on 10 the drawings, as specified herein and as necessary for the proper completion of 11 the work to the complete satisfaction of the Owner. 12 13 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 14 1. Work shall comply with the standards of Underwriters' Laboratories for the 15 fire resistance assemblies indicated on the drawings and "Recommended 16 Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board" published by 17 the Gypsum Association, latest edition. 18 19 C. REFERENCES: 20 1. ASTM International (ASTM): 21 a. ASTM C473 Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum 22 Panel Products. 23 b. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal 24 Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 25 c. ASTM C1002 Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping 26 Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster 27 Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. 28 d. ASTM C1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate 29 for Use as Sheathing. 30 e. ASTM C1280 Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum 31 Sheathing. 32 f. ASTM D3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold 33 on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 34 g. ASTM D6329 Standard Guide for Developing Methodology for 35 Evaluating the Ability of Indoor Materials to Support Microbial Growth 36 Using Static Environmental Chambers. 37 h. ASTM E72 Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of 38 Panels for Building Construction. 39 i. ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of 40 Materials. 41 2. Gypsum Association (GA): GA-253 Application of Gypsum Sheathing. 42 43 D. SUBMITTALS: 44 1. Provide product manufacturers' specifications as necessary to establish 45 compliance with fire rating requirements. 46 2. Provide product manufacturers' recommendations for installation. 47 48 E. HANDLING: 49 1. Store materials in an enclosed place, off the floor, protected from extremes of 50 temperature and moisture. 51 2. Keep material dry at all times. 52 3. Store materials in a manner to prevent warping or bending. 53 54 F. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 55 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 56 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 153 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 2 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 3 information specifically related to work of this section: 4 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 5 Section 07213: Batt & Blanket Insulation 6 Section 09310: Ceramic Tile 7 Section 09500: Acoustical Tile & Ceiling Suspension System 8 II. PRODUCTS 9 10 A. INTERIOR GYPSUM MATERIALS: 11 1. INTERIOR GYPSUM MATERIALS shall be as manufactured by National Gypsum 12 Company, United States Gypsum Company or approved equal. 13 2. STANDARD GYPSUM BOARD. Basis of Design: Gold Bond® BRAND Gypsum Board 14 a. Core: Regular gypsum core 15 b. Surface Paper: 100 percent recycled content paper on front, back and 16 long edges 17 c. Long Edges: Tapered 18 d. Panel complies with requirements of ASTM C 1396 19 e. All materials shall be of the types and thicknesses shown on the 20 drawings. 21 1). Typical gypsum board shall be 5/8" thick gypsum panels 22 complying with ASTM specification C36 and or C630.d. 23 f. Panels shall be 4' wide and lengths as required. 24 g. Gypsum board installed in potentially damp locations shall be type 25 W/R. 26 h. Fasteners shall be Type "S", Bugle Head drywall screws 27 i. Joint compound shall be PERF-A-TAPE system, or approved equal. 28 j. Provide all required drywall accessories as necessary for complete and 29 proper work. 30 k. All outside corners shall receive galvanized corner beads. 31 3. FIRE-RATED GYPSUM BOARD. Basis of Design: National Gypsum Gold Bond® 32 brand Fire-Shield® Gypsum Board 33 a. Type X, Panel Physical Characteristics 34 b. Core: Fire-resistance rated gypsum core 35 c. Surface paper: 100 percent recycled content paper on front, back and 36 long edges 37 d. Long Edges: Tapered 38 e. Overall thickness: 5/8 inch 39 f. Panel complies with Type X requirements of ASTM C 1396 40 41 B. SHAFTWALL: shall be as manufactured by National Gypsum Company, United States 42 Gypsum Company or approved equal. 43 1. FIRE-RATED MOLD-RESISTANT SHAFTLINER BOARD: A gypsum core shaftwall 44 panel with additives to enhance fire resistance and mold resistance of the core; 45 surfaced with moisture/mold resistant paper on front, back, and long edges and 46 complying with ASTM C 1396, Type X (National Gypsum Gold Bond BRAND Fire- 47 Shield Shaftliner XP). 48 a. Thickness: 1 in. 49 b. Width: 2 ft. 50 c. Length: 7 ft. through 14 ft. 51 d. Edges: Beveled. 52 e. Mold and Mildew Resistance: Panel score of 10, indicating no mold 53 growth, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273. 54 55 C. FIBERGLASS-MAT FACED, MOISTURE & MOLD RESISTANT GYPSUM SHEATHING: 56 1. Fiberglass-Mat Faced, Moisture & Mold Resistant Gypsum Sheathing shall be

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 154 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC or approved equal. 2 a. FIBERGLASS-MAT FACED GYPSUM SHEATHING: DensGlass Sheathing. 3 b. FIBERGLASS-MAT FACED GYPSUM SHEATHING, Type X for Fire Rated 4 Designs: DensGlass Fireguard Sheathing. 5 c. FIBERGLASS-MAT FACED GYPSUM TILE BACKING BOARD: DensShield 6 Tile Backer, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. 7 4. MATERIALS: 8 a. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C1177: 9 1). Thickness: 5/8 inch. 10 2). Width: 4 feet. 11 3). Length: 10 feet. 12 4). Weight: 1.9 lb/sq. ft. 13 5). Edges: Square. 14 6). Surfacing: Fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges. 15 7). Racking Strength (Ultimate, not design value) (ASTM E72): Not 16 less than 540 pounds per square foot, dry. 17 8). Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 80 lbf, parallel. 18 9). Humidified Deflection (ASTM C1177): Not more than 2/8 inch. 19 10). Permeance (ASTM E96): 23 perms. 20 11). R-Value (ASTM C518): 0.56. 21 12). Mold Resistance (ASTM D3273): 10, in a test a manufactured. 22 13). Microbial Resistance (ASTM D6329, GREENGUARD 3-week 23 protocol): Will not support microbial growth. 24 b. Fire-Rated Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C1177, 25 Type X: 26 1). Thickness: 5/8 inch. 27 2). Width: 4 feet. 28 3). Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet]. 29 4). Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. ft. 30 5). Edges: Square. 31 6). Surfacing: Fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges. 32 7). Racking Strength (Ultimate, not design value) (ASTM E72): Not 33 less than 654 pounds per square foot, dry. 34 8). Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C1177): 100 lbf, parallel. 35 9). Humidified Deflection (ASTM C1177): Not more than 1/8 inch. 36 10). Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 17 perms. 37 11). R-Value (ASTM C518): 0.67. 38 12). Mold Resistance (ASTM D3273): 10, in a test as 39 manufactured. 40 13). Microbial Resistance (ASTM D6329, GREENGUARD 3-week 41 protocol): Will not support microbial growth. 42 c. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Tile Backing Board: ASTM C1178: 1/2 inch 43 DensShield Tile Backer, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. 44 1) Thickness: 1/2 inch. 45 2) Width: [4 feet] [32 inches]. 46 3) Length: [5 feet] [8 feet]. 47 4) Weight: 2.0 lb/sq. ft. 48 5) Edges: Square. 49 6) Surfacing: Coated fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges. 50 Mold Resistance (ASTM D3273): 10, in a test as manufactured. 51 7) Microbial Resistance (ASTM D6329, EPA 12-week protocol): Will 52 not support microbial growth. 53 8) Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 1.0 perms when tiled. 54 Robinson Floor Test Rating (ASTM C627): Light commercial. 55 Acceptable Products:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 155 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 4. SCREWS: ASTM C1002, corrosion resistant treated. 2 3 D. GENERAL: 4 1. All materials shall be of the types and thicknesses shown on the drawings. 5 2. All gypsum board shall be 5/8" thick gypsum panels complying with ASTM 6 specification C36 and or C630. 7 3. Panels shall be 4' wide and lengths as required. 8 4. Gypsum board installed in potentially damp locations shall be type W/R. 9 5. Fasteners shall be Type "S", Bugle Head drywall screws, not nails. 10 6. Joint compound shall be PERF-A-TAPE system, or approved equal. 11 7. Provide all required drywall accessories as necessary for complete and proper 12 work. 13 8. All outside corners shall receive galvanized corner beads. 14 15 III. EXECUTION 16 17 A. GENERAL: 18 1. All work shall be done in complete compliance with the recommendations of 19 the gypsum board manufacturer. 20 2. All work shall be done by mechanics skilled in the drywall trade. 21 22 B. INSTALLATION: 23 1. Gypsum board shall be installed in lengths as long as possible so as to avoid 24 end butt joints. 25 2. Boards shall be brought into contact but not forced together so as to 26 compress or deform the boards. 27 3. Where ends or edges abut, they shall be neatly fitted. 28 4. End joints shall be staggered. 29 5. Joints of opposite sides of a partition shall be arranged so as to occur on 30 different studs. 31 6. Fasteners shall be spaced not less than 3/8" for edges and ends of a board. 32 7. Fasteners shall be spaces as recommended by the gypsum board 33 manufacturer. 34 8. All openings, edges and where gypsum board terminates against dissimilar 35 materials shall receive metal edge trim such as USG #200-A or #200-B. 36 9. Tile backer board shall be installed in accordance with ASTM C840, 37 manufacturer’s recommendations and TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile 38 Installation. 39 40 B. FINISHING: 41 1. All joints shall be taped. 42 2. All joints and fastener heads and other depressions shall be spackled and 43 sanded smooth. 44 3. Apply at least three coats of spackle, sanding between coats. 45 4. Finished installation shall be ready for painting. 46 5. Provide a Level 5 finish for the glass-matt gypsum board. 47 6. All joints and interior angles shall have tape embossed in joint compound 48 and two separte coats of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener 49 heads, and accessories. 50 7. Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. 51 8. Prepare surface to be coated with a primer/sealer prior to the application of 52 finish paint by applied monolithic coat of joint compound over the entire surface. 53 54

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 156 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION – 09310: CERAMIC TILE 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the work 6 1. Provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for a complete 7 installation of ceramic “Subway Tile” wall tile, and base as shown on the 8 drawings, specified herein and as necessary to complete the construction to the 9 complete satisfaction of the Owner. 10 11 B. DEFINITIONS 12 1. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ATM C 13 499) plus joint width indicated. 14 2. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per 15 ASTM C499) 16 3. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1. 17 18 C. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 19 1. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide 20 products with the following values as determined by testing identical products 21 per ASTM C 1028: 22 a. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6 Wet 23 24 D. REFERENCES: 25 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 26 A108.1 - Installation of Ceramic Tile in a Mortar Bed. 27 A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement or 28 Latex-Portland Cement. 29 A108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tilework. 30 A108.13 - Installation of Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile. 31 A118.3 - Chemical Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and-Grouting 32 Epoxy and Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive. 33 A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 34 A118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts. 35 A137.1 - Ceramic Tile. 36 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 37 C 136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 38 C 150 - Portland Cement. 39 C 623 – Young’s Modulus, Shear Modulus, and Poisson’s Ratio for Glass 40 and Glass-Ceramics by Resonance. 41 C 627 – Robinson Floor Test for Tile Service Level. 42 C 1028 - Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like 43 Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method. 44 D 4397 - Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and 45 Agricultural Applications. 46 3. TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation by Tile Council of America, latest 47 edition. 48 49 E. QUALITY CONTROL: 50 1. Materials and installation shall be in complete compliance with the 51 appropriate ANSI, ASTM, and Tile Council of America specifications as cited 52 below. 53 2. All work shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in ceramic tile work. 54 55

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 157 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 F. HANDLING: 2 1. All materials shall be delivered to the work site in the manufacturers' original 3 unopened boxes with labels intact. 4 2. Keep cartons dry. 5 3. Protect all materials from damage. 6 7 G. SUBMITTALS: 8 1. Submit product data and samples under provisions of Section 01300 9 Submittals & Substitutions for each type of tile product indicated. 10 2. Shop Drawings: 11 a. Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, 12 junctions with dissimilar materials, thresholds, and setting details. 13 b. Locate and detail movement joints, including expansion, contraction, 14 control and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. 15 c. Submit product data, specifications, and instructions for using 16 mortars, adhesives and grouts. 17 3. Samples: 18 a. Submit color samples illustrating full color range of each type tile. 19 b. Upon final selection], submit tile mock-up mounted on a plywood 20 backer board, illustrating tile patterns and colors, grout joint width and 21 colors, and maximum color variations anticipated. Size of mock-up to 22 allow for at least 4 tiles (minimum of 12 by 12 inch). 23 4. Grout: 24 a. Submit manufacturer's full range of standard and designated color 25 samples for each type for Architect's selection. 26 5. Submit the following Informational Submittals: 27 a. Certifications specified in Quality Assurance article. 28 b. Qualification Data: Manufacturer's and installer's qualification data. 29 6. Manufacturer's instructions. 30 a. Maintenance Data: Include routine maintenance and stain-removal 31 methods. 32 33 H. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: 34 1. Maintain temperature in building at a minimum 50 degrees F while tile work 35 is in progress and for a minimum of seven days upon completion of work. 36 2. Vent temporary combustion heaters to outside to avoid carbon dioxide 37 damage to tiles. 38 39 I. EXTRA STOCK: 40 1. Provide the Owner an extra 2% of each tile used for replacement purposes. 41 42 J. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 43 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 44 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 45 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 46 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 47 information specifically related to work of this section: 48 DIVISION 3: CONCRETE 49 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 50 Section 09260: Gypsum Drywall 51 52 II. PRODUCTS 53 54 A. CERAMIC TILE: 55 1. Wall Tile shall be “Subway Style”: ANAPOLIS Glazed Ceramic Tile as

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 158 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 manufactured by DAL-TILE, 7834 Hawn Freeway, Dallas, Texas 75217, 800- 2 933-Tile, or approved equal. Tiles shall be 6" x 16" x 5/16”. Color shall be as 3 selected by the Owner. 4 a. All tile installed on walls shall be "thin-set" over waterproof 5 membrane (Tile Council of America Design #F122-92). 6 b. 1/8” max. grout joints with tile installed in a staggered brick joint 7 pattern. 8 c. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar shall comply with ASNI A118.4. 9 d. Latex- Portland Cement Grout shall comply with ANSI A 118.6 Color 10 shall be as selected by the Owner. 11 12 B. MORTAR, GROUT, & ADHESIVE MANUFACTURERS: 13 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, 14 provide products from one of the following manufacturers. 15 a. CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS, Seal Beach, CA. 16 b. LATICRETE INTERNATIONAL, INC., Bethany, CT 17 c. MAPEI CORPORATION, Deerfield, FL. 18 d. Or other approved manufacturer. 19 20 C. MORTAR MATERIALS - THIN SET BEDS: 21 1. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; Thin-Set (ANSI A118.4) 22 a. Description: Latex additive and redispersable polymers in dry-set 23 portland cement tile-setting mortars designed to improve adhesion, 24 reduce water absorption, and provide greater bond strength and 25 resistance to shock and impact. These additives allow some latitude in 26 working time, working conditions, and temperatures. 27 1) Pre-packaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, 28 ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water must be added 29 at jobsite. Mix water according to mortar manufacturer’s 30 directions. 31 2) Acceptable Products: 32 • CustomCrete Latex Mortar Admix with site mixed Mortar 33 or CreteMix Mortar by CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS. 34 • 4237 Latex Thin set Mortar Additive by LATICRETE. 35 • Keracrete System consisting of KER 303 Latex mixed with 36 1:1 sand/cement blend by MAPEI. 37 b. Description: Two component system; latex additive water emulsion 38 which is added to portland cement mortar in place of water or replacing 39 part of the water. The dry-set mortar must be preblended and must be 40 specified by the latex manufacturer for use with the particular latex 41 additive. Use amount of liquid latex as recommended by latex additive 42 manufacturer. 43 1) Acceptable Products: 44 • MasterBlend Thin-Set Mortar mixed with CustomFlex 45 Ultra-Strength Thin-Set Additive by CUSTOM BUILDING 46 PRODUCTS. 47 • MasterBlend Thin-Set Mortar mixed with Acrylic Mortar 48 Admix by CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS. 49 • VersaBond Bonding Mortar (Dry Polymer) BY CUSTOM 50 BUILDING PRODUCTS. 51 • FlexBond Premium Flexible Bonding Mortar (Dry Polymer) 52 by CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS. 53 • 4237 Latex Thinset Mortar Additive mixed with 211 Crete 54 Filler Powder by LATICRETE.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 159 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 • 3701 Mortar Admix mixed with premium floor and thin set 2 by LATICRETE. 3 • Keralastic System consisting of Keralastic polymer additive 4 and Kerabond dry-set mortar by MAPEI. 5 • Keraply System consisting of Keraply Acrylic Latex and 6 Keraset Dry-Set Mortar. 7 2. Fast-Setting Thin-Set Mortar (ANSI A118.4): 8 a. Description: A latex-portland cement mortar specifically designed to 9 obtain the minimum required shear bond strengths at a much faster rate 10 than normal latex-portland cement mortar. Fast-setting, second 11 generation, two-component mortar consisting of latex additive and 12 mortar. Cures completely, with no residual moisture, in 24 hours. 13 b. Acceptable Products: 14 1) RapidSetting Commercial Bonding Mortar mixed with 15 CustomFlex Ultra-Strength Thin-Set Additive BY CUSTOM 16 BUILDING PRODUCTS. 17 2) 3701 Mortar Admix with 259 Rapid–Flex Thin-Set Mortar by 18 LATICRETE. 19 3) Grani/Rapid System consisting of Grani/Rapid powder and 20 PRP318 latex additive by MAPEI. 21 4) Or approved equal. 22 23 D. POLYMER MODIFIED GROUT (ANSI A118.7): 24 1. Unsanded Latex/Polymer Modified Tile Grout: 25 a. Definition: A factory prepared, mildew resistant, mixture of cement 26 and other ingredients, including a redispersable, latex/polymer powder 27 (to which only water is added at the jobsite) or a liquid latex admixture. 28 When added in a latex form it is added as a replacement for part or all of 29 the mixing water. These grouts are designed for installations in joints of 30 1/8” wide or less. 31 1) Latex Additive: Type as recommended by latex mortar 32 manufacturer. 33 2) Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full 34 range of color. 35 b. Acceptable Products: 36 1) Polyblend Non-Sanded Tile Grout by CUSTOM BUILDING 37 PRODUCTS. 38 2) White Dry Tile Grout by CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS. 39 3) 644 White Dry-Set Grout mixed with 17765 Grout Admix Plus 40 by LATICRETE. 41 4) 1600 Series Tri-Poly Fortified Non Sanded Grout by LATICRETE. 42 5) KER 800 polymer-modified unsanded grout by MAPEI. 43 6) Or approved equal. 44 2. Sanded Latex/Polymer Modified Tile Grout: 45 a. Description: A factory prepared, mildew resistant, sanded grout 46 mixture consisting of portland cement, graded quartz and additives (to 47 which only water is added at the jobsite) or a liquid latex admixture. 48 When added in a latex form it is added as a replacement for part or all of 49 the mixing water. These grouts are designed for installations in joints of 50 1/8” wide or greater. 51 b. Latex Additive: Type as recommended by latex mortar manufacturer. 52 Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of 53 color. 54 c. Acceptable Products:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 160 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 1) Polyblend Sanded Tile Grout by CUSTOM BUILDING 2 PRODUCTS. 3 2) Satillo Grout Mix with Acrylic Mortar Admix 1:1 with water by 4 CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS. 5 3) 500 Series Sanded Grout Mixed with 1776 Grout Admix Plus by 6 LATICRETE. 7 4) KER 200 polymer-modified sanded grout by MAPEI. 8 5) Or approved equal. 9 10 E. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: 11 1. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is 12 formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and 13 grout, is compatible with tile and mortar/grout products, and is easily removable 14 after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 15 a. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined, tasteless, odorless, containing at 16 least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 degree F to 140 degree F 17 per ASTM D 87. 18 19 F. MIXING MORTAR & GROUT: 20 1. Mix mortars and grouts in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 21 22 III. EXECUTION 23 24 A. EXAMINATION: 25 1. Condition of Surfaces to Receive Tile: 26 a. Firm, dry, clean and free of oily or waxy films, mortar and soil 27 b. Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, electrical and mechanical 28 work in or behind tile installed. 29 2 Air Temperature and Surfaces in Rooms to Receive Flooring: Between 60 30 degrees to 90 degrees F unless otherwise recommended by manufacturers of 31 materials being installed. 32 33 B. PREPARATION: 34 1. Clean substrates. 35 2. Wet down or wash dry, dusty surfaces and remove excess water immediately 36 prior to application of tiles. 37 3. Prepare surfaces in strict accordance with instructions of manufacturer whose 38 setting materials or additives are being used. 39 4. Acid Based Cleaners: Use not permitted. 40 41 C. INSTALLATION: 42 1. Tile Installation, General 43 a. Install tile materials in accordance with ANSI A137.1, other referenced 44 ANSI and TCA specifications, and TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile 45 Installation", except for more stringent requirements of manufacturer or 46 these Specifications. 47 b. Cut and fit tile tight to protrusions and vertical interruptions and treat 48 with a compatible sealant as specified in Section 07900. Form corners 49 and bases neatly. 50 c. Work tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance 51 allowed in tile size. Make joint watertight, without voids, cracks, excess 52 mortar, or grout. 53 d. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls and floors with the following joint 54 widths: 55 1) Wall Tile: 1/8”.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 161 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 d. Prepare surface, fit, set, bond, grout and clean in accordance with 2 applicable requirements of ANSI standards and Tile Council of America. 3 2. Layout 4 a. Lay out work [to pattern indicated] so that full tile or joint is centered 5 on each wall and no tile of less than half width need be used. 6 1) Do not interrupt pattern through openings. 7 2) Lay out tile to minimize cutting and to avoid tile less than half 8 size. 9 b. Staggered joints, running bound look. 10 c. File edges of cut tile smooth and even. 11 d. Cut and fit tile at penetrations through tile. 12 1) Do not damage visible surfaces. 13 2) Carefully grind edges of tile abutting built-in items. 14 3) Fit tile at outlets, piping and other penetrations so that plates, 15 collars, or covers overlap tile. 16 e. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and 17 fixtures, to form complete covering without interruptions, except as 18 otherwise indicated. 19 1) Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners 20 without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 21 f. Accurately form intersections and returns. 22 g. Form internal angles square and external angles bull nosed. 23 3. Thin Set Method, Floors and Walls 24 a. Apply mortar or adhesive with notched trowel using scraping motion 25 to work material into good contact with surface to be covered. 26 1) Maintain 90 percent coverage on back of tile and fully bed all 27 corners. 28 b. Apply only as much mortar or adhesive as can be covered within 29 allowable windows as recommended by mortar or adhesive manufacturer 30 or while surface is still tacky. 31 c. When installing large tiles, ceramics or mosaics, trowel small quantity 32 of mortar or adhesive onto back of each tile or sheet of tiles. 33 d. Set tiles in place and rub or beat with small beating block. 34 e. Beat or rap tile to ensure proper bond and also to level surface of tile. 35 f. Align tile to show uniform joints and allow to set until firm. 36 g. Clean excess mortar or adhesive from surface of tile with wet cheese 37 cloth (not a sponge) while mortar is fresh. 38 h. Allow face mounted tile to set until firm before removing paper and 39 before grouting. 40 i. Sound tile after setting. 41 1) Replace hollow sounding tiles. 42 4. Grouting 43 a. Allow tiles to set a minimum of 48 hours before grouting. 44 b. If bonding materials are rapid setting, follow manufacturer’s 45 recommendations. 46 c. Install in accordance with grout manufacturer's recommendations and 47 ANSI A108.10. 48 d. Pack joints full and free before mortar takes initial set. 49 e. Clean excess grout from surface with wet cheesecloth as work 50 progresses. Do not use hydrosponges. 51 f. Cure after grouting by covering with kraft or construction paper for 72 52 hours. 53 g. Install sealant in vertical wall joints at interior corners. 54 55 D. ADJUSTING:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 162 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 1. Sound tile after setting. 2 2. Replace hollow sounding units. 3 4 E. CLEANING: 5 1. Clean excess mortar from surface with water as work progresses. 6 a. Perform cleaning while mortar is fresh and before it hardens on 7 surfaces. 8 2. Sponge and wash tile diagonally across joints. 9 a. Polish with clean dry cloth. 10 3. Remove grout haze following recommendation of mortar additive 11 manufacturer. 12 a. Do not use acids for cleaning. 13 4. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating 14 manufacturer that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. 15 a. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. 16 17 F. PROTECTION: 18 1. Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 72 hours after installation. 19 2. Where temporary use of new floors is unavoidable, supply large, flat boards 20 or plywood panels for walkways over kraft paper. 21 3. Protect work so that it will be without any evidence of damage or use at time 22 of acceptance 23 24

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 163 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 09500: ACOUSTICAL TILE & CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work 6 1. The General Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and 7 equipment for a complete installation of acoustical tile ceilings, suspension 8 system and drywall ceiling suspension system as shown on the drawings, as 9 specified herein and as necessary for the proper completion of the work to the 10 satisfaction of the Owner. 11 12 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 13 1. All materials shall conform to ASTM E84 with flame spread rating of 0-25, 14 and Federal Specification SS-S-118B for Class A materials. 15 2. The Ceiling System materials and installation shall be warranted by the 16 system manufacturer for a period of ten years from the date of installation. 17 3. All work shall conform to the standards of ASTM C635 "Metal Suspension 18 Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay in Panel Ceilings," for intermediate duty 19 systems and ASTM C636 "Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for 20 Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels." 21 4. All work shall be performed by mechanics skilled in the trade. 22 23 C. SUBMITTALS: 24 1. Provide manufacturer's catalog sheets for the review and approval of the 25 Owner. 26 27 D. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 28 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 29 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 30 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 31 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 32 information specifically related to work of this section: 33 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 34 Section 07213: Batt & Blanket Insulation 35 Section 09260: Gypsum Drywall 36 37 II. PRODUCTS: 38 39 A. SUSPENSION SYSTEMS: 40 1. Components: All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot- 41 dipped galvanized (galvanized steel, aluminum, or stainless steel) as per ASTM A 42 653. Main beams and cross tees are double-web steel construction with type 43 exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping pre- 44 finished galvanized steel (aluminum or stainless steel) in baked polyester paint. 45 Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching (exception: extruded 46 aluminum or stainless steel). 47 a. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 Intermediate Duty. 48 b. Color: (Standard) White and match the actual color of the selected 49 ceiling tile, unless noted otherwise. 50 c. Color (Above Wood Panel Clouds/Suspended Grills): Black and match 51 the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted otherwise. 52 d. Acceptable Product: Prelude ML 15/16" Exposed Tee as manufactured 53 by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 54 e. Fire Rated Assemblies: Prelude XL Fire Guard 15/16" Exposed Tee as 55 manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., or approved equal 56 2. High Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for Coating 57 Classification for Severe Environment Performance where high humidity finishes 58 are indicated.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 164 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 a. AL Prelude Plus by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. - all ALUMINUM 2 b. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 duty class. 3 c. Color: White aluminum 4 d. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM 5 C 635, Table 1, 4. Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. 6 3. Drywall Ceiling Furring System: 7 a. Main Beam shall be heavy-duty, double-web steel construction 8 (minimum .0179" prior to protective coating per ASTM C645), hot dipped 9 galvanized (minimum G40 per ASTM C 645), 1-1/2" web, rectangular top 10 bulb and pre-finished 15/16" flange Armstrong (#HD8901) main beam 11 shall be formed to include integral splice for expansion relief. Web is to 12 be formed to receive override cross tee. 13 b. Primary Furring Cross Tees shall be double-web steel construction 14 (minimum .0179" prior to protective coating per ASTM C 645), hot dipped 15 galvanized (minimum G40 per ASTM C 645), web height 1-1/2" with 16 rectangular bulb and pre-finished 1 1/2" knurled flange (#XL8945). 17 c. Secondary framing cross tees for fixtures shall be double web steel 18 construction (minimum .0179" prior to protective coating per ASTM C 19 645), hot dipped galvanized , fire rated, web height 1-1/2" rectangular 20 bulb and 15/16" flange (#XL8341). 21 d. Hat Furring channel 48" x 1 3/8" x 7/8", hot dipped galvanized steel 22 (minimum G40 per ASTM C 645); compatible with HD8901 and HD8906 23 (main beams), item # HD8940. 24 e. Wall Molding shall be hot dipped galvanized, hemmed angle molding, 25 1-1/4" height with 1 1/4" flange (#HD7859) or un-hemmed channel 26 molding 3/4" x 1 9/16" x 1 1/4" (#7838). 27 f. Screws meeting ASTM C1002 for wall board application shall be bugle 28 head screws in accordance with thickness of material used. 29 4. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, 30 Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. 31 5. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 32 pre-stretched, with a yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not 33 less than 12 gauge. 34 6. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles 35 indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and 36 penetrations, including light fixtures, that fit type of edge detail and suspension 37 system indicated. Provide moldings with exposed flange of the same width as 38 exposed runner. 39 a. Trim: 4” AXIOM Vector Item #AX4VESTRBL 40 7. System shall be supplied complete with all accessories as recommended by 41 the system manufacturer. 42 43 B. ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE 44 1. Acoustical Ceiling Tile shall be "FINE FISSURED", 1811, as manufactured by 45 ARMSTRONG CEILING, INC., or approved equal, as noted on the drawings. 46 a. Surface Texture: Medium 47 b. Composition: Mineral Fiber 48 c. Color: White 49 d. Size: 48in X 24in X 3/4in 50 e. Edge Profile: Square Lay-In for interface with Prelude 15/16" Exposed 51 Tee. 52 f. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL 53 label on product carton, 0.70. 54 g. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label 55 on product carton, 40 56 h. Articulation Class (AC): ASTM E 1111; Classified with UL label on 57 product carton (Not Applicable). 58 i. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Fire Resistive

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 165 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 j. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; White Panel: Light Reflectance: 2 0.85. 3 k. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus - temperatures up to 120 4 degrees F and high humidity excluding only exterior use, use over 5 standing water, and direct contact with moisture . 6 l. Mold/Mildew Inhibitor: The front and back of the product have been 7 treated with BioBlock, a paint that contains a special biocide that inhibits 8 or retards the growth of mold or mildew, ASTM D 3273. 9 10 III. EXECUTION: 11 12 A. SUSPENSION SYSTEM: 13 1. Examination: 14 a. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, 15 terrazzo, plastering and painting has been completed and thoroughly 16 dried out, unless expressly permitted by manufacturer's printed 17 recommendations. (Exception: HumiGuard Max Ceilings). 18 b. The building heating and cooling system shall be in operation. 19 20 2. Preparation: 21 a. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to 22 balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. 23 1) Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply 24 with reflected ceiling plans. 25 2) Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical 26 fixtures. 27 b. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other 28 ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other sections. 29 3. Installation: 30 a. Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the 31 manufacturer's instructions, and in compliance with ASTM C 636 and with 32 the authorities having jurisdiction. 33 b. All direct hung components shall be installed level. 34 c. Suspend main beam from overhead construction with hanger wires 35 spaced 4-0 on center along the length of the main runner. 36 1) Install hanger wires plumb and straight. 37 d. Suspension wire shall be 12 gage galvanized steel tied tightly with at 38 least three turns. 39 e. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical 40 surfaces. 41 1) Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner 42 caps. 43 44 B. DRYWALL SUSPENSION SYSTEM: 45 1. General: 46 a. Install per ASTM C-636 47 b. To secure to metal clips, concrete inserts, steel bar joist or steel deck, 48 use power actuated fastener, or insert. 49 1) Coordinate placement for No. 12 gauge hanger wire, 4' O.C. in 50 both directions. 51 2) Drywall standard calls for 9 gauge wire. It allows 12 gauge 52 only when it supports no more than 9 square feet, which would 53 require wire placement every two feet along the mains. 54 c. Use No. 12 gauge hanger wire (#7891) 4' O.C. in all directions except 55 when load increases and then change wire locations to 3' or 2' O.C. to 56 support additional loading requirements. 57 1) Provide extra wire at light fixtures, grilles, access doors where

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 166 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 necessary. 2 2) Pigtail knot with three (3) ties top and bottom (ASTM C-636). 3 d. Add additional wire as needed when using the following clips: Main 4 Beam Adapter Clip (# MBAC); Drywall Angle Clips (# DW30C, 5 DW45C,DW60C, DW90C); Drywall Furring Shoes (#DFS1516, DFS150); 6 Drywall Clip (#DWC); Direct Load Ceiling Clip (#DLCC). 7 e. Control Joints: roll formed zinc alloy, aluminum, or plastic as required 8 for expansion and contraction as shown on drawings. 9 1) Typically installed on modules of 30' or less, depending upon 10 the shape of the ceiling. 11 f. Expansion Joints: roll formed zinc alloy or plastic trim mechanism 12 every 50 to 100 lineal feet at module terminations. 13 g. Main beams shall be suspended from the overhead construction with 14 #12 gauge hanger wire, spaced 48" O.C. along the length of the main 15 beams. 16 2. System installation: install cross tees with board as follows: 17 a. Use channel molding (#7838) or angle molding (#HD7 59) to interface 18 with Drywall Furring System to obtain drop soffits, verticals, slopes, etc. 19 b. For Type G fixtures, use a secondary framing 48" cross tee (#XL8341). 20 For Type F fixtures, use a secondary framing 96" cross tee with an 21 additional load wire at the midpoint (#XL7380) or 49" framing tee 22 (XL7949). 23 c. Interior Applications: 24 1). Install 1-1/2" main beam (#HD8906) 4' O.C. Routs spaced 8" 25 O.C. to receive cross tees at 8", 16" or 24" O.C. 26 2). Install 4' cross tees at 24" O.C. when point loading (vertical), 27 add hanger wire at mid-span of 48" cross tee as needed. 28 29 C. CEILING TILE: 30 1. Installation shall be in complete accord with the recommendations of the tile 31 manufacturer. 32 a. For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling 33 panels at border areas and vertical surfaces. 34 b. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with 35 edges resting on flanges of main runner and cross tees. 36 c. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting surfaces. 37 d. Support edges by wall moldings. 38 2. Installation shall be performed by mechanics skilled in the trade. 39 40 D. ADJUSTING & CLEANING 41 1. Replace damaged and broken panels. 42 2. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, 43 and suspension members. 44 3. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor 45 finish damage. 46 4. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to 47 permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 48 49

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 167 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 09650: RESILIENT FLOORING 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work 6 1. Provide and install slip retardant resilient tile flooring, and vinyl cove base 7 and miscellaneous accessories as shown on the drawings, as specified herein 8 and as necessary for a complete and proper installation. 9 2. Proposed installation is over new concrete slabs & over single-layer, fully 10 adhered, existing resilient floors . 11 12 B. REFERENCES: 13 1. Armstrong Flooring Technical Manuals 14 a. Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061 15 b. Armstrong Flooring Maintenance Recommendations and Procedures, 16 manual, F-8663 17 2. ASTM International: 18 a. ASTM E 648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor- 19 Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source 20 b. ASTM E 662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of 21 Smoke Generated by Solid Materials 22 c. ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive 23 Resilient Flooring 24 d. ASTM F 1066 Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Tile 25 e. ASTM F 1482, Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products 26 Available for Use Under Resilient Flooring 27 f. ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base 28 g. ASTM F 1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Vapor Emission 29 Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride 30 h. ASTM F 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity 31 in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes 32 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 33 a. NFPA 253 Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor 34 Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source 35 b. NFPA 258 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Smoke Generated 36 by Solid Materials 37 38 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 39 1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient vinyl composition tile 40 flooring with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by 41 testing material in accordance with ASTM test methods indicated below by a 42 certified testing laboratory or other testing agency acceptable to authorities 43 having jurisdiction: 44 a. ASTM E 648 Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts per sq. cm. or greater, 45 Class I 46 b. ASTM E 662 (Smoke Generation) Maximum Specific Optical Density of 47 450 or less 48 2. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct an on-site pre-installation meeting to 49 verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation 50 instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements. 51 3. Install flooring & accessories after the other finishing operations, including 52 painting, have been completed. Close spaces to traffic during the installation of 53 the flooring. 54 55 C. SUBMITTALS:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 168 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 1. Provide samples of each item, colors and patterns available for review and 2 selection of the Owner. 3 2. Provide materials manufacturers' pertinent test data to establish compliance 4 with these specifications. 5 6 D. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 7 1.Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 8 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 9 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 10 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 11 information specifically related to work of this section: 12 DIVISION 3: CONCRETE 13 Section 09680: Modular Carpet & Accessories 14 15 II. PRODUCTS 16 17 A. MANUFACTURER: 18 1. Resilient tile flooring, wall base, adhesives and accessories: Armstrong 19 Flooring, Inc., 2500 Columbia Avenue, Lancaster, PA 17604 20 www.armstrongflooring.com/commercial 21 2. Or approved manufacturer. 22 23 B. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING MATERIALS: 24 1. (Basis of Design) Provide Safety Zone™ Slip-Retardant Tile Flooring 25 manufactured by Armstrong Flooring Inc. 26 a. Description: Vinyl tile composed of polyvinyl chloride resin, 27 plasticizers, fillers, pigment, and grit. Tile shall have a nominal 0.020 in. 28 (0.51 mm) thick pattern layer containing proprietary slip-retardant grit. 29 b. Tile shall meet size, thickness, indentation, impact, deflection, 30 dimensional stability, resistance to chemicals, squareness, and resistance 31 to heat requirements of ASTM F 1066 Standard Specification for Vinyl 32 Composition Tile, Class 2, through pattern. 33 c. Pattern and Color: color selected from the range currently available 34 from Armstrong Flooring, Inc. 35 d. Size: 12 in. x 12 in. 36 e. Thickness: 1/8"/0.125 in. (3.2mm) 37 38 B. VINYL COVE BASE: 39 1. Vinyl Cove Base shall be 1/8" thick by 4" height; Vinyl Cove Base as 40 manufactured by JOHNSONITE, 16910 Munn Road, Chagrin Falls, Ohio 44023 or 41 approved equal. 42 a. Base shall be cove type for VCT installation and straight base for 43 carpet installation. 44 b. Color shall be as selected by the Owner from the manufacturer's 45 standards offerings. 46 c. Base sections shall be continuous. Joints shall not be permitted 47 between corners, door frames and like interruptions of any wall surface. 48 d. Inside and outside corners shall be prefabricated by the base 49 manufacturer. 50 e. Vinyl base shall have manufacturers 1 year materials warranty. 51 52 C. REDUCER STRIPS, ADAPTORS & TRANSITION MOULDINGS: 53 1. Reducer Strips, Adaptors & Transition Mouldings: Shall be vinyl as 54 manufactured by JOHNSONITE, 16910 Munn Road, Chagrin Falls, Ohio 44023 or 55 approved equal.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 169 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2. Color shall be as selected by the Owner from the manufacturer's standard 2 offerings. 3 a. Types shall be appropriate to the use. 4 5 D. ADHESIVE: 6 1. Provide Armstrong S-799 High Moisture Adhesive for Linoleum and Rubber 7 Tile for field areas and Armstrong S-725 Wall Base Adhesive at the wall base as 8 recommended by the flooring manufacturer. 9 2. Or approved equal. 10 11 E. UNDERLAYMENT: 12 1. When fully adhering flooring over an existing resilient floor, provide Armstrong 13 S-194 Patch, Underlayment & Embossing Leveler/ Armstrong S-195 Underlayment 14 Additive to fill and smooth any embossing in the old floor. 15 16 III. EXECUTION 17 18 A. INSPECTION: Proposed installation is over new concrete slabs & over single-layer, 19 fully adhered, existing resilient floors 20 1. Examine flooring conditions at the work site. 21 a. Correct any conditions detrimental to proper completion of the VCT 22 flooring. 23 b. Do not proceed with the work until such conditions are corrected. 24 2. All floors shall be clean and dry, smooth and structurally sound, and free of 25 paint varnish, adhesives, oil grease, solvents, and other extraneous materials 26 including curing and parting compounds, sealers and surface hardeners which 27 will inhibit bonding. 28 3. Concrete Floors: Install self leveling polymer-modified Portland Cement 29 based underlayment with minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi (ASTM C- 30 109-mod.). 31 a. Gypsum based underlayment will not be permitted. 32 b. All holes and depressions shall be filled. 33 c. All protrusions shall be ground smooth. 34 4. Existing Resilient Floors: When fully adhering flooring over an existing 35 resilient floor, use S-194 Patch, Underlayment & Embossing Leveler/ S-195 36 Underlayment Additive to fill and smooth any embossing in the old floor. 37 38 B. INSTALLATION: 39 1. Installation of all products of this section shall be in complete accordance 40 with the product manufacturers' recommendations. 41 2. Lay vinyl tiles so that grain and patterns match. 42 3. Vinyl cove base shall have factory preformed outside and inside corners. 43 4. At all locations where resilient flooring ends or abuts dissimilar materials 44 install appropriate reducer strips. 45 46 C. CLEAN: 47 1. Clean all resilient flooring products upon completion of the work as per 48 flooring manufacturer's recommendations. 49 50 D. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING INSTALLATION: 51 1. Install in enclosed, heated areas only. 52 2. Maintain a temperature of 68 degrees F, for 48 hours prior to and after 53 installation. 54 3. Storage and Handling: Store VCT flooring on a smooth floor or rack with 55 continuous support in a clean, dry, interior area protected from the elements.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 170 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 Maintain temperatures between 50 and 70 degrees F. 2 a. Limit stacking of VCT cartons to maximum 5 high. 3 4. Install as per recommendations of VCT manufacturer. 4 5. Avoid traffic for a minimum of 24 hours following installation. 5 6 F. COVE BASE & MOULDINGS: 7 1. Cove Base & Mouldings shall be installed in complete accordance with 8 materials manufacturer's recommendations. 9 10 G. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING: 11 1. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING shall be installed below kitchen appliances and 12 bathroom fixtures. 13 2. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING shall be installed tightly to the front toe space of 14 cabinets. 15 3. Vinyl base mounding shall be installed at the base of cabinets over the edge 16 joint of floor coverings. 17 18 H. JOINTS: 19 1. Joints between dissimilar flooring materials shall receive appropriate vinyl 20 reducer/transition moldings.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 171 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTIONS - 09686: MODULAR CARPET & ACCESSORIES 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work 6 1. Provide and install modular carpet tiles & accessories as shown on the 7 drawings, as specified herein and as required to properly complete the work to 8 the complete satisfaction of the Owner. 9 2. Extent, location and details of each type of carpeting are indicated on 10 drawings, carpet data sheets and in schedules. 11 3. Work of this section includes furnishing and installation of carpeting, 12 adhesives and accessories. 13 14 B. SUBMITTALS 15 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation 16 instructions for each type of carpeting material and installation accessory 17 required. Include methods of installation for each type of substrate. 18 2. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to 19 fading and flame resistance characteristics. 20 3. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing carpet layout and seaming 21 diagrams, clearly indicating carpet direction, and types of edge strips. Indicate 22 columns, doorways, enclosing walls/partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations 23 where cutouts are required in carpet. Show installation details at any special 24 conditions. 25 4. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following: 26 a. 18" square samples of each type of carpet required. 27 b. 12" long samples of each type exposed edge stripping and accessory 28 items. 29 c. 6" square samples of each type of carpet cushion. 30 d. Prepare samples from same materials to be used for the work. 31 32 C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 33 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm (material producer) with not less than 34 three years of production experience, whose published literature clearly 35 indicates general compliance of products with requirements of this section. 36 2. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in carpet installation with not less 37 than two years of experience in installation of carpeting similar to that required 38 for this project. 39 3. Single Source Responsibility: Provide material produced by a single 40 manufacturer for each carpet type. 41 4. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification stating that material 42 complies with "Use of Materials Bulletin UM-44C" published by U S Department 43 of Housing and Urban Development (HUD); is currently listed in HUD "Certified 44 Products Directory" and is so identified by imprint on back. 45 46 D. DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING 47 1. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, 48 clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, 49 fire hazard classification, and lot number. 50 2. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well- 51 ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, 52 humidity; laid flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping. 53 3. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40 degrees Fahrenheit. 54 4. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special 55 delivery, storage and handling requirements.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 172 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 E. WARRANTY 2 1. Manufacturers' Product Warranties: Submit a written warranty, executed by 3 the Contractor, Installer and the Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace 4 carpeting which fails in materials within the specified warranty period. This 5 warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the owner 6 may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 7 2. Warranty periods shall be as described under the Part II. "Products" of this 8 section of the specification and shall commence at the date of Substantial 9 Completion of the Project. 10 3. Contractor's Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the 11 Contractor, Installer and the Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace 12 carpeting which fails in workmanship within a two year period from the date of 13 Substantial Completion of the Project. 14 15 F. MAINTENANCE: 16 1. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for 17 maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended 18 for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. 19 Include precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to 20 finishes and performance. 21 22 G. REPLACEMENT MATERIALS: 23 1. After completion of the work, deliver not less than 2% of each type, color and 24 pattern of carpeting, exclusive of material required to complete installation. 25 2. Furnish accessory components as required. 26 3. Furnish replacement materials from the same production run as the materials 27 installed. 28 4. Package replacement materials with protective covering identified with 29 appropriate labels. 30 31 H. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 32 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 33 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 34 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 35 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 36 information specifically related to work of this section: 37 DIVISION 3: CONCRETE 38 Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 39 Section 09650: Resilient Flooring 40 41 II. PRODUCTS 42 43 A. MODULAR CARPET: 44 1. Modular Carpet shall be 24” x 24” carpet tile, WIRED (Style # 54492), as 45 manufactured by Shaw Industries, Inc., P.O. Drawer 2128 , 616 E. Walnut Avenue, 46 Dalton, GA 30722-2128 or approved equal. 47 a. Carpet shall meet or exceed the following specifications: 48 1) Fiber: 1005% ECO SOLUTION Q Nylon 49 2) Width: 24” x 24” 50 3) Style Type: Loop 51 4) Face Weight: 14.00 OZ./ Sq. Yd. 52 5) Country of Origin: USA 53 5) Color: #92490 “ELECTRIFY” 54 55 B. ACCESSORIES:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 173 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 1. Carpet Edge Guard, Non-metallic: Extruded or molded heavy duty vinyl or 2 rubber carpet edge guard of size and profile required for each condition, 1.5" 3 anchorage flange; colors selected by the Architect from standard colors. 4 a. Edge guard shall be as manufactured by JOHNSONITE, 16910 Munn 5 Road, Chagrin Falls, Ohio 44023, (800) 899-8916 or approved equal. 6 2. Adhesive: 7 a. Carpet adhesive shall be Safe Set 5 as manufactured BY "CHAPCO", 8 CHICAGO ADHESIVE PRODUCTS COMPANY, 4658 W. 60th Street, Chicago, 9 IL 60629, (800) 621-0220 or approved equal as recommended by the 10 flooring manufacturer for the flooring product and subfloor conditions. 11 b. Seaming Cement shall be #30 Seam Bond as manufactured BY 12 "CHAPCO", CHICAGO ADHESIVE PRODUCTS COMPANY, 4658 W. 60th 13 Street, Chicago, IL 60629, (800) 621-0220 or approved equal as 14 recommended by the flooring manufacturer for the flooring product and 15 subfloor conditions. 16 3. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by the manufacturer's of carpet 17 and other carpeting products; selected by the installer to meet product 18 circumstances and requirements. 19 20 III. EXECUTION 21 22 A. EXAMINATION: 23 1. Examine substrates for moisture content and other conditions under which 24 carpeting is to be installed. 25 2. Notify contractor in writing of major conditions detrimental to proper 26 completion of the work. 27 3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 28 29 B. PREPARATION: 30 1. Direct glue installation requires the floor to be swept, vacuumed, and if 31 necessary, damp mopped. Do not use oil based cleaning compounds when 32 sweeping. 33 a. A commercial cleaning agent such as TSP (Tri-sodium Phosphate) or 34 SPIC-N-SPAN may be used following the manufacturer's 35 recommendations. 36 2. Any damaged underlayment shall be removed and repaired. 37 3. Any holes or depressions in concrete slabs shall be leveled with leveling 38 compound. 39 a. Any unevenness between adjacent sheets of subfloor and/or 40 underlayment shall be leveled with leveling compound. 41 b. Nail holes/heads shall be filled with leveling compound. 42 4. Preparation of Concrete Floors 43 a. Use underlayment powder with a latex additive, such as PARABOND 44 M-120 or M-283. 45 b. Do not use the quick patch type material mixed with water on/or 46 below grade because it dries powdery and prevents proper adhesion. 47 c. All minor holes, depressions, cracks, indentations, or expansion joints 48 should be filled and level. 49 d. All protrusions should be leveled. 50 5. Floor Temperature and Humidity 51 a. The floor temperature should remain at 68 degrees for 24 to 48 hours 52 before and after the installation. 53 1) The relative humidity should not exceed 65% 54 b. During cold weather, store the carpet and adhesive at room 55 temperature 24 to 48 hours before installation.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 174 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 1) This allows the carpet to be more pliable and the adhesive to 2 spread. 3 4 C. INSTALLATION: 5 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for seam location and 6 direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet location and lay of pile. 7 a. At doors, center seams under doors. 8 b. Do not place seams in traffic direction at doorway. 9 2. Extend carpet under open-bottomed obstructions and under removable 10 flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space. 11 3. Provide cut-outs where required, and bind cut edges properly where not 12 concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. 13 4. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; and anchor guards 14 to substrate. 15 5. Expansion Joints: Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous 16 carpeting; provide for movement. 17 6. Glue-Down Installation: 18 a. Fit sections of carpet into each space prior to application of adhesive. 19 Trim edges and butt cuts with seaming cement. 20 b. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with 21 manufacturer's instructions. 22 1) Butt carpet edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. 23 2) Roll entire carpet area lightly to eliminate air pockets and 24 ensure uniform bond. 25 3) Remove any adhesive promptly from face of carpet by method 26 that will not cause damage to the carpet face. 27 28 D. CLEANING: 29 1. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. 30 2. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. 31 3. Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. 32 4. Remove any protruding face yarn with sharp scissors. 33 34 E. PROTECTION: 35 1. Provide protective methods and materials needed to ensure that carpeting 36 will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. 37 38

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 175 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION – 09900: PAINTING & FINISHING 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. Provide all painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed surfaces as 7 shown on the drawings, as specified herein and as necessary to complete the 8 work of the contract to the complete satisfaction of the Owner. 9 a. Unless otherwise specified in this document, painting shall be provided 10 in accordance with the following schedule. Items shall be painted to 11 provide a finish as appropriate for the environment with Owner approved 12 materials: 13 b. Extra Materials: Furnish Owner one (1) unopened gallon of each type of 14 paint, in each color used on the project. 15 c. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide standard products by 16 The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W) unless otherwise approved by 17 Owner. 18 d. Ferrous Metals: Clean non-galvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have 19 not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other 20 foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that 21 comply with recommendations of the SSPC: Society for Protective 22 Coatings. 23 e. Touch up bare areas and shop applied prime coats that have been 24 damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint 25 manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 26 f. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non-petroleum 27 based solvents (SW - “Clean ‘N’ Etch”) so that the surface is free of oil and 28 surface contaminants. Use mechanical methods to remove pretreatment 29 from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock. 30 g. Prefinished surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, do not paint 31 prefinished surfaces, or surfaces of prefinished stainless, aluminum, 32 labels, natural stone, tile, face brick, etc. 33 h. Material Preparation: Mix, prepare, and store painting and finishing 34 materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 35 36 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 37 1. All paint products shall provide "class A" fire rating over non-combustible 38 surfaces. 39 2. Where indicated or otherwise required, paint manufacturer shall provide and 40 certify that products supplied comply with the more stringent of the following, at 41 the time of application: 42 a. EPA Regulation, National Volatile Organic Compounds Emission 43 Standards for Architectural Coatings 40 CFR Part 59; AD FRL 6149 7; RIN 44 2060-AESS. 45 b. More restrictive state or local regulations controlling use of volatile 46 organic compounds (VOC's). 47 48 C. SUBMITTALS: 49 1. Submit samples of available colors of all materials specified in this section for 50 the review and approval of the Owner. 51 2. Provide manufacturers' installation recommendations for all products 52 specified in this section. 53 54 D. HANDLING: 55 1. Deliver all products to the job site in the manufacturers' unopened containers 56 displaying clearly the manufacturer, trade name, type of coating, identifying

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 176 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 code and color. 2 2. Store all materials inside in a secure but vented room. 3 3. Keep all materials at room temperature. 4 4. Keep storage area in neat and orderly condition. 5 5. Keep all waste and paint rags in tightly sealed metal containers. 6 6. Dispose of all waste and paint rags at the end of each working day. 7 7. Take care to avoid fire. 8 9 E. JOB CONDITIONS: 10 1. Remove or protect all hardware, accessories, fixtures and similar items 11 installed prior to the painting process. 12 2. Protect all surfaces not to be painted from drops and spillage of paint. 13 3. Any damage to unpainted or improperly painted materials resulting from 14 neglect to properly protect adjacent materials shall be corrected without 15 additional cost to the Owner. 16 17 F. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: 18 1. Maintain temperature of 70 degrees or higher wherever varnish, lacquer or 19 enamel is being installed and 50 degrees or higher for other types of painting. 20 Exterior painting shall be done only when outside air temperature is 40 degrees 21 F or higher during the period of application and drying of paint products. 22 2. All surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly dry. 23 3. No painting shall be performed during rainy, snowy or excessively humid 24 weather. 25 4. No painting shall be done unless environmental conditions meet the 26 minimum standards recommended by the paint products manufacturers. 27 28 G. OWNERS TOUCH UP STOCK: 29 1. Upon completion of the work deliver to the Owner stock equaling 5% of each 30 of the interior wall paint only as used at the work site. 31 2. Owner's stock shall be in sealed containers, clearly labeled indicating the 32 paint manufacturer, brand name, type, identifying code, and color. 33 34 35 H. RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENTS: 36 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 37 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 38 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 39 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 40 information specifically related to work of this section: 41 DIVISIOJN 3: CONCRETE 42 Section 04100: Masonry 43 DIVISION 5: METALS 44 DIVISION 8: DOORS 45 Section 09260: Gypsum Drywall 46 47 II: PRODUCTS 48 49 A. MANUFACTURERS: 50 1. All materials and their related products shall be the manufacturer's first grade product 51 of the types specified. 52 2. Products by The Sherwin-Williams Company, 101 Prospect Avenue NW 53 Cleveland, OH 44115 Tel: (800) 321-8194 Fax: (216) 566-1392 www.sherwin- 54 williams.com , are the basis of design and set the standard of quality desired. 55 56 B. SURFACE CONDITIONS: 57 1. Examine the areas and conditions in which painting work is to be performed.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 177 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2. Correct conditions to the standards recommended by the manufacturers of the paint 2 products to be used. 3 4 C. PAINTING MATERIALS: 5 1. All paint products specified are as manufactured by SHERWIN WILLIAMS (Except As 6 Noted, or otherwise approved). 7 a. Substitution of equal products may be made with the approval of the Architect. 8 9 D. EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 10 1. Metal - (Aluminum, Galvanized) 11 a. Semi-Gloss Finish 12 b. Primer: ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series 13 c. 2nd Coat: ProIndustrial High Performance Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 series 14 d. 3rd Coat: ProIndustrial High Performance Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 series 15 2. Metal - Ferrous (Structural Iron & Steel, Tanks, Water Towers, Sashes, Trim, 16 Conductors, Ducts, Vents, (Non-Galvanized)) 17 a. Semi-Gloss Finish 18 b. Primer: ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series 19 c. 2nd Coat: ProIndustrial High Performance Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 series 20 d. 3rd Coat: ProIndustrial High Performance Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 series 21 1) if corrosion is evident specify KemBond Alkyd Primer 22 3. Exterior Steel: (Hollow Metal Doors and Frames) 23 a. Surface Prep: SSPC SP 2. 24 b. Primer: “ProCryl Universal Primer B66-310 Series,” at 4 mils DFT. 25 c. Paint: “DTM Acrylic Coating,” two (2) coats at 2.5-4 mils DFT each coat. 26 d. Sheen: B66-200 Semi-Gloss 27 4. CMU - (Concrete Masonry Units) 28 a. Flat Finish 29 b. Filler: PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 30 c. 2nd Coat: A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series 31 d. 3rd Coat: A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series 32 5. Wood - painted (trim) 33 a. Semi-gloss / Gloss Finish 34 b. Primer: Exterior Latex Wood Primer, B42W8041 35 c. 2nd Coat: A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series 36 d. 3rd Coat: A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series 37 38 E. INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 39 1. Note: When adhesion promoting primer is required, specify 40 Multi-Purpose Primer, B51W0450 41 2. Gypsum Board (Office Areas): 42 a. Surface Prep: Sand imperfections and remove dust. 43 b. Surfacer: Joint Compound. 44 c. Primer: “ProMar 200 Interior Latex Primer B28W08200 Series,” at 1.5 45 mils DFT. 46 d. Paint: “ProMar 200 Interior Latex B28W8200 Series,” two coats at 1.5 47 mils DFT each coat. 48 e. Sheen: Egg-shell 49 3. Gypsum Board (Ceilings): 50 a. Surface Prep: Sand imperfections and remove dust. 51 b. Surfacer: Joint Compound. 52 c. Primer: “ProMar 200 Interior Latex Primer B28W08200 Series,” at 1.5 53 mils DFT. 54 d. Paint: ProMar 200 Interior Latex B28W8200 Series,” two coats at 1.5 55 mils DFT each coat. 56 e. Sheen: Flat. 57 4. Interior Concrete Masonry Units: 58 a. Surface Prep: SSPC SP 13 and ICRI 310.2. 59 b. Block Filler: “Loxon Surfacer A24W200,” two (2) coats at 8 mils DFT

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 178 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 each coat. 2 c. Primer: “ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer B28W02600 3 Series,” at 1.5 – 2.5 mils DFT. 4 d. Paint: “Pro Industrial Waterborne Catalyzed Epoxy B73-360 Series,” two 5 (2) coats at 4 mils DFT each coat. 6 e. Sheen: Egg-Shell 7 5. Interior Steel (Includes Hollow Metal Doors and Frames): 8 a. Surface Prep: SSPC SP 2. 9 b. Primer: “ProCryl Universal Primer B66-310 Series,” at 4 mils DFT. 10 c. Pre-primed frames must be field primed. 11 d. Paint Type: “DTM Acrylic Coating B66-200 Series,” two (2) coats at 12 2.5-4 mils DFT each coat. 13 e. Sheen: Semi-Gloss. 14 15 III. EXECUTION 16 17 A. SURFACE PREPARATION: 18 1. Clean all surfaces to be painted. 19 2. Protect or remove adjacent materials not to be painted. 20 3. Protect completed work from the work of other trades. 21 4. Galvanized materials to receive paint shall have an approved galvanized 22 primer in addition to standard primers as listed in the Painting Schedule 23 24 B. MIXING: 25 1. Mix all paint products in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. 26 27 C. APPLICATION: 28 1. Apply all paint products in complete accordance with paint manufacturers' 29 recommendations. 30 2. Allow all exterior paints at least 48 hours drying time and interior paints at 31 least 24 hours drying time before application of subsequent coats. 32 3. Sand lightly between coats on all wood parts, including doors. 33 Materials may be applied with roller or brush. 34 4. Care shall be taken to ensure that factory primed materials are finish painted 35 with materials which are compatible. 36 5. When this is at variance with Painting Schedule notify the Architect for 37 alternative instructions. 38 39 D. FINISH: 40 1. Finished surfaces shall be uniform in finish and color and free of defects. 41 Edges of dissimilar paint or paint and other materials shall be clean and neat. 42 43 E. CORRECTIVE WORK: 44 1. Upon completion of painting work the finished work will be inspected by the 45 Architect and/or the Owner. 46 2. Work found defective by them will be repaired or replaced as necessary to 47 meet the standards of this specification for new work.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 179 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 09950: LEAD PAINT REMOVAL & ABATEMENT 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: The General Contractor shall provide all labor and 6 materials, tools and equipment for the potential removal and disposal of paint in the 7 Original Borough (circa 1971) portion of the existing building to be renovated. 8 1. Assume all demolition materials contain lead paint and dispose of 9 accordingly. 10 2. All chipped, cracked, loose and otherwise deteriorated paint shall be removed 11 from existing painted walls which are to remain in place upon the completion of 12 work. 13 3. Selected samples of existing paint have been tested for lead content and 14 found to be in excess of 5% lead, sometimes considerably in excess. The General 15 Contractor shall assume that all existing paint contains lead in sufficient 16 quantities to require controlled removal. 17 4. Apply an lead encapsulation coating to encapsulate and remediate lead based 18 paint and lead contaminated surfaces. 19 20 B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 21 1. All work of this section shall be performed by mechanics experienced in the 22 removal of lead paint. 23 2. Or Removal and disposal of work of this section may be performed by the 24 labor force of the General Contractor provided when such work is performed 25 under the supervision and at the direction of a certified lead paint removal 26 consultant. 27 28 C. SUBMISSIONS & SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS: (See EXECUTION below) 29 1. The General Contractor shall provide a complete description of all proposed 30 lead paint removal and disposal methods and procedures for the review of the 31 Architect and the Owner. 32 2. The General Contractor shall submit for the review and approval of the 33 Architect and the Owner the credentials and experience of the lead paint 34 removal/disposal consultant. 35 3. No work of this section, including general demolition work involving 36 potentially contaminated materials, shall proceed until the credentials of the 37 consultant and all methods, procedures for removal and disposal have been 38 reviewed and approved by the Architect and the Owner. 39 40 D. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS 41 1. Documents affecting work of this section include are not necessarily limited 42 to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings and 43 the Standard Form of Agreement. 44 2. All applicable Federal, State of Pennsylvania, and Local laws and regulations 45 shall apply to the work of this section as if included in full herein. Such laws and 46 regulations shall include but not necessarily be limited to: 47 a. United States Occupation Safety and Health Administration "Part 1926 48 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards", and "Lead in Construction 49 Compliance Directive CPL 2-2.58". 50 b. Northampton County Health Department Rules and Regulations, 51 Chapter 400. 52 Rules of the State of Pennsylvania Department of Environments Resources 53 regulating the disposal of lead contaminated materials. 54 3. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 55 information specifically related to work of this section:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 180 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 01095: Reference Standards & Definitions 2 02060: Demolition and Disposal 3 09900: Painting & Finishing 4 5 II. PRODUCTS 6 7 A. LEAD ENCAPSULATION COATING: 8 1. All lead encapsulation products specified shall be manufactured by SYNAVEX, 9 Denver City Center, 717 17th Street, Suite 1900, Denver, CO 80202, phone: 877- 10 528-3356, E-mail: [email protected] 11 2. Product: Lead X Clear Lead Encapsulation Coating. 12 3. Substitution of equal products may be made with the approval of the 13 Architect. 14 15 III. EXECUTION 16 A. PROTECTION: Protect all persons and property in accordance with all applicable rules 17 and regulations governing the removal of lead contaminated paint materials. 18 19 B. RECOMMENDED PAINT REMOVAL METHODS: 20 1. Wet sanding of loose paint 21 2. Finish sanding with mechanical sanders with HEPA vacuum. 22 3. Lot-heat stripping with heat guns or heat plates (less than 450 degrees F, 23 round edge scraper). 24 4. Solvent based non-caustic stripper in place (not methylene chloride). 25 6. Off site stripping with heat, chemicals or cold-tank dipping (restore all glued 26 joints). 27 a. (Hot tank dipping is not recommended unless contractor is prepared 28 to fully restore all glued joints). 29 30 C. PAINT REMOVAL METHODS NOT RECOMMENDED: 31 1. Torch or open flame burning that can vaporize lead and burn substrate. 32 2. Wet grit blasting 33 34 D. DETERIORATED PAINT: Deteriorated paint shall be completely removed, leaving only 35 paint layers tightly bound to the brick. 36 37 E. EXTERIOR PROTECTION: The ground surrounding the building shall be protected with 38 plastic sheeting or other approved method. Paint flakes, scrapings, and other similar 39 residues shall be removed and disposed of as lead contaminated material. 40 41 F. WATER BLASTING: If water blasting is employed the Contractor shall take all measures 42 to ensure all water contaminated with lead is collected and properly disposed. 43 44 G. PROTECTION: The Contractor shall take all measures to ensure that no worker 45 employed in paint removal or at the work site during paint removal activities shall be 46 exposed to lead at concentrations greater than the "Permissible Exposure Limit" (PEL) of 47 fifty micrograms per cubic meter of air averaged over an eight hour period. 48 1. The Contractor shall perform exposure assessment for all employees at the 49 work site as required in OSHA Part 1926. 50 2. The Contractor shall provide respirators to all workers employed in paint 51 removal procedures or present at the work site during paint removal procedures. 52 53 H. OSHA: The Contractor shall take all additional employee protective measures as 54 outlined in OSHA Part 1926 including, but not necessarily limited to protective clothing 55 and equipment, change areas, hand washing facilities, biological monitoring, and

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 181 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 training. 2 3 I. ASSEMENT: Upon completion of the exposure assessment the Contractor shall notify 4 in writing each employee of the results of the assessment. 5 6 J. COMPLIANCE: Prior to commencement of lead paint removal work the Contractor shall 7 prepare and establish a written compliance program to achieve compliance with OSHA 8 Part 1926 requirements and standards. The plan shall be reviewed by relevant 9 municipal and Pennsylvania authorities, the Architect and the Owner. Upon approval of 10 the plan the work shall proceed. All work shall be performed in accordance with the 11 plan. A new plan shall be prepared and submitted at any change in removal/disposal 12 procedures. 13 1. The plan shall include: 14 a. A description of each activity which lead is emitted, including 15 equipment used, materials involved, controls in place, crew size, 16 employee job responsibilities, operating procedures and maintenance 17 practices. 18 b. A description of the specific means that will be employed to achieve 19 compliance. 20 c. A report on the technology used in meeting the PEL. 21 Air monitoring data which documents the source of lead emissions. 22 d. A detailed schedule for implementation of the program. 23 Detailed description of all work practices. 24 e. Any other relevant information requested by municipal or Pennsylvania 25 authorities, the Architect or the Owner. 26 27 K. WARNING SIGNS: The Contractor shall provide and prominently display signs about 28 the work area reading: 29 WARNING 30 LEAD WORK AREA 31 POISON 32 NO SMOKING OR EATING 33 34 L. LEAD ENCAPSULATION COATING: The Contractor shall paint to encapsulate the 35 remaining lead paint using a lead paint encapsulation coating. 36 1. Apply encapsulation coating products in complete accordance with 37 manufacturers' recommendations. 38 2. SURFACE PREPARATION: 39 a. Clean all surfaces to be coated. 40 b. Protect or remove adjacent materials not to be coated. 41 c. Protect completed work from the work of other trades. 42 43 3. MIXING: 44 a. Mix lead paint encapsulation coating products in accordance with 45 manufacturers' recommendations. 46 47 4. APPLICATION: 48 a. Apply lead paint encapsulation coating products in complete 49 accordance with encapsulation coating manufacturers' recommendations. 50 b. Care shall be taken to ensure that encapsulation coating materials are 51 finish painted with materials which are compatible. 52

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 182 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 2 3 SECTION - 10160: TOILET COMPARTMENTS 4 5 I. GENERAL: 6 7 A. SCOPE: 8 1. Provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for a complete 9 installation of toilet compartments, and urinal screens as shown on the 10 drawings, specified herein and as required for proper completion of the work. 11 12 B. QUALITY: 13 1. All materials of this section shall comply with the Americans With Disabilities 14 Act, the handicapped requirements of the ANSI A112.1 Standards, and the 15 International Building Code, 2009 edition. 16 2. Work of this section shall conform to Federal Specification RR-P-1352-C. 17 18 C. SUBMITTALS: 19 1. Provide samples of materials of this section. 20 2. Provide manufacturer's specifications and installation recommendations upon 21 request of the Architect. 22 23 D. HANDLING: 24 1. Materials shall be delivered to job site in manufacturers' unopened 25 containers. 26 2. Containers shall be clearly marked as to manufacturer, brand name, and 27 identifying numbers as applicable. 28 3. Material shall be stored as recommended by the product manufacturers. 29 30 E. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 31 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 32 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 33 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 34 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 35 information specifically related to work of this section: 36 Section 06200: Finish Carpentry 37 Section 09310: Ceramic Tile 38 Section 10800: Toilet Accessories 39 40 II. PRODUCTS: 41 42 A. TOILET & URINAL SCREENS: 43 1. Toilet & Urinal Screens shall be POWDER SHIELD PS-FP-500 CORINTHIAN , 44 Overhead Braced, as manufactured by METPAR CORPORATION, 95 State Street, 45 Westbury, NY, 11590 (516-333-2600), or approved equal. 46 47 B. MATERIALS: 48 1. Powder Shield Metal Toilet Compartments & Urinal Screens: shall be floor 49 mounted overhead braced. 50 a. Doors: Finished to 1"(25.4mm) thick, constructed of two sheets of 51 22-gauge, bonderized, galvanized steel formed and cemented under 52 pressure to a honeycomb core. 53 1) Door face sheets are welded at intervals around the entire 54 perimeter. 55 2) All edges to be finished with a 20-gauge interlocking molding. 56 Corners are finished with pre-formed painted stainless steel (type

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 183 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 304) reinforcements. 2 3) Corners are to be welded internally to ensure that the 3 galvanized rust resistant coating is not removed. 4 4) Doors shall have internal steel reinforcements to secure 5 hardware items. 6 b. Panels: Finished to 1" (25.4mm) thick, constructed of 2 sheets of 20- 7 gauge bonderized, galvanized steel, formed and cemented under 8 pressure to a honeycomb core. 9 1) All partition edges are finished with a 20-gauge interlocking 10 molding. 11 2) Corners are finished with pre-formed painted stainless steel 12 (type 304) reinforcements. 13 c. Pilasters: Finished to 1 ¼" (31.75mm) thick, constructed of two sheets 14 of 20-gauge, bonderized, galvanized steel, formed and assembled with a 15 honeycomb core. 16 1) Face sheets are electrically welded at intervals around the 17 entire perimeter. 18 2) All pilasters will have a 3" (76.2mm) high #4 finish stainless 19 steel plinth (type 304) and have straight, flat sides with rounded 20 edges to match the pilaster profile. 21 3) Pilasters will have leveling bolts threaded to the pilaster 22 support bracket. 23 4) Floor mounting will be with #12 x 2½" (63.5mm) screws and 24 shields. 25 5) Headrail is anodized aluminum .050 (1.27mm) wall thickness 26 with anti-grip profile. 27 6) The headrail is set into a 16ga. channel reinforcement which 28 occupies the full width of the pilaster and is electrically welded in 29 place for maximum strength. 30 d. Fittings: Wall fittings are anodized aluminum .125" (3.175mm) wall 31 thickness. 32 1) Minimum of two fittings at each connection. 33 e. Hardware: Each compartment will be complete with all hardware, door 34 hinges, latch, stop and keeper, coat hook, as well as all necessary fittings 35 and fastenings for a complete installation. 36 1) Hinges and door strikes are fastened by means of tamper- 37 proof Torx-Pin Head through bolts, which are polished chrome 38 plated. 39 2) All other screws to be tamper-proof Torx-PinHead chrome 40 plated. 41 3) Doors are to be hung on a concealed, "stay-set", fully 42 adjustable, non-rising door mechanism. 43 4) Upper hinge pin shall be 3/8" (9.525mm) diameter steel. 44 All hinges will have wrap-around flanges with a minimum of 45 5/8"(15.875mm) wrap onto pilaster. 46 5) All doors will have a concealed ADA approved slide latch with 47 external "in-use" indicator. 48 f. Finish: All rust inhibitive coated material shall be chemically cleaned 49 and painted with multiple coats of Epoxy Hybrid Powder applied 50 electrostatically. 51 52 C. FABRICATION: 53 1. Doors shall be 24" inswinging for standard stalls, 32" clear opening minimum 54 wide outswinging for handicapped stalls. 55 2. Pilasters shall be the same thickness and construction as the doors.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 184 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2 D. COLORS: 3 1. Panels shall be selected from the manufacturer's standard color chart. 4 5 III. EXECUTION: 6 7 A. PREPARATION: 8 1. Examine the site conditions. 9 2. Ensure the correct location of built in framing, anchorage, and bracing 10 installed by others. 11 3. Fabricate system to field verified dimensions. 12 13 B. INSTALLATION: 14 1. Install partitions in strict accordance with the partition manufacturer's 15 recommendations. 16 a. Install partitions straight, level and plumb. 17 b. Equip each door with three hinges, one door latch, one coat hook and 18 bumper. 19 c. Install door strike keeper on each pilaster in alignment with door 20 latch. 21 d. Adjust hinges to locate doors in partial open position when unlatched, 22 except that out swinging doors shall return to closed position. 23 2. Leave work site in clean condition. 24 3. Clean completed installation.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 185 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 10440: IDENTIFYING DEVICES 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work 6 1. The General Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and 7 equipment for a complete installation of identifying devices as shown on the 8 drawings, as specified herein and as necessary for proper completion of the 9 work. 10 2. Identifying devices shall include: 11 a. Traffic signage: including but not limited to Stop Sign, Misc. Traffic 12 Signage, and Handicapped Parking Signs at locations as indicated on the 13 Drawings. 14 b. All rooms and all exit doors. 15 c. Room signage shall be in conformance with the Americans with 16 Disabilities Act, with raised Braille letters/numbers. 17 18 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 19 1. All materials of this section shall be custom manufactured by a vendor 20 regularly in the business of formed letter building signs and vinyl cut out letter 21 fabrication. 22 23 C. SUBMITTALS: 24 1. Provide shop drawings and samples of the materials specified in this section 25 for the review and approval of the Owner. 26 2. Drawings shall describe in detail the size, colors, materials, text and details 27 of construction of the formed letter building signs; and the size, color and text 28 of the interior signs. 29 30 D. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 31 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 32 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 33 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 34 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 35 information specifically related to work of this section: 36 Section 06200: Finish Carpentry 37 38 II. PRODUCTS 39 40 A. VINYL LETTER CUT-OUT SIGNS: 41 1. Vinyl Letter Cut-Out Signs, Pressure Sensitive Letters & Symbols. 42 a. Interior: Provide vinyl pressure sensitive letters and symbols on 43 interior locations. 44 b. Numbers shall be a min. 1 1/2" high, letters shall be a min. 3/4" high. 45 c. Handicapped symbol shall be in conformance with the requirements of 46 the Americans With Disabilities Act, and the 2012 TAS (Texas Accessibilty 47 Standards). 48 d. Type style shall be Helvetica Medium. 49 e. Color shall be selected by Owner from manufacturer’s standard color 50 chart. 51 52 53 III. PROCEDURES 54 55 A. EXAMINATION: 56 1. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is 57 to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely 58 completion.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 186 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 a. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2 3 B. PREPARATION: 4 1. Thoroughly examine surface condition prior to installation of all signage. 5 2. Correct any conditions which may have a deleterious effect upon signage. 6 3. Surface preparation: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dirt, 7 debris and loose particles. 8 a. Perform additional preparation procedures as required by 9 manufacturer's instructions. 10 11 C. INSTALLATION: 12 1. Install adhesive faced vinyl letters in strict accordance with manufacturer's 13 instructions. 14 2. All letters shall be plumb and level. 15 16

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 187 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 10520: FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 2 3 I. GENERAL 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. Provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for a complete 7 installation of fire extinguishers and fire extinguishers in semi-recessed cabinets 8 to be located as shown on the drawings, specified herein and as necessary for a 9 proper completion of the contract. 10 11 B. QUALITY: 12 1. Extinguishers shall be certified by Underwriters' Laboratories for the type and 13 location. 14 2. Installation shall conform to the standards of the National Fire Prevention 15 Association and the International Fire Code 2006. 16 17 C. SUBMITTALS: 18 1. Provide manufacturer's specifications for all products of this section. 19 20 D. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 21 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 22 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 23 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 24 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 25 information specifically related to work of this section: 26 Section 06200: Finish Carpentry 27 Section 09260: Gypsum Drywall 28 29 II. PRODUCTS 30 31 A. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS: 32 1. Fire Extinguishers & Cabinets shall be as manufactured by J. L. INDUSTRIES; 33 LARSEN'S MANUFACTURING COMPANY; JOHNSON©LEE division of F.W. LEE 34 CORPORATION; MODERN METAL PRODUCTS; POTTER-ROEMER, INC; WATROUS; 35 or approved equal. 36 2. Provide COSMIC ten pound type 2A-10BC rated fire extinguisher to be 37 located at each exterior man door/exit, at Kitchen-203, or as shown on the 38 drawings. 39 3. COSMOPOLITAN Model 1836 Stainless Steel Fire Extinguisher Cabinet. 40 a. Semi-recessed 1 1/2” Square Trim, Full Glazing, Clear Acrylic 41 b. Wall Opening: 11 1/2” w. x 25” h. x 4” d. 42 43 III. INSTALLATION 44 45 A. INSTALLATION: 46 1. Installation shall be in complete accordance with the recommendations of the 47 manufacturer. 48 a. Maximum mounting height shall be 48" from the finish floor to the 49 top of the highest operable part of the extinguisher. 50 2. All extinguishers shall be serviced, charged and tagged not more than 10 51 days prior to the issue of a "Certificate of Substantial Completion" for the project. 52 53

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 188 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 10550: POSTAL SPECIALTIES 2 3 I. GENERAL: 4 5 A. SCOPE: Provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for a complete 6 installation of Mail (Cell Phone) Lockers as shown on the drawings, specified herein and 7 as necessary for proper completion of the contract. 8 9 B. QUALITY: 10 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have a Quality System in 11 place to ensure and be able to substantiate that manufactured units conform to 12 requirements and match the approved design and must be ISO 9001:2008 13 certified. 14 15 C. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 16 1. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for 17 installation. 18 2. Cell phone locker components are shipped assembled. All finishes shall be 19 protected from soiling and damage during handling. 20 21 D. WARRANTY 22 1. Manufacturer's standard warranty to repair or replace components of mail 23 (cell phone) locker products that fail in materials or workmanship within 3 years 24 from date of substantial completion. 25 26 D. RELATED WORK AND DOCUMENTS 27 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 28 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 29 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 30 31 32 II. MATERIALS: 33 34 A. Mail (Cell Phone) Lockers: Mailboxes shall be 19000/19100 Series, Model 35 119058/19158-10 2 “B” Doors Wide 8” Deep Compartments recessed, front loading, 36 horizontal style mailboxes as manufactured by SALISBURY INDUSTRIES, 1010 East 62nd 37 Street, Los Angeles, CA 90001-1596, 1-800-624-5269 or approved equal. 38 1. Provide a minimum of (18) units in 4 (4) columns and a maximum of five (5) 39 rows/ units high. 40 2. Cell phone lockers with front access panel: Constructed entirely of heavy 41 duty aluminum; durable powder coated finish; both series are available with lar- 42 ger B doors and all doors include a clear plastic cardholder; with factory installed 43 master keyed locks. 44 3. Lock Type: Master keyed locks 45 a. Provide postal key for use of the mail deliverer. 46 4. Color:: Aluminum – standard. 47 5. Misc.: Color: Aluminum – standard. 48 49 B. CONSTRUCTION 50 1. Locker Doors: Fabricated from extruded heavy duty aluminum specially 51 formed for added strength and rigidity. 52 a. Doors: B Door – 8 gauge - .125 inch (3.17 mm) thick aluminum. 53 b. Single-Point Latch: Made of stainless steel, securely fastened to door. 54 2. Locker Body: Heavy duty aluminum specially formed for added strength and 55 rigidity and to ensure tight joints at fastening points. 56 3. Hinges:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 189 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 a. B size standard doors: Built-in continuous hinge. 2 b. Front access panel (19100 series only): Built-in continuous hinge. 3 4 III. EXECUTION 5 6 A. EXAMINATION 7 1. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. 8 2. f substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify 9 Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 10 11 B. PREPARATION 12 1. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Clean surfaces with mild dish 13 detergent. Do not use harsh abrasive cleaners. Lubricate locks with graphite 14 type lubricants only. 15 16 C. INSTALLATION 17 1. Install in accordance with Salsbury Industries’ installation instructions. 18 2. Anchor the units to the wall studs through the locker back and to the floor. 19 20 D. PROTECTION 21 1. Protect installed products until completion of project. 22 2. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before substantial completion. 23 24

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 190 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 SECTION - 10800: TOILET ACCESSORIES 2 3 I. GENERAL: 4 5 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work: 6 1. Provide all labor and materials, tools and equipment for a complete 7 installation of toilet accessories as shown on the drawings, specified herein, and 8 as necessary for proper completion of the work. 9 2. Work shall include but not be limited to mirror, toilet paper holder, soap 10 dispenser, and grab bars. 11 12 B. QUALITY: 13 1. All materials of this section shall comply with the Americans With Disabilities 14 Act, the handicapped requirements of ANSI A117.1, and the IBC Building Code, 15 2015 edition. 16 17 C. SUBMITTALS: 18 1. Provide manufacturers' catalogue sheets, specifications & recommendations 19 for installation for all materials of this section. 20 21 D. HANDLING: 22 1. Materials shall be delivered to job site in manufacturers' unopened 23 containers. 24 2. Containers shall be clearly marked as to manufacturer, brand name, and 25 identifying numbers as applicable. 26 3. Material shall be stored as recommended by the product manufacturers. 27 28 E. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 29 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 30 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 31 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 32 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 33 information specifically related to work of this section: 34 Section 09260: Gypsum Drywall 35 Section 09310: Ceramic Tile 36 Section 10160: Toilet Compartments 37 38 II. PRODUCTS 39 40 A. MANUFACTURERS: 41 1. Standard (Basis of Design): For the purpose of designation type and quality 42 for the work under this section, drawings and specifications are based on 43 BOBRICK WASHROOM EQUIPMENT, 11611 Hart St., North Hollywood, CA, 91605- 44 5882, (818) 982-9600, Fax (818) 503-1102, email: 45 [email protected] 46 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with these specifications, 47 products as manufactured by:, AMERICAN SPECIALTIES, INC., & BRADLEY 48 CORPORATION. 49 a. Other manufacturers may bid only after written approval of the 50 Architect. 51 b. Interested manufacturers must furnish full details of proposed 52 product, a list of installations similar in size and design, and must have a 53 minimum of five years experience in manufacturing and installing toilet 54 accessories. 55 56 B. ANCHORS:

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 191 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 1. Provide anchors capable of supporting all specified materials and use. 2 Coordinate location of studs/structure to support anchors. 3 4 C. LAVATORY MIRROR: 5 1. Mirrors: B-290 2436 or approved equal. One (1) at each sink in all toilet 6 rooms. 7 2. Construction shall be No.1 quality 1/4” polished plate glass with silver 8 coating and sealed with electrolytic copper plating. 9 3. Frame is Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish. 10 11 D. PAPER TOWL DISPENSER: 12 1. Provide one each, for each bathroom, Model B-262 CLASSIC SERIES paper 13 towel dispenser as manufactured by BOBRICK or approved equal. 14 2. Satin finish stainless steel, dispenses 400 C-fold or 500 multifold towels, 15 door with tumbler lock and piano hinge. 16 17 E. TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER: 18 1. Provide one each, for each toilet, Model B-2888 CLASSIC SERIES multi-roll 19 toilet tissue dispenser as manufactured by BOBRICK or approved equal. 20 2. Satin finish stainless steel with stainless steel dispensing mechanism, flush 21 tumbler lock, holds (2) rolls up to 5¼” dia., extra roll automatically drops in 22 place when bottom roll is depleted. 23 24 F. SOAP DISPENSER: 25 1. Provide one each, for each toilet room lavatory, Model B-2112 CLASSIC SERIES 26 all purpose lavatory-basin soap dispenser as manufactured by BOBRICK or 27 approved equal. 28 29 G. WATER CLOSET GRAB BARS: 30 1. Provide one-piece L-shaped grab bars at each handicapped accessible toilet, 31 Model B-5837, 1.25" dia. x 54" width x 36" depth, and Model B-5806 1.25" dia. 32 x 18" tall concealed mounting, satin finish or peened grip, horizontal mounted 33 as manufactured by BOBRICK or approved equal. 34 35 H. SANITARY NAPKIN/TAMPON VENDOR: (at Women’s & Unisex Restrooms) 36 1. Model B-352 CLASSIC SERIES as manufactured by BOBRICK or approved equal. 37 Stain finish stainless steel, seamless beveled flange, dispensing 30 napkins & 27 38 tampons, single coin mechanisms for $0.25 operation, semi-recessed 39 installation (rough wall opening 12 ½” W. x 26 3/8” H. x 6 ½” D. [max. 4” 40 protrusion} 61 ½” barrier-free mounting height). 41 42 I. SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL: (at Women’s & Unisex Restrooms) 43 1. Model B-354 CLASSIC SERIES as manufactured by BOBRICK or approved equal. 44 2. Stain finish stainless steel, mounts in toilet partition to serve (2) toilet stalls, 45 self-closing panels cover openings, removable leakproof 1.2 gal. 46 3. Plastic receptacle (rough partition opening 11” W. x 15 ½” H. x 4” D. [max. 4” 47 protrusion} 31” barrier-free mounting height). 48 49 J. COAT HOOKS: 50 1. Model B-2116 Heavy Duty Clothes Hook w/ Concealed Mounting as 51 manufactured by BOBRICK or approved equal. 52 2. Provide one each at each toilet stall. 53 54 K. HANDICAP EXPOSED PIPE INSULATION: 55 1. Handicap Exposed Pipe Insulation at public toilet rooms protect exposed

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 192 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 pipes with TRAP WRAP 500 SERIES as manufactured by BROCAR PRODUCTS, INC. , 2 1-800-827-1207 x-105, Website: www.brocar.com 3 4 III. EXECUTION: 5 6 A. INSTALLATION: 7 1. Assemble fixtures and associated fittings and trim in accordance with 8 manufacturer's instructions. 9 2. Coordinate the location of required structural supports and electrical wiring 10 as required for proper installation of bathroom accessories. 11 3. Install supports attached to building structure for equipment requiring 12 supports. 13 4. Grab Bars: Install grab bars to withstand downward force of not less than 14 250 lbf (1112 N) per ASTM F 446. 15 5. Install equipment level, plumb, and firmly in place in accordance with 16 manufacturer's rough-in drawings. 17 18 B. CLEANING & PROTECTION: 19 1. Repair or replace defective work, including damaged equipment and 20 components. 21 2. Clean unit surfaces, and leave in ready-to-use condition. 22 3. Turn over keys, tools, maintenance instructions, and maintenance stock to 23 Owner. 24 25 C. TESTING & ADJUSTING: 26 1. Test each piece of equipment provided with moving parts to assure proper 27 operation, freedom of movement, and alignment. 28 2. Install new batteries in battery-powered items. 29 3. Repair or replace malfunctioning equipment, or equipment with parts that 30 bind or are misaligned. 31 32 33 34 35

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 193 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 2 3 SECTION - 12310: CABINETS, CASEWORK & COUNTERTOPS 4 5 I. GENERAL 6 7 A. SCOPE: Description of the Work 8 1. The General Contractor shall provide all labor and materials, tools and 9 equipment for a complete installation of cabinets, casework and counter tops as 10 shown on the drawings, specified herein and as necessary complete the 11 construction. 12 13 B. QUALITY CONTROL: 14 1. Cabinets and tops shall be the recommendations of the NKCA and comply 15 with ANSI specification #A161-1-1990. 16 2. Cabinets and tops shall comply with HUD standard for "SEVERE USE". 17 18 C. REFERENCES 19 1. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 20 a. ASTM A591-A591/A591M-98 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 21 Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light Coating Weight [Mass] Applications 22 b. ASTM B-209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum- 23 Alloy Sheet and Plate 24 2. U.S. General Services Administration, Federal Supply Service, QQ-A250/8 – 25 Federal Specification for Aluminum Alloys 26 3. Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (KCMA), KCMA A161.1-2000 - 27 Performance and Construction Standard for Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets 28 4. U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD), Directive 4910.1, 29 Section 611-1.1 – Minimum Property Standards for Housing, Kitchen and Vanity 30 Cabinets. 31 32 D. SUBMITTALS 33 1. The General Contractor shall provide as-built measurements of all spaces to 34 receive cabinets and tops prior to fabrication of any materials specified in this 35 section. 36 a. Failure to coordinate as built dimensions with those of fabricated 37 cabinets and tops may require, at the option of the Architect and Owner, 38 replacement of fabricated cabinets and/or tops. 39 b. Such replacement will be performed without additional cost to the 40 Owner. 41 2. Submit shop drawings of all cabinet and top arrangements. 42 a. Provide manufacturers' catalogue sheets on all materials specified in 43 this section. 44 45 E. PROJECT CONDITIONS 46 1. Field Measurements: Verify actual finished openings and plumbing and 47 electrical locations by field measurements before fabrication. 48 2. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction 49 progress to avoid construction delays. 50 a. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, 51 establish dimensions and proceed with fabrication without field 52 measurements. 53 3. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to 54 established dimensions. 55 56 F. HANDLING: 57 1. Deliver all cabinets and tops in the manufacturers' unopened containers.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 194 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2. Store all materials in an enclosed, protected space. 2 3. Protect all materials from excessive heat, humidity, moisture and damage. 3 4. Damaged cabinet sections or tops will be replaced at the judgment of the 4 Architect and the Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. 5 6 G. WARRANTY: 7 1. Manufacturer’s standard warranty period shall commence on Date of 8 Certificate of Substantial Completion. 9 2. Manufacturer’s Warranty 10 a. Warranty shall be two (2)-years in which the owner shall be provided 11 at no additional charge, parts and labor for one (1) year, parts only for an 12 additional one (1)-year. 13 14 H. RELATED WORK & DOCUMENTS: 15 1. Documents affecting work of this section include and are not necessarily 16 limited to General and Special Requirements of Division 1, the Contract Drawings 17 and the Form of Construction Agreement. 18 2. See the referenced specification sections for special requirements and 19 information specifically related to work of this section: 20 Section 06067: High Pressure Laminates 21 Section 06200: Finish Carpentry 22 Section 09500: Gypsum Drywall 23 24 II. PRODUCTS 25 26 A. CABINETS: (Laminated Melamine Cabinet Boxes with Laminated Melamine Doors) 27 1. Laminated Melamine Cabinet Boxes 28 a. Shall be frameless construction. 29 b. Cabinet top, bottom, end panels and shelves shall be constructed of 30 3/4” [19 mm] thick particle board, 45 pound density, covered in 31 melamine on both sides and exposed edges. 32 c. Cabinet backs shall be 1/4” [6 mm] white Masonite covered in 33 melamine on interior surface. 34 d. Cabinet components are glued and doweled under pressure for 35 strength and squareness. 36 e. Toe boards shall be particleboard with vinyl laminate surface. 37 f. Drawer boxes shall be constructed of 1/2" [13 mm] wood. Drawer 38 bottom will be 1/4" [6 mm] plywood. 39 g. Hinges shall be fully concealed, six-way adjustable and open 110º. 40 Cabinets shall conform to ANSI/KCMA A161.1-2000. 41 h. Color: Shall be as selected by the Owner from manufacturer’s 42 standard colors. 43 2. Laminated Melamine Doors 44 a. Shall be constructed of 3/4" [19 mm] thick particleboard, 45 pound 45 density, with face, back and edges covered in melamine. 46 b. Shall not be drilled for handle holes. 47 c. Shall be supplied with 4” centered bail handles in a brushed chrome 48 finish. 49 D. Color: Shall be as selected by the Owner from manufacturer’s 50 standard colors. 51 Style: Slab 52 3. Handles: standard type 4” [101.60 mm] centered bail handles in brushed 53 chrome]. 54 55 B. COUNTER TOPS: 56 1. Counter tops shall be post-formed tops fabricated 1/16" high pressure 57 laminate, NEVAMAR Brand, or approved equal.

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 195 of 196 1 Borough of Freemansburg / Proposed Addition & Renovations / April 23, 2019

1 2. Tops shall be fabricated of medium density particle board. 2 3. Color shall be as selected by the Owner. 3 4 III. PROCEDURES 5 6 A. EXAMINATION: 7 1. Examine areas to receive product. 8 a. Do not begin installation until areas are in satisfactory condition. 9 b. Ensure horizontal blocking, if necessary, and floor are complete. 10 11 B. INSTALLATION: 12 1. Install all cabinets and tops in complete accordance with the 13 recommendations of the cabinet/countertop manufacturers. 14 2. Scribe all units to the walls and floors. 15 3. Set units square, plumb and level. 16 4. Bolt/screw all units to wall as recommended by the manufacturers. 17 18 C. CLEANUP: 19 1. Thoroughly clean all installed cabinets and tops upon completion of the work. 20 2. Remove all glues, stains and debris. 21 3. Clean units only with cleaning agents as recommended by the manufacturers. 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 END OF ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

2 Portner & Hetke Architects 160 Main Street, Emmaus, PA 18049 (610)928-4040 3 Page 196 of 196